tEfje (HntbersWp
OF
prtttsSf) Columbia
CALENDAR
FIFTEENTH SESSION
1929- 1930
VANCOUVER, BRITISH COLUMBIA
1929 W$t Umbersttp
OF
prtttej) Coiumfota
CALENDAR
FIFTEENTH SESSION
1929-1930
VANCOUVER, BRITISH COLUMBIA
1929 *^. AT CONTENTS
Page
Academic Year „ _ 5
Visitor 7
Chancellor „ _ 7
President 7
The Board of Governors -~ 7
The Senate .*.. 7
Officers and Staff 8
Historical Sketch - 15
The Constitution of the University 17
The Work of the University 18
Retiring Allowances 19
Endowments and Donations 20
Suggested Local Scholarships 23
The Library 23
Location and Buildings 25
General Information 38
Admission to the University 42
Registration and Attendance _ 45
Fees 48
Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 51
Faculty op Arts and Science
Time Table of Lectures 66
Time Table of Supplemental Examinations 70
Regulations in Reference to Courses
First and Second Years 72
Third and Fourth Years—Pass 75
Third and Fourth Years—Honours 76
For the M.A. Degree 82
Examinations and Advancement 88
Courses of Instruction—
Department of Bacteriology 91
" Botany 93
" Chemistry 99
" Classics 104
" " Economics, Sociology and Political Science 10S
" Education 113
" English 119
" Geology and Geography 126
" History 131
" Mathematics 139
" " Modern Languages 144
" Philosophy 149
" Physics 152
" Zoology 157
Faculty op Applied Science
Foreword 161
Regulations in Reference to Courses 162
General Outline of Courses 164
Courses in—
Chemical Engineering 168
Chemistry 169
Civil Engineering 171
Electrical Engineering 173
Forest Engineering 174 The University op British Columbia
Geological Engineering 176
Mechanical Engineering 178
Metallurgical Engineering 180, 182
Mining Engineering 180, 183
Nursing and Health 184
Double Course in Arts and Applied Science 192
Courses Leading to the Degree of M.A.Sc 192
Examinations and Advancement 194
Courses of Instruction—
Department of Botany 196
" Chemistry 200
" Civil Engineering 204
" Economics 215
" Forestry 215
" Geology and Geography 220
" Mathematics 225
" Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 227
" Mining and Metallurgy 238
" Physics 242
" Nursing and Health 244
" Zoology 249
Faculty of Agriculture
Time Table of Lectures 252
Regulations in Reference to Courses—■' 4
For the B.S.A. Degree 255
The Occupational Course 255
Short Courses 256
Extension Courses 256
Graduate Work 257, 262
Courses in—
Agronomy Major 259
Animal Husbandry Major 260
Dairying Major 260
Horticulture Major 261
Poultry Husbandry Major 261
Botany (Plant Pathology) Major 261
Zoology (Entomology) Major 262
Examinations and Advancement 263
Courses in Instruction—
Department of Agronomy 266
" " Animal Husbandry 269
" Dairying 272
" Horticulture 275
" Poultry Husbandry 278
"' " Agricultural Economics 281
" Genetics 282
List of Students in Attendance, Session 1928-29 285
Degrees Conferred, 1928 328
Medals, Scholarships and Prizes Awarded, 1928 333
Summer Session 337
Canadian Officers' Training Corps 338
Student Organization 340
Inter-University Exchange of Undergraduates 344
Affiliated Colleges—
Victoria College : 345
Union College of British Columbia 346
The Anglican Theological College of British Columbia 346 Academic Year
ACADEMIC YEAR, 1929-1930
1929
Monday,
August 26th.
Sunday,
September 1st.
Monday,
September 2nd.
Wednesday,
September llth.
Tuesday, -
September 17th.
Wednesday,
September 18th.
Friday,
September 20th.
Monday,
September 23rd.
Tuesday,
September 24th.
Wednesday,
September 25th.
Monday,
October 7th.
Saturday,
October 12th.
Wednesday,
October 16th.
Wednesday,
October 16th.
Wednesday,
October 30th.
Monday,
November llth.
Friday,
December 6th.
Monday,
December 9th, to
Wednesday,
December 18th.
Wednesday,
December 25th.
Matriculation Supplemental Examina'tions begin.
ACADEMIC YEAR begins.
Labour Day. University closed.
Supplemental Examinations in Arts begin.
Supplemental Examinations in Applied Science
begin.
Last day for Registration of First Year Students
in the Faculties of Arts and Science, and
Agriculture.
Last day .for Registration of all other students.
First Year Students in all Faculties report at
3 p.m. in the Auditorium.
The opening addresses to the students of all the
Faculties at 3 p.m. in the Auditorium.
Lectures begin at 9 a.m.
Last day for payment of First Term fees.
Last day for change in Students' courses.
Last day for payment of fees for Autumn Graduation.
Meeting of the Senate.
Congregation.
Armistice and Thanksgiving Day.
closed November 9th and llth.
University
Last day of Lectures for Term.
JeSTsth. } laminations.
Meeting of the Senate.
Christmas Day. University closed December
24th-26th, inclusive. The University of British Columbia
1930
Wednesday,
January 1st.
Monday,
January 6th.
Monday,
January 20th.
Wednesday,
February 19th.
Thursday,
April 10th.
New Year's Day. University closed December
31st and January 1st.
Second Term begins.
Last day for payment of Second Term fees.
Meeting of the Senate.
Last day of Lectures.
ApFrUdlTth, to Apriimh. } Sessional Examinations.
Field Work in Applied Science begins immediately at the close of the Examinations.
Friday,
April 18th.
Monday,
April 21st
' Thursday,
April 24th.
Wednesday,
May 7th.
Thursday,
May 8th.
Thursday,
May 8th.
Saturday,
May 24th.
Tuesday,
June 3rd.
June 16th to
June 30th.
Tuesday,
July 1st.
Wednesday,
July 2nd.
Saturday
August 23rd.
Friday,
August 29th.
Sunday,
August 31st.
Good Friday. University closed.
Easter Monday. University closed.
Last day for payment of Graduation fees.
Meeting of the Senate.
Congregation.
Meeting of Convocation.
Victoria Day. University closed.
King's Birthday. University closed.
Junior and Senior Matriculation Examinations.
(Time-tables to be arranged.)
Dominion Day. University closed.
Summer Session begins.
Summer Session ends.
Meeting of the Senate.
ACADEMIC YEAR ends. THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH
COLUMBIA
VISITOR
The Hon. R. Randolph Bruce, Lieutenant-Governor of
British Columbia.
CHANCELLOR
R. E. McKechnie, Esa., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.C.S.
PRESIDENT
L. S. Klinck, Esa., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D.
BOARD OF GOVERNORS
R. E. McKechnie, Esa., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.C.S. (ex officio).
L. S. Klinck, Esa., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D. (ex officio).
Mrs. Evlyn F. K. Farris, M.A., LL.D., Vancouver. Term expires 1929.
Denis Murphy, Hon. Mr. Justice, Vancouver. Term expires 1929.
Henry C. Shaw, Esa., B.A., Vancouver. Term expires 1929,
Robie L. Reid, Esa., Vancouver. Term expires 1931.
"Campbell Sweeny, Esq.
Christopher Spencer, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1931.
B. C. Nicholas, Esq., Victoria. Term expires 1933.
Joseph N. Ellis, Esq., B.C.L., K.C, Vancouver. Term expires 1933.
W. H. Malkin, Esq., Vancouver. Term expires 1933.
SENATE
(a) The Minister of Education, The Honourable Joshua Hinchlifte, B.A.
The Chancellor, R. E. McKechnie, Esa., M.D., CM., LL.D., F.A.C.S.
The President (Chairman), L. S. Klinck, Esa., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D.
(6) Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, F. M. Clement, Esa., B.S.A., M.A.
Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science, Reginald W. Brock, Esq.,
M.A., LL.D., F.G.S., F.R.S.C.
Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, Daniel Buchanan, Esq.,
M.A., Ph.D., F.R.S.C.
Representatives of the Faculty of Agriculture: H. M. King, Esq.,
B.S.A., M.S.; A. F. Barss, Esq., A.B., B.S. in Agr., M.S.
Representatives of the Faculty of Applied Science: William E.
Duckering, Esq., A.B., B.S. in C.E., C.E.; R. H. Clark, Esa.,
M.A., Ph.D.
Representatives of the Faculty of Arts and Science: Henry F. Angus,
Esa., B.A., B.C.L., M.A.; M. Y. Williams, Esq., B.Sc, Ph.D.,
F.G.S.A., F.R.S.C
'Deceased. The University op British Columbia
(c) Appointed by the Lieutenant-Governor in Council:—
His Honour Peter S. Lampman, Victoria.
James Henderson, Esa., M.A., Vancouver.
James A. Campbell, Esq.., B.A., Vancouver.
(d) The Superintendent of Education, S. J. Willis, Esq., B.A., LL.D.
The Principal of Vancouver Normal School, D. M. Robin-son, Esa., B.A.
The Principal of Victoria Normal School, D. L. MacLaurin, Esa., B.A.
(«) Representative of High School Principals and Assistants, G. W.
Clark, Esa., M.A.
(/) Representatives of Affiliated Colleges:—
Victoria College, Victoria, P. H. Elliott, Esa., M.Sc.
Union College of British Columbia, Vancouver (Theological),
Rev. J. G. Beotn, M.A., D.D.
The Anglican Theological College of British Columbia, Vancouver, Rev. W. H. Vance, M.A., D.D.
(g) Elected by Convocation:—
T. H. Boggs, Esa., M.A., Ph.D., Vancouver.
G. G. Sedgewick, Esa., B.A., Ph.D., Vancouver.
His Honour F. W. Howay, LL.B., F.R.S.C, New Westminster.
A. E. Lord, Esa., B.A., Vancouver.
Sherwood Lett, Esa., B.A., Vancouver.
A. E. Richards, Esa., B.S.A., Agassiz.
Rev. A. H. Sovereign, M.A., B.D., F.R.G.S., Vancouver.
His Honour J. D. Swanson, B.A., Kamloops.
G. W. Scott, Esa., B.A., Vancouver.
Mrs. Beatrice Wood, B.A.Sc., Vancouver.
C. Killam, Esa., M.A., LL.B., D.C.L., Vancouver.
Miss A. B. Jamieson, B.A., Vancouver.
The Most Rev. A. U. de Pencier, M.A., D.D., Vancouver.
Sydney Anderson, Esa., B.A.Sc, Vancouver.
W. B. Burnett, Esa., B.A., M.D., CM., F.A.CS., Vancouver.
OFFICERS AND STAFF
L. S. Klinck, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S.A., D.Sc. (Iowa State College),
LL.D. (Western Ontario), President.
"Daniel Buchanan, M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), F.R.S.C, Dean
of the Faculty of Arts and Science.
Reginald W. Brock, M.A., LL.D. (Queen's), F.G.S., F.R.S.C, Dean of
the Faculty of Applied Science.
F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Dean of the
Faculty of Agriculture.
Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Columbia), Dean of Women.
George M. Weir, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Sask.), D. Paed. (Queen's),
Director of the Summer Session and Extra-sessional Classes.
Stanley W. Mathews, M.A. (Queen's), Registrar.
Miss E. B. Abernethy, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Registrar.
F. Dallas, Bursar.
John Ridington, Librarian. Officers and Staff
FACULTY COUNCIL
The President (Chairman), L. S. Klinck, Esq., M.S.A., D.Sc, LL.D.
Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, F. M. Clement, Esa., B.S.A., M.A.
Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science, Reginald W. Brock, Esq., M.A.,
LL.D., F.G.S., F.R.S.C
Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science, Daniel Buchanan, Esq., M.A.,
Ph.D., F.R.S.C.
Representative of the Faculty of Agriculture, P. A. Boving, Esq.,
Cand.Ph., Cand.Agr.
Representative of the Faculty of Applied Science, J. M. Turnbull, Esa.,
B.A.Sc.
Representative of the Faculty of Arts and Science, H. Ashton, Esq.,
M.A.; D. Lett, D. Litt, F.R.S.C, Officier de l'Instruction Publique,
Chevalier de la Legion d'Honneur.
Department of Agronomy
P. A. Boving, Cand. Ph. (Malmo, Sweden), Cand. Agr. (Alnarp. Agriculture, Sweden), Professor and Head of the Department.
G. G. Moe, B.S.A., M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Cornell), Associate Professor.
D. G. Laird, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Wisconsin), Assistant Professor.
Geo. B. Boving, B.S.A. (McGill), Assistant.
Department of Animal Husbandry
H. M. King, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Oregon Agricultural College),
Professor and Head of the Department.
R. L. Davis, B.S. (Montana), M.S. (Iowa State College), Assistant
Professor.
H. R. Hare, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Assistant Professor.
J. G. Jervis, VS. (Ont. Vet Col.), B.V.Sc. (Toronto), Lecturer in
Veterinary Science.
Department of Bacteriology
Hibbebt Winslow Hill, M.B., M.D., D.P.H. (Toronto), L.M.C.C, Professor and Head of the Department.
Mrs. C Stewart, M.A. (Brit Col.), Instructor.
Miss Helen M. Mathews, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant
Miss E. Guernsey, M.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant.
Department of Botany
Andrew H. Hutchinson, M.A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor
and Head of the Department.
Frank Dickson, B.A. (Queen's), Associate Professor.
John Davidson, F.L.S., F.B.S.E., Assistant Professor.
William Newton, B.S.A. (McGill), M.S., Ph.D. (California), Honorary
Lecturer in Plant Physiology.
Miss Jean Davidson, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
R. W. Pillsbury, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Miss Margaret Keillor, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant. 10 The University op British Columbia
Department of Chemistry
Robert H. Clark, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Leipsig), F.R.S.C, Professor
and Head of the Department.
E. H. Archibald, B.Sc. (Dal.), A.M., Ph.D. (Harvard), F.R.S.E.&C,
Professor of Analytical Chemistry.
W. F. Sever, B.A., M.Sc. (Alberta), Ph.D. (McGill), Associate Professor.
M. J. Marshall, M.Sc. (McGill), Ph.D. (Mass. Inst, of Technology),
Associate Professor.
J. Allen Harris, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Illinois), Assistant Professor.
William Ure, M.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (California Institute of Technology), Assistant Professor.
John Allardyce, M.A. (Brit CoL), Instructor.
H. R. L. Streight, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
A. Ernest Morell, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
E. C Hallonquist, B.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant.
F. L. Munro, B.A. (Brit. CoL), Assistant.
Department of Civil Engineering
William E. Duckering, A.B., B.S. in C.E., CE. (Washington), Professor
and Head of the Department.
E. G. Matheson, B.A.Sc. (McGill), M.E.I.C, M.Am.S.CE., Associate
Professor.
F. A. Wilkin, B.A.Sc. (McGill), Assistant Professor.
Allan H. Finlay, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), M.S. in CE. (Illinois), Assistant
Professor.
A. Lighthall, B.Sc. (McGill), Assistant Professor,
A. G. Stuart, B.Sc. (McGill), Instructor.
John Craig Oliver, B.A., B.A.Sc. (Brit Col.), Instructor.
Department of Classics
Lemuel Robertson, M.A. (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department.
O. J. Todd, Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor of Greek.
H. T. Logan, M.C, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Oxon.), Associate Professor.
Geoffrey B. Riddehough, B.A. (Brit Col.), M.A. (Calif.), Instructor.
George F. Davidson, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Department of Dairying
Wilfrid Sadler, B.S.A., M.Sc. (McGill), N.D.D., British Dairy Institute,
University College, Reading, England, Professor and Head of the
Department
N. S. Golding, N.D.A., N.D.D., B.S.A. (Toronto), M.Sc. (Iowa), Associate
Professor.
Blythe Eagles, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Ph.D. (Toronto), Assistant Professor.
Miss Lenora Irwin, B.A. (Brit. Col.), M.Sc. (McGill), Assistant Officers and Staff 11
Department of Economics, Sociology and Political Science
Theodore H. Boggs, B.A. (Acadia and Yale), M.A., Ph.D. (Yale), Professor and Head of the Department.
Henry F. Angus, B.A. (McGill), B.CL., M.A. (Oxon.), Associate Professor.
*S. E. Beckett, M.A. (Queen's), Associate Professor.
G. F. Drummond, M.A. (St Andrew's), M.Sc. (Econ.) (London),
Assistant Professor.
Mrs. Doris E. Lazenby, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Peter F^ Palmer, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant
Department of Education
George M. Weir, B.A. (McGill), M.A. (Sask.), D.Paed. (Queen's), Professor and Head of the D^paHipent.
Mrs. Jennie Wyman Pilchbr, BA^MiSc. (New Zealand), A.M., Ph.D.
(Stanford), Associate Professor of "Psychology and Education.
H. T. J. Coleman, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D; (Columbia), Special Lecturer.
Department of English
G. G. Sedgewick, B.A. (Dal.), Ph.D. (Harvard), Professor and Head of
the Department A
W. L. MacDonald, B.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Ph.D. (Harvard),
Professor.
Frederick G. C Wood, B.A. (McGill), A.M. (Harvard), Associate Professor.
Thorleif Larsen, M.A. (Toronto), B.A. (Oxon.), Associate Professor.
(On leave of absence 1929-30.)
Francis Cox Walker, B.A. (U.N.B.), A.M., Ph.D. (Harvard), Associate
Professor.
Miss M. L. Bollert, M.A. (Toronto), A.M. (Columbia), Assistant Professor.
Frank H. Wilcox, A.B., Ph.D. (California), Assistant Professor.
Philip Albert Child, B.A. (Toronto), A.M., Ph.D. (Harvard), Assistant
Professor.
Miss Dorothy Blakey, M.A. (Brit. Col.), M.A. (Toronto), Assistant
Miss M. D. Mawdsley, B.A. (McGill), Assistant.
Department of Forestry
H. R. Christie, B.ScF. (Toronto), Professor and Head of the Department.
F. Malcolm Knapp, B.S.F. (Syracuse), M.S.F. (Wash.), Assistant Professor.
R. M. Brown, B.Sc.F. (Toronto), Honorary Lecturer in Forest Products-
'Deceased. 12 The University of British Columbia
Department of Geology and Geography
R. W. Brock, M.A., LL.D. (Queen's), F.G.S., F.R.S.C, Professor and
Head of the Department.
S. J. Schofield, M.A., B.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Mass. Institute of Technology), F.G.S.A., F.R.S.C, Professor of Physical and Structural
Geology.
M. Y. Williams, B.Sc. (Queen's), Ph.D. (Yale), F.G.S.A., F.R.S.C,
Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy.
T. C. Phemister, B.Sc. (Glasgow), Sc.M, (Chicago), Ph.D., D.Sc. (Glasgow), Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrology.
Department of History
D. C Harvey, B.A. (Dal.), M.A. (Oxon.), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head
of the Department. ____
W. N. Sage, B.A. (Toronto), M;A7^0xon.), ph.D. (Toronto), Professor.
F. H. Soward, B.A. (Toronto), B.Litt (Oxon.), Assistant Professor.
A. C. Cooke, B.A. (Manitoba), M.A. (Oxon.), Assistant Professor.
Francis Painter, B.A. (Brit. Cpl.), Assistant
Miss Sylvia Thrupp, B.A. (Brit. Col.),.Assistant
Department of Horticulture
F. M. Clement, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.A. (Wisconsin), Professor and Head
of the Department
A. F. Barss, A.B. (Rochester), B.S. in Agr. (Cornell), M.S. (Oregon
Agricultural College), Professor.
F. E. Buck, B.S.A. (McGill), Associate Professor.
G. H. Harris, B.S.A. (Brit Col.), M.S. (Oregon State College), Ph.D.
(California), Assistant Professor.
Department of Mathematics
Daniel Buchanan, M„A. (McMaster), Ph.D. (Chicago), F.R.S.C, Professor and Head of the Department
F. S. Nowlan, B.A. (Acadia), A.M. (Harvard), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor.
George E. Robinson, B.A. (Dal.), Associate Professor.
E. E. Jordan, M.A. (Dal.), Associate Professor.
L. Richardson, B.Sc. (London), Associate Professor.
B. S. Hartley, M.A. (Cantab.), R.N. (retired), Assistant Professor. -
Miss May L. Barclay, M.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant
Miss C Islay Johnston, M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
H. D. Smith, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
C G. Patten, B.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant.
R. D. James, B.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant.
Miss Mary E. Pollock, B.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant Officers and Staff 13
Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering
Herbert Vickers, M.E. (Liverpool), M.Sc, Ph.D. (Birmingham), Professor and Head of the Department
F. W. Vernon, B.Sc.Eng. (London), Wh.Sch., A.M.I.Mech.E., A.F.R.A.S.,
Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering.
H. F. G. Letson, M.C, B.Sc. (Brit Col.), Ph.D. Engineering (London),
A.M.I. Mech. E., Assistant Professor of Mechanical and Electrical
Engineering.
Leonard B. Stacey, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Professor of Electrical
Engineering.
E. Geoffrey Cull wick, B.A. (Cantab.), Assistant Professor of Electrical
Engineering.
G. Sinclair Smith, M.A.Sc. (McGill), Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering.
John F. Bell, Eng. Capt. O.B.E., R.N., M.E.I.C, Instructor in Mechanical Engineering.
H. P. Archibald, BA.Sc. (McGill), Assistant in Drawing.
Department of Mining and Metallurgy
J. M. Turnbull, B.A.Sc. (McGill), Professor and Head of the Department
H. N. Thomson, B.Sc. (McGill), Professor of Metallurgy.
George A. Gillies, M.Sc. (McGill), Associate Professor of Mining.
W. B. Bishop, Assistant in Metallurgy.
Department of Modern Languages
H. Ashton, M.A. (Cantab.), D. Lett (Univ. Paris), D. Litt (Birmingham), F.R.S.C, Officier de l'lnstruction Publique (France),
Chevalier de la Legion d'Honneur, Professor and Head of the Department.
A. F. B. Clark, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Harvard), Associate Professor
of French.
Miss Isabel MacInnes, M.A. (Queen's), Ph.D. (California), Associate
Professor of Modern Languages.
*Henri Chodat, M.A. (McGill and Harvard), Officier d'Academie
(France), Associate Professor of French.
Miss Janet T. Greig, B.A. (Queen's), M.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant Professor of French.
Miss Joyce Hallamore, M.A. (Brit Col.), Instructor in German.
E. E. Delavault, L. en D. (Paris), Assistant in French.
Madame G. Barry, Assistant in French.
Miss Wessie Tipping, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant in French.
Madame Darlington, Assistant in French.
Miss Dorothy Dallas, M.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant in French.
*Deceased. 14 The University op British Columbia
Department of Nursing and Health
Hibbert Winslow Hill, M.B., M.D., D.P.H. (Toronto), L.M.C.C, Professor and Head of the Department
Miss Mabel F. Gray, R.N., CertP.H.N. (Simmons College), Assistant Professor of Nursing.
Department of Philosophy
H. T. J. Coleman, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Columbia), Professor and
Head of the Department
James Henderson, M.A. (Glasgow), Associate Professor.
Mrs. Jennie Wyman Pilcher, B.A., M.Sc. (New Zealand), A.M., Ph.D.
(Stanford), Associate Professor of Psychology and Education.
Department of Physics
T. C Hebb, M.A., B.Sc. (Dal.), Ph.D. (Chicago), Professor and Head of
the Department.
A. E. Hennings, M.A. (Lake Forest College, 111.), Ph.D. (Chicago),
Associate Professor.
J. G. Davidson, B.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Calif.), Associate Professor.
Gordon Merritt Shrum, M.A., Ph.D. (Toronto), Associate Professor.
H. W. Fowler, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
C G. Patten, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
H. D. Smith, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
R. D. James, B.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant.
Department of Poultry Husbandry
E. A. Lloyd, B.S.A. (Sask.), M.S.A. (Washington State College), Professor and Head of the Department.
V. S. Asmundson, B.S.A. (Sask.), M.S.A. (Cornell), Associate Professor.
W. J. Riley, B.S.A. (Brit Col.), Assistant.
, Department of Zoology
C McLean Fraser, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Iowa), F.R.S.C, Professor
and Head of the Department.
G. J. Spencer, B.S.A. (Toronto), M.S. (Illinois), Assistant Professor.
Miss Verna Z. Lucas, B.A. (Brit. Col.), Assistant.
Harold White, M.D., C.M. (McGill), Medical Examiner to Students.
Mrs. C A. Lucas, R.N., Public Health Nurse. THE UNIVERSITY OF BRITISH
COLUMBIA
HISTORICAL SKETCH
The creation of a University in British Columbia was first
advocated by Superintendent Jessop in 1877, but it was not
until 1890 that the Provincial Legislature passed an Act
establishing a body politic and corporate named '' The University
of British Columbia." In 1891 this Act was amended to require
that a meeting of the Senate be held within one month after
the election of the Senators by Convocation. The Senators were
elected, but a quorum did not assemble on the date fixed by
the Chancellor, Dr. I. W. Powell, of Victoria. Thus the first
attempt to establish a University in British Columbia failed.
However, some of the work normally done in a University
was begun in 1894, when an Act was passed which permitted
the affiliation of high schools in the Province with recognized
Canadian Universities. In 1899 Vancouver High School *was
affiliated with McGill University in order to provide First Year
work in Arts, and took the name of Vancouver College. First
Year work in Arts was offered by Victoria High School when
it became Victoria College by affiliation with McGill University
in 1902. In the same year Vancouver College undertook the
Second Year in Arts.
In 1906 an Act was passed incorporating the Royal
Institution for the Advancement of Learning of British Columbia, which, in the same year, established at Vancouver the
McGill University College of British Columbia. The scope of
the work undertaken by this college was gradually increased
until at the time it was taken over by the University of British
Columbia it was giving three" years in Arts and Science, and
two years in Applied Science. When the University of British
Columbia opened in the autumn of 1915, both the McGill University College of Vancouver and Victoria College, which since
1907 had been a part of it, ceased to exist. 16 The University op British Columbia
Definite steps to establish the University were taken by
Dr. H. E. Young, Minister of Education, in 1907, when he
introduced a "University Endowment Act." This Act was
followed in 1908 by an Act establishing and incorporating the
University of British Columbia and repealing the old Act of
1890-1. This Act, with its subsequent amendments, determines
the present constitution of the University.
As authorized by an Act passed by the Provincial Legislature
in 1910, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed a Site
Commission to decide upon a site for the proposed University.
The Commission held its first meeting on May 25th, 1910, in
Victoria, and after a thorough examination of the Province
recommended the vicinity of Vancouver. In the autumn the
Executive Council decided to place the University at Point
Grey—the site which the Commission had named as its first
choice. In 1911 the Legislature passed an Act authorizing the
Lieutenant-Governor in Council to grant this site to the University. The grant was increased in 1915, so that it now consists
of 548 acres at the extremity of Point Grey. The waters of
the Gulf of Georgia form more than half the boundary of the
University Campus. A tract of some 3,000 acres of Government land immediately adjoining the site, and lying between
it and the City of Vancouver, has been set aside by the Government in order that University revenue may be provided by its
sale or lease.
In February, 1912, the Hon. H. E. Young, Minister of
Education, called for competitive plans which should include
plans in detail for four buildings to be erected immediately, and
a block plan showing all the proposed buildings on the Campus.
Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, of Vancouver, B. C, were the
successful competitors, and were appointed University architects.
The first Convocation, held on August 1st, 1912, chose Mr.
F. L. Carter-Cotton as first chancellor of the University. In
March, 1913, the Lieutenant-Governor in Council appointed as
President of the University F. F. Wesbrook, M.A., M.D., CM.,
LL.D. On April 4th, 1918, Dr. R. E. McKechnie was elected Historical Sketch 17
Chancellor; on April 12th, 1921, he was re-elected for a second
term; on April 3rd, 1924, for a third term, and on April 7th,
1927, for a fourth term. On the death of President Wesbrook,
October 20th, 1918, L. S. Klinck, Dean of the Faculty of Agriculture, was appointed acting President, and on June 1st, 1919,
President.
From its opening in 1915 till the Summer of 1925, the
University carried on its work in temporary quarters on part
of the site of the General Hospital in Fairview.
Construction work was commenced on the Science Building
at the permanent site in Point Grey in 1914, but was interrupted because of war conditions. Work on this building was
resumed in 1923, and in the Autumn of the same year the
contract was let for the Library. These two buildings which
are of stone and are fire-proof, conform closely to the original
plans as prepared by the architects in 1914. The initial units
of these structures, as well as nine other buildings which are
of a less permanent character and are described at a later page
in this Calendar, were completed in 1925, and at the beginning
of Session 1925-26 the University commenced work in its new
quarters.
The Inauguration of the new buildings was held on
October 15th and 16th, 1925, on which occasion honorary degrees
were granted by the University for the first time.
THE CONSTITUTION OF THE UNIVERSITY
The Constitution of the University is governed by the British
Columbia University Act B.C.R.S. 1924 c. 265, which provides
That the University shall consist of a Chancellor, Convocation, Board of Governors, Senate, and the Faculties;
that the first Convocation shall consist of all graduates
of any university in His Majesty's dominions resident in
the Province two years prior to the date fixed for the
first meeting of Convocation, together with twenty-five
members selected by the Lieutenant-Governor in
Council. After the first Convocation it shall consist of
the Chancellor, Senate, members of the first Convoca- 18 The University op British Columbia
tion, and all graduates of the University; that the
Chancellor shall be elected by Convocation; that the
Board of Governors shall consist of the Chancellor,
President, and nine persons appointed by the Lieutenant Governor in Council; that the Senate shall consist of: (a) The Minister of Education, the Chancellor,
and the President of the University, who shall be Chairman thereof; (b) the deans and two professors of each
of the Faculties elected by members of the Faculty;
(c) three members to be appointed by the Lieutenant-
Governor in Council; (d) the Superintendent of Education, the principals of the normal schools; (e) one
member elected by the high-school principals and
assistants who are actually engaged in teaching; (/) one
member elected by the Provincial Teachers' Institute
organized under subsection (e) of section 8 of the
"Public Schools Act"; (g) one member to be elected
by the governing body of every affiliated college or
school in this Province; (h) fifteen members to be
elected by Convocation from the members thereof;
It is further provided that the University shall be non-
sectarian.
The University Act gives the University full powers to grant
such degrees in the several Faculties and different branches of
Knowledge as the Senate may from time to time determine.
It reserves for the University the sole right in this Province to
confer degrees, except in Theology, and it expressly enacts
that "No other university having corporate powers capable of
being exercised within the Province shall be known by the
same name, nor shall any such university have power to grant
degrees."
THE WORK OF THE UNIVERSITY
The University of British Columbia is an integral part of
the public educational system of the Province, and its function
is to complete the work begun in the public and high schools. Retiring Allowances 19
It is the policy of the University to promote education in general,
and in particular to serve its constituency through three
channels—teaching, research, and extension work.
As regards teaching, the University furnishes instruction in
the various branches of a liberal education and in those technical
departments which are most directly related to the life and
industries of the Province. The scope of the teaching activity
of the University is fully described in Sec. 9 of the Act.
In order to make the teaching of the University more vital
and for the advancement of knowledge, research is encouraged
in every department.
The people of the Province are informed of the results of
special work by the staff of the University through a system
of extension lectures. The University sends lecturers to various
parts of the Province during the examination weeks in December
and April. In the case of places which can be visited without
prejudice to the duties of the lecturer at the University, lectures
are arranged to take place during the University term. A list
of subjects and lecturers can be obtained on application to the
Secretary of the Extension Lecture Committee, through whom
all arrangements are made.
RETIRING ALLOWANCES
In March, 1924, the Board of Governors of the University
of British Columbia adopted the contributory plan of retiring
allowances for members of the teaching staff. Contracts are
placed with the Teachers' Insurance and Annuity Association
of America, a corporation made possible by the Carnegie Corporation "to provide insurance and annuities for teachers and
other persons employed by colleges, by universities, or by institutions engaged primarily in educational or research work."
In May, 1924, the University of British Columbia was
elected as a member of the list of institutions associated with
the Carnegie Foundation for the Advancement of Teaching
and received a grant of $50,000.00, payable in ten annual installments, for the purpose of providing supplementary annuities for the older professors of the institution. 20 The University of British Columbia
ENDOWMENTS AND DONATIONS
However well supported by public funds, a University must
depend to a great extent upon private benefactors. In anticipation of endowments the Act provides that:
"Any person or corporation may, with the approval of the
Senate, found one or more professorships, lectureships,
fellowships, scholarships, exhibitions, prizes, or other
awards in the University, by providing a sufficient endowment in land or other property, and conveying the same
to the University for such purposes, and every such
endowment of lands or other property shall be vested In
the University for the purpose or purposes for which it
is given."
Only a limited number are in a position to make endowments, but many—including alumni and friends of higher
education—may add greatly to the usefulness of the University
by making contributions that lie within their power. It is
gratifying to note that the number of those who assist in this
way has been constantly growing.
It has become a tradition for each Graduating Class to
make a gift to the University. In the spring of 1928 this gift
took the form of a granite seat as a memorial to the late Dr.
F. F. Wesbrook.
The removal of the University to its permanent home in
Point Grey has greatly stimulated interest in its welfare and
progress, and within the last few years many valuable donations
have been received, especially in the form of equipment for the
various Laboratories.
A very fine Ethnological collection representing the arts,
handicraft and weapons of Polynesia was donated to the University by Mr. Frank Burnett, Sr.; and the late Mr. David
Thom, of Hammond, B. C, bequeathed his entire estate, consisting of a farm of thirty-five acres and cash and bonds amounting to fifty-five hundred dollars—a total net value of approximately eleven thousand dollars—to be used for the assistance
and encouragement of students in the Faculty of Agriculture.
The Royal Institution for the Advancement of Learning
of British Columbia presented to the University a life-size Endowments and Donations 21
portrait of the late Francis Lovett Carter-Cotton, LL.D., first
Chancellor of The University of British Columbia. The painting is by Mr. F. Horsman Varley, A.R.C.A.
The Governor of the Hudson's Bay Company, Mr. Charles
V. Sale, presented to the University the collection of paintings
known as the Hudson's Bay Company and the Native Sons of
British Columbia Permanent Loan Collection. These valuable
historical canvasses, eight in number, represent early scenes in
the history of the Province of British Columbia. The pictures
were painted by Mr. John Innes, of Vancouver, and are hung
in the Library.
In the fall of 1928 an anonymous friend of the University
presented a coloured glass window, which portrays in separate
panels the arms of the Dominion and of eight of its provinces.
The window has been placed between the two main staircases
approaching the Reading Room of the Library.
A list of the other most important gifts received during
last year is given below under the various departments.
Department of Botany
(For Herbarium and Botanical Gardens)
SEEDS
D. H. Snowberger, Florist, Payette, Idaho.
William Worrell, Seeds from Australia.
Dr. G. A. Purpus, Mexico.
Adrian C. Thrupp. Kamloops.
M. L. Bird, Vancouver.
H. Foulds, Carthage, Illinois.
G. E. Kastengren, Seattle, Washington.
Miss J. Bostock, Monte Creek, B. C
Lloyd Botanic Garden, Darjeeling.
Institute of Applied Botany, Leningrad, U. S. S. R.
Harvard University Botanical Garden.
Botanlschen Gartens, Bremen, Germany.
Brooklyn Botanic Garden.
Botanic Gardens, Glasgow, Scotland.
Mestska Botanica Skolni Zahrada, Czechoslovakia.
Jardin Botanique, Ville de Nantes, France.
United States Department of Agriculture, Washington, D. C
Jardins de la Ville de Poznan (Pologne).
Ville de Lyons Jardin and Collections Botaniques, France.
Royal Botanic Gardens, Kew.
Gradina Botanica a Universitatii, Cernauti, Roumania.
Salgues Foundation, Brignoles Botanic Station, France.
Jardim Botanico da Universidade de Coimbra, Portugal.
Botanic Gardens, University of Tokyo, Japan.
Dominion Forestry Branch, Kamloops.
(Per Prof. H. R. Christie)
Arnold Arboretum, Cambridge, Mass. 22 The University of British Columbia
HERBARIUM SPECIMENS
U. S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, D. C.
Mrs. J. P. MacFadden, New Denver, B.C., Collection of Mosses.
Mrs. R. Foord, Faulkner, Manitoba, Pitcher Plants.
Man Yuen Chong Co., Vancouver.
H. D. Snowberger, Florist, Payette, Idaho.
John M. Fogg, Jr., University of Pennsylvania, Collection
of Plants from Selkirk Mountains.
FOR BIOLOGY
B. O. Iverson, Skulls of Beaver and Weasel.
Department of Civil Engineering
Mrs. A. E. B. Hill and Miss Hill—Minutes of the Proceedings of the Society of Civil
Engineers, England, from the library of the late Arthur E. B. Hill, B.A.Sc.
Department of Forestry
Dominion Forest Service—Forestry publications.
United States Forest Service—Forestry publications.
United States National Museum, Washington, D. C.—Collections of specimens of
native and foreign woods.
New York State College of Forestry, Syracuse, N. Y.—Forestry publications.
Illinois Department of Forestry and Natural History Survey—Forestry publications.
Capilano Timber Company Limited, North Vancouver—Samples of B. C. woods.
F. Temple Keeling, New Westminster—Collection of hand specimens of North
American and foreign woods.
R. W. Irwin—Samples of B. C. Woods.
Fred Elley, Victoria, B. C.—Samples of black spruce.
Department of Geology
Reginald Brook—Large boulder of gold quartz which gave the name to the Boulder
Vein, Engineer, B. C.
G. W. Waddington—Collection of minerals from Iron Mask Mine, B. C.
D. M. Pierce—Collection of bird skins from Coronation Gulf.
Prof. G. J. Spencer—Mineral specimens and photographs from Nashwauk, Minn.
Edward Mahon—Head and antlers, in an excellent state of preservation, of the
extinct Megaceros Hibernicus (Irish Elk), found in Peat Bog, Ireland.
Dr. S. J. Schofield—Suite of rocks, Salmon River District, Portland Canal.
Suite of rocks. Van Roi Mine, Slocan District, B. C.
Suite of rocks, Lynn Creek Zinc Mine, Lynn Creek, B. C.
Suite of rocks, Kootenay King Mine, East Kootenay, B. C.
Dr. G. F. Barnwell—Ethnological collection from Java.
Chotaro Tsuyuki—Suite of specimens and photographs illustrating the silk industry
of Japan.
Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering
I. T. E. Circuit Breaker Co., Philadelphia, per N. G. Blagdon Phillips:
1—60-amp. auto urelite 3 pole, overload, Dalite, no voltage beliringer; 220
volts A.C., 3-phase 60 cycles, equipped with slip on rear connections with
cover and base strip features.
1—100 amp. L L 3-pole, 2-coil, R A overload auto, Dalite. No voltage beliringer,
220 volts, 8-phase, 60 cycles.
1—Framed photograph of 43,000 amp. breaker.
Department of Zoology
H. Hook and Mrs. E. Jackson, Cowichan Bay—An extensive-arranged collection of
insects of all orders, with smaller though representative collections of Crustacea,
mounted birds skins and birds' eggs and mounted skins and skulls of mammals.
The insects are representative of Great Britain, Canada and, to some extent, of
Japan; the birds and mammals are representative of Britain and Canada.
The collections are contained in uniform mahogany cases and are accompanied
by accession catalogues with numbers running to nearly four thousand named
species. They were made by Mr. Hook, his three sons and daughter, Mrs. E.
Jackson, and were presented to the University as a memorial to the three
boys who were killed in the war.
R. C. Cummings, South Vancouver; Ian McTaggart Cowan, North Vancouver; Dr.
M. Y. Williams, U. B. C; Miss F. Spencer, South India: Collections of external
and internal parasites of birds.
Miss F. Spencer, Bangalore, South India—A collection of Phasmidae, Mantidae, two
cobras, one viper and one tree snake.
Several sources in British Columbia—Small collections of local insects.
D. M. Pierce, Hudson's Bay Company, Coronation Gulf—A collection of local birds
from Coronation Gulf, representative of the Arctic Circle. Suggested Local Scholarships 23
SUGGESTED LOCAL SCHOLARSHIPS
As the number of Matriculation Scholarships offered at
present is quite inadequate to the needs of the Province, a
scheme which has great possibilities both for the growth of the
University and the prosperity of the Province is earnestly
recommended to consideration.
In the large universities, both of Great Britain and the
United States, local or district scholarships have proved a strong
bond between the community and the University, have brought
the University close to the life of the young, and opened up
the prospect of a University education to many who would not
otherwise have contemplated it.
Such local or district scholarships might be established as
Matriculation Scholarships, by City or Municipal Councils or
other public bodies, or by private benefactors. They would be
awarded by a local authority, but the University would reserve
the right of confirmation.
In awarding such scholarships, standing in the Matriculation Examination need not be the only consideration. It is
desirable that regard should be had also to financial circumstances, character, and intellectual promise. Scholarships may
be offered for students taking a particular course, and in this
way the study of such sciences and technical branches of knowledge as have special importance for the industries of the
district may be encouraged. In short, local scholarships may be
arranged to meet local needs and to prepare the native sons
of the Province to play their part in the development of its
resources.
THE LIBRARY
The University Library consists of 72,000 volumes and
about 10,000 pamphlets. It includes representative works in
all the courses offered by the University, and a growing collection of works on other subjects.
The Library receives regularly about 550 magazines and
periodical publications. 24 The University of British Columbia
The book collection is classified throughout on the Congressional system.
Books can be borrowed by students for a period of seven
days, or for a shorter time should the work be in general demand. Books to which the teaching staff have specially referred their students are placed in a "Reserved" class. These
are shelved apart from the main collection, and are loaned
only for use in the building, and for a limited period of two
hours. They may, however, be taken from the Library for
over-night loan, or for any period in which the Library is
closed. In these cases they are returnable before 9 a.m., or, in
the case of students of classes meeting at 8:45 a.m., before 10 a.m.
Unbound periodicals are not loaned. Bound periodicals, and
books that are costly, rare, or unsuitable for general circulation,
are loaned only under special conditions.
While the Library is primarily for the staff and students
of the University, its resources are available to those of the
general public engaged in research or special study, and who
make personal application to the Librarian for the privilege of
its use. Such persons are known as "Extra-mural Readers."
By order of the Board of Governors, a fee of $1.00 per calendar
year is charged such readers. In addition, they pay necessary
mailing costs, a deposit being required from those unable to call
personally for books loaned.
During the session the Library is open on week days from
8:45 a.m. to 9:45 p.m., except on Saturdays, when the hour
of closing is 5 p.m. In vacation it is open from 9 a.m. to 4 p.m.,
except on Saturdays, when the hours are from 9 a.m. to noon.
The University is deeply indebted to all who have made
gifts to the Library during the past year. These have been
both valuable and numerous. Their number prevents detailed
acknowledgment, but recognition should be made of a number
of sets of transactions, and complete or partial sets of scientific
periodicals, given by societies and friends of the University. LOCATION AND BUILDINGS
LOCATION
The University is situated on the promontory which forms
the western extremity of the Point Grey Peninsula. On three
sides it is bounded by the Gulf of Georgia. The site comprises
an area of 548 acres, of which approximately one-half is campus.
In all directions appear snow-capped mountains, strikingly
rugged and impressive.
BUILDINGS
The buildings, planned to meet the requirements of fifteen
hundred students, are of two classes, permanent and semipermanent. The former were designed by the University architects, Messrs. Sharp and Thompson, the latter by architects of the
Department of Public Works of the Provincial Government. The
permanent buildings have been erecte'd in the location originally
assigned for them; the others in the quadrangle designated as
"unassigned" in the original plan. By utilizing the "unassigned"
area for the semi-permanent buildings, all the locations intended
for future expansion have been left available.
The entire mechanical equipment of these buildings was
designed after a close study had been made not only of present
requirements, but of the ultimate development of the institution.
This consideration accounts for the fact that only a part of the
present equipment is permanent. After a careful survey of the
whole system, a forced hot water system was found to present
advantages that made its adoption advisable. Direct radiation
with a system of warmed air supply and extraction for ventilation is used to take care of the heat losses in the buildings. A
separate system of ventilation is installed for all sanitary conveniences, and a specially constructed system for fume closets.
The various services throughout these buildings, such as hot and
cold water, distilled water, gas and steam for laboratory
purposes, compressed air, etc., with the necessary apparatus, are
all of a modern type. An attempt has been made to reduce 26 The University of British Columbia
vibration and noise to a minimum by installing all moving
apparatus on floating slabs, with a further insulation of cork.
The plan at the back of the Calendar shows the buildings
which have been erected and indicates the nature of their
construction. It also shows their relation to the other groups
of buildings which are to be erected in the future.
PERMANENT BUILDINGS
Of the twelve buildings which have been erected, three
are of fire-proof construction, the Science Building, the Library,
and the Power House.
Science Building
The Science Building has been designed in the Tudor style,
this being a phase of English Gothic which lends itself fairly
readily to those adaptations which are necessary in order to meet
modern collegiate requirements. Externally, British Columbia
granite has been used throughout. Wherever possible plain wall
surfaces, consisting of the split faces of granite arranged
in random sizes with white joints, have been used. The
general grey tone is relieved by the use of a small quantity of
field stone of darker shades. All window openings are filled with
leaded glass in steel sashes. Internally, the building is finished
in brick work and tiles in pleasing tones of brown which harmonize with the oak panelled doors, the total effect in keeping
with that of the period it is designed to represent.
This building, which was designed for the sole use of
Chemistry ultimately, now accommodates the Departments of
Chemistry, Physics, Bacteriology and Nursing and Health. One
and one-half floors are devoted to Chemistry; an equivalent
assignment of space has been alloted to Physics, and half of one
floor has been set aside for Bacteriology, and Nursing and
Health. All lecture rooms and laboratories are well lighted,
and a system of forced ventilation has been installed throughout
the entire building. Distilled water, gas, steam, compressed air,
and electrical supply circuits have been provided wherever re- Location and Buildings 27
quired. These services are carried in trenches in the floor, an
arrangement which facilitates any necessary repairs.
Ample provision has also been made for offices, balance
rooms, preparation rooms, apparatus rooms, supply rooms,
photographic rooms, technicians' rooms, and reading-room for
students.
Chemistry.—This Department is equipped with one large
and one small lecture room, a large laboratory for general
chemistry accommodating three hundred and forty students,
laboratories for elementary and advanced qualitative and
quantitative analysis, an elementary organic laboratory, an advanced organic laboratory and an organic combustion laboratory. A laboratory is available for agricultural chemistry,
another for industrial chemistry, and a commodious laboratory
for physical chemistry with an adjoining dark room for work
in photo-chemistry is found on the third floor. There are
also several small laboratories well equipped for research work.
Physics.—The Department of Physics has two large lecture
rooms, four large and several smaller laboratories, a constant temperature room and a battery room. Three of the
large laboratories are equipped for the study of Elementary
Physics, Mechanics, and Heat and Electricity. The fourth is
specially designed for the conducting of experiments requiring
the use of highly sensitive apparatus. Smaller laboratories are
designed for light and X-ray experiments.
Bacteriology.—Provision has been made in this Department
for four laboratories. Two of these are for general student use,
one is for serological work and one is for advanced research.
In addition to laboratory and lecture room accommodation, an
office, a preparation room and a sterilization room have been
provided.
Nursing and Health.—The three rooms assigned to this
Department constitute a teaching unit such as is provided in
modern training schools for the instruction of nurses. All the
equipment necessary for the demonstration of elementary 28 The University of British Columbia
nursing procedure is available, and can be used for practice
teaching purposes.
Library Building
The central unit of the Library Building is a massive
structure of British Columbia granite which harmonizes with
the Science Building in its Gothic architectural lines. Owing
to the exigencies of the plan, however, the massing is more broken,
and thus better effects of light and shade are obtained. Some
tracery and stained glass in the upper portion of the building is
employed to obtain in a restricted manner the richness of detail
characteristic of this style of architecture.
Internally, the same effect has been striven for, wherever
such an end was possible with due regard to economy. The
Main Entrance Hall has a groined ceiling with arches and wall
surface finished in Caen Stone plaster. This treatment is carried
up to the Main Concourse floor through the staircase Hall; the
lower portion of the Concourse walls is plastered with Caen
Stone, the quoins to windows and doors, and corbels to roof
trusses being finished in the same material. The roofs of the
Concourse and of the two reading rooms adjacent are finished
in native woods stained a dark brown, with patterae and shields
picked out in bright heraldic colours. Windows throughout the
building are of leaded glass. In the Concourse and the inner
hall this is of a pale amber shade, with the coats of arms of the
Canadian Universities worked into the centre light.- On the
window above the Loan Desk on the East Side of the Concourse
the armorial bearings of Oxford and Cambridge, as the oldest
universities of the Empire, are used as flanking emblems to those
of the University of British Columbia. The floors of the Main
Entrance Hall staircases and of the Concourse are finished with
large marbled rubber tiles which harmonize with the general
colour scheme, and ensure quietness in the principal parts of the
building. Plain oak of simple detail, stained to represent old
fumed oak, is used throughout for doors and other wood finish.
The principal reading room has a floor space of 100 ft. by 50
ft. and is 60 ft. in height. Two other reading rooms, each 60 ft. by Location and Buildings 29
30 feet, open off the main reading room. These rooms provide
accommodation for 250 students. The sixth and seventh tiers
of the stack, not being required at present to house the University book collection, are used as a periodical room, and will
accommodate about fifty readers. The Stack, which occupies
the entire rear of the building, consists of seven tiers, four of
which are fully equipped with steel stacks of the latest design.
Here fifty-two semi-private study "carrels" facilitate research
for advanced students. The offices of the Librarian and the
Library Staff provide ample accommodation for receiving,
cataloguing and accessioning. The Faculty common room, the
"Browsing" room, and the Frank Burnett museum are also
located in this building. The Burnett collection represents the
arts, handicraft and weapons of Polynesia. This collection, which
has been presented by Mr. Burnett to the University, is the result
of numerous voyages made by him to the Central and South
Pacific Islands. It constitutes one of the finest collections of this
class of material yet accumulated by any private collector.
Power House
The Power House has been placed in the centre of the space
which will ultimately be the Engineering Quadrangle, and will
therefore eventually be masked by the future permanent buildings towards the Mall. For this reason it does not pretend to
follow very closely the style of the other permanent buildings
except in mass, being finished in rough case of broken texture,
relieved with red quarry tiles as diapers, copings and offsets,
with windows grouped as far as possible to give pleasing proportions of voids and solids.
The ultimate development of this plant will be 2500 horse
power at normal rating. The present installation consists of
three units, each of 250 horse power normal rating, capable of
developing 100 per cent, in excess of this. Each unit, so equipped
as to operate independently of the others, may act as a service
as well as an experimental station. In other words, on any one
boiler an experimental test may be conducted while the rest 30 The University of British Columbia
of the plant is cut in on the service lines. Instruments are provided to record every operation so that close checking and
comparisons of the performance of the different types of boilers
may be made to a degree.
The B. & W. Unit is equipped with B. & W. Natural Draft
Stoker, the Sterling Boiler with forced draft Coxe Travelling
Grate. The Kidwell with forced draft Coxe Travelling Grate is
also equipped with air pre-heater, by-passed, so that tests may
be conducted with or without p re-heated air. Induced draft is
used with individual forced draft fans; separate boiler feed
lines and pump with Linehart Scale provide boiler feed for
tests. A travelling weigh scale records the amount of coal used,
while a steam jet ash conveyor elevates the ashes to an overhead bunker.
The efficiency and flexibility of the plant lends itself to
economical operation, while the knowledge gained in the use of
different appliances will be of interest and value to power plant
users.
SEMI-PERMANENT BUILDINGS
In this group there are nine buildings in all,—Administration, Auditorium and Grill room, Arts, Applied Science, Agriculture; three Engineering Buildings—Mechanical, Electrical;
Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics; and the Forest Products
Laboratory Building. These buildings, which are set on concrete
foundations, are of frame construction with stucco finish, and
are designed for a life of forty years. Their exterior design
harmonizes with the permanent buildings so far as materials
of construction will permit. With the exception of a part of the
Engineering Laboratories, these buildings have been finished
internally with plaster and fir trim.
Administration Building
On the ground floor of this building are situated the offices
of the President, the Dean of the Faculty of Arts and Science,
the Registrar, and the Bursar. On the second floor are two
large rooms, one for meetings of the Board of Governors and Location and Buildings 31
the Senate, and the other for meetings of Faculties and
Committees.
Auditorium Building
The Auditorium Building is designed in a pleasing treatment of Renaissance architecture and is furnished with the most
modern equipment. It has a seating capacity of 1029, a large
and admirably equipped stage for the encouragement of dramatic presentations, an orchestra pit and adequate off-stage
dressing rooms. Provision has been made for the operating of
moving pictures and the stage is equipped with a cyclorama and
all necessary electrical illumination devices.
The Grill room is situated in the basement and is designed
to accommodate 400 students at one time. There is also a small
dining room for the Faculty. The kitchen is furnished with the
latest cooking and baking equipment.
The bookstore, post office, medical offices, women's rest
room, students' council offices, and numerous committee rooms
for subsidiary organizations are also located in this building.
Arts Building
In the Arts Building, which forms the centre of the semipermanent group, are located the lecture rooms and offices for
the following Departments in the Faculty of Arts and Science:
Classics, Economics, Sociology and Political Science, Education, English, History, Mathematics, Modern Languages and
Philosophy.
The lecture rooms, 16 in number, are well designed and
exceptionally well lighted. The largest room accommodates 250
students; the seating capacity of the others ranges from 32 to 64.
Four common rooms for the undergraduates in Arts and Science
are located in this building, as is also the office of the Dean
of Women.
Applied Science Building
This building houses the Departments of Geology, Botany,
Zoology, Forestry and the drafting rooms and offices for Civil 32 The University of British Columbia
Engineering. All the laboratories have been equipped with the
essential services. One large lecture room, providing accommodations for 250 students, and 11 smaller lecture rooms with a
seating capacity ranging from 25 to 112, are located in this
building. These will be used by the different Departments
jointly as class requirements may determine. Extensive provision has been made for drafting rooms and for the necessary
offices, preparation rooms, storage rooms, and photographic
rooms. A geological museum, a reading room and a common
room for students have also been provided.
Geology.—In addition to the necessary lecture rooms, the
Department of Geology has three large and well equipped
laboratories, the Mineralogical, the Petrological and the Geological. There are also two small research laboratories, one for
graduate students and one for the staff.
The Department workroom is well equipped for the preparation of specimens. The museum contains valuable collections of
illustrative material which supplements the extensive working
collections in the laboratories. The reading room is equipped
with books, separates, maps, photographs and slides for reference.
Botany.—The Botanical laboratories include a large junior
laboratory, a senior laboratory, two student research laboratories
and three private research rooms. These laboratories are used
for practical work in Botany and General Biology. A Herbarium
of over 15,000 sheets and a botanical garden containing over
1000 specimens of native plants furnish an abundance of material
for class room and laboratory purposes.
Zoology.—This Department, which includes courses in
Entomology, has two large laboratories, a small research laboratory and two private laboratories, all well equipped. There is
also a room for class material, which will serve for a time as a
repository for museum collections and for specimens to be used
for illustration.
Forestry.—While the Department of Forestry has its own
laboratory for work in wood technology, its own class room Location and Buildings 33
and offices, it uses the laboratories of other Departments quite
extensively, notably those in Biology, Civil Engineering and
Forest Products. The Department possesses, in the forest belt
which has been preserved on the campus as a natural park, a
very valuable outdoor laboratory for forestry students.
Civil Engineering.—Well equipped and well lighted
draughting and designing rooms are available for all classes in
drawing, mapping, machine design and computation work. The
equipment necessary for all types of Civil Engineering work is
available. The hydraulic laboratory, which is situated in the
Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics Building, is well equipped
for demonstrations and tests covering the main field of hydraulic
principles and machinery; while in the Forest Products Laboratory, which is at the disposal of students in Civil Engineering,
excellent facilities are available for extensive tests of timber,
cement and steel.
Agriculture Building
This building accommodates the Departments of Agronomy,
Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture and Poultry Husbandry. The office and record rooms for the Farm Survey
studies are also located in this building.
The lecture rooms, of which there are four, are exceptionally
well lighted. The largest accommodates 112 students, while the
Beating capacity of the others ranges from 36 to 54.
In addition to lecture and laboratory accommodation, provision has been made for the necessary offices, preparation rooms,
storage rooms and also for a photographic dark room, a herd
book room, and a students' common room.
Agronomy.—This Department is provided with a combined
laboratory and lecture room which is equipped with water, gas
and electricity. While this room will be used for studies in
crop production, for the judging of specimens of plants and for
the determination of soil samples, the main emphasis will be laid
on the work conducted in the Department's outdoor laboratory—
the Agronomy fields. 34 The University of British Columbia
Animal Husbandry.—The different classes and types of
livestock constitute the main laboratory material of this department. In this material and in the farm survey records, the
Department possesses a wealth of data for teaching and illustration in farm management, livestock management, feed and
nutrition, and studies in pedigree and breeding.
Dairying.—The new laboratories of the Department of
Dairying provide facilities for conducting researches on the bacterial flora of milk, butter and cheese, and the relation of the flora
to the production and sale of high quality products. Excellent
provision is made for the instruction of students in the work
indicated. Cheese-making and butter-making will be conducted
in the temporary dairy building; but the new laboratories permit
of closer contact of the various activities of the Department.
Horticulture.—In the laboratory provided for this Department, comprehensive studies supplement the practical experience
of the students in the propagation, planting, pruning and care of
horticultural crops. Materials for these purposes are provided
from the orchard, the ornamental trees, shrubs and flowers, and
from plants grown in the glass propagating house.
Poultry Husbandry.—In the poultry laboratory in the
Agriculture Building, facilities and equipment are provided to
assist in the study of poultry nutrition, disease, and other problems related to the industry. On the poultry plant, which is the
main laboratory of the Poultry Department, ten pure breeds of
commercial importance are tested and bred for egg and meat
production. Experiments in management and marketing are
conducted with these birds and their products.
Mechanical and Electrical Buildings
The Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering
is housed in two large buildings. In both will be found the
most up-to-date equipment, enabling students to obtain a
thorough experimental knowledge of all phases of the work in
these departments. The mechanical laboratory contains a
modern 3-ton CO* refrigerating plant; a large Corliss engine; a Location and Buildings 35
two-stage air-compressor with inter-cooler; a 50 H.P. Mirrlees
Bickerton & Day pure Diesel engine with Froude water brake;
a De Laval Steam Turbine and D. C. generator with condenser;
a gasoline engine and generator; a Crossley two-stroke oil
engine and a National gas engine. A complete equipment exists
for testing calorific values of fuel oils and coals, and also for
testing exhaust gases of engines. There are also two steam
engines, one a single cylinder engine and the other a compound
engine. The mechanical students have available also the powerhouse equipment for testing, which consists of three 250 H.P.
boilers—a Kidwell, a Babcoek & Wilcox, and a Sterling. In
addition, a 250-K.W. compound engine and generator and every
variety of pump is available for experimental work.
The Electrical laboratory is entirely modern, and contains
a 3-phase synchronous motor, driving a 75-K.W. compound
wound generator with static balancer. There is a three-phase
rotary converter with reactance control and panels, and a Deri
brush-shifting repulsion motor; a three-phase series commutator motor of the Schrage type, several squirrel cage and slip-
ring induction motors, a three-phase alternator and D.C. motor;
two-level compound D.C. generators on the same base.
There are also series, shunt and compound wound D.C.
motors and an induction regulator, a single-phase rotary converter; a Winter-Eichberg single-phase commutator motor;
Beveral transformers; a mercury-arc rectifier; an oscillograph;
a Campbell inductometer and complete equipment for high
frequency bridge-testing. An alternating current potentiometer made by Tinsley, Gall's patent, exists for standardizing
work, and also vacuum tube instruments for obtaining characteristics of tubes. In addition, a large amount of equipment is
available for carrying out all the junior tests, including potentiometers, standard bridges, iron testing, Epstein iron tester,
ballistic galvanometers and other instruments.
Mining, Metallurgy and Hydraulics Building
The Mining and Metallurgical laboratories cover a total
area of 5000 square feet. The Ore Dressing laboratory, which 36 The University of British Columbia
includes a workshop, storage room and flotation room, is well
equipped with a variety of small scale machines, including
crusher, rolls, screens, jigs, ball mill and tables. The laboratory
is fully wired for power and light, and has large water mains
and drains, and a two-ton travelling crane. The Metallurgical
laboratory includes a fire assay room, with oil, gasoline and
gas furnaces; a wet assay room, with large fan-draught hood,
and work benches fitted for electric and gas heating; two
balance rooms; a photographic dark room; and ample storage
space.
The Hydraulics laboratory is well equipped for tests and
demonstrations of high and low pressure hydraulic machines
and pumps. A 60-horse-power D.C. motor is utilized to drive
either a 10-inch single stage centrifugal pump having a capacity
of 2400 gallons per minute against a 70-foot head, or to drive
a 4-inch two stage pump having a capacity of 525 gallons per
minute against a 325-foot head. The water from the large
pump can be used to drive a 10-inch vertical reaction turbine,
while the flow from the high pressure pump can be used to
drive an 18-inch Pelton Wheel, thus providing students with
actual working demonstrations of all the ordinary types of
machines. Installations include apparatus for weir, nozzle,
and orifice measurements, flow in pipes, tests and demonstrations of Venturi, current and service meters. One section
of the laboratory is set apart for making the standard tests of
cement and sand.
Forest Products Laboratory Buildings
The three buildings included in this group were erected
by the University for the use of the Vancouver Forest Products
Laboratory of the Dominion Forest Service. They consist of
a main building for offices and laboratories, an air-seasoning
building, and an experimental dry-kiln building.
Under a joint agreement between the University and the
Department of the Interior, the University, besides providing
the buildings, furnishes heat, light, and power, without cost to
the Dominion Government. The Dominion Forest Service has Location and Buildings 37
undertaken to supply the personnel and to furnish all equipment.
Facilities already established include a large timber
testing laboratory, a special building for lumber seasoning, an
experimental dry-kiln building equipped with oil-fired steam
plant and automatic temperature and humidity controller, a
combined photographic and pathological laboratory, a carpenter
shop, and suitable offices. Accommodation is also provided for
an entomologist of the Federal Department of Agriculture. The
testing laboratory is equipped with machines ranging from a
200,000-pound Olsen Universal to the most delicate balances.
#*-^ > 38 The University of British Columbia
GENERAL INFORMATION
The Session
The academic year begins on the First of September and
ends on the last day of August. The Winter Session is divided
into two terms—the first, September to December; the second,
January to May. The Summer Session consists of seven weeks'
instruction in July and August, for which preparatory reading
is required except in certain cases. (See Summer Session
"Announcement.") For "Admission to the University" see
Page 42, and for "Registration and Attendance" see Page 45.
Courses of Study
For the Session of 1929-30 the University offers instruction
in each of the three Faculties, Arts and Science, Applied Science
(including Nursing), and Agriculture, leading to the degrees
of Bachelor of Arts, Bachelor of Applied Science and Bachelor
of Science in Agriculture. It is also possible to proceed to a
Master's degree in each Faculty. Advanced courses of instruction and facilities for research are offered to students who are
graduates of any University or College of recognized standing.
Admission to these advanced courses, or to the privileges of
research, does, not in itself imply admission to candidacy for a
higher degree.
" Academic Dress
The undergraduate's gown is black in colour and of the
ordinary stuff material, of ankle length, and with long sleeves
and the yoke edged with khaki cord. The graduate's gown is the
same, without cord. The Bachelor's hood is of the Cambridge
pattern, black bordered with the distinctive colour of the particular Faculty; the Master's hood is the same, lined with the
distinctive colour. The colours are, for Arts and Science,
the University blue; for Applied Science, red; for Agriculture,
maize.
Physical Examination
In order to promote the physical welfare of the student
body, every student, on entering the University, will be General Information 39
required to undergo a physical examination, to be conducted
by, or under the direction pf, the University Medical Examiner.
Physical defects and weaknesses, amenable to treatment, may
thus be discovered, and the student is advised to apply to his
physician for such remedial measures as his case may require.
About 10 to 15 per cent, of the students are re-examined in their
second year.
University Health Service
The University Campus is situated within the Point Grey
Reserve, which, as unorganized territory, comes under the direct
control of the Provincial Government. Shortly after the opening
of the present University Buildings in 1925, the Lieutenant-
Governor in Council, by the recommendation of the Provincial
Health Officer, appointed a Medical Health Officer for the Reserve, including the University Campus. This Health Officer
has on the Campus and in the Reserve all the powers of any
Health Officer anywhere.
•In the fall of 1927, the Provincial Health Officer added to
the University Health Service a Public Health Nurse, whose
presence permits the continuous operation of a local Health
Department on the Campus and Reserve.
In addition, the Public Health Nurse is engaged by the
University for the general supervision of the individual health
of the students, first aid, etc., and gives a voluntary course of
lectures to the students on health subjects. An office for the
Public Health Nurse is provided in the Auditorium Building
and, by the gift of the Graduating Class of 1927, has been
equipped with first aid furniture and supplies.
Infectious Diseases
Students developing any illness or suffering from any
injury while on the Campus should apply for first aid to the
Public Health Nurse. This is particularly required if the student
develops any illness of an infectious nature. Provision is made
also for the diagnosis of the infectious cases and their safe removal to suitable quarters. 40 The University of British Columbia
Students developing any illness or suffering any injury
while at home, boarding house, fraternity house, etc., are required to report the same to the Public Health Nurse. The
development of any infectious disease in a University student
must be reported by the student to the Health Officer of the
University without delay.
Students exposed to any infectious disease must immediately report to the Medical Health Officer. Such students
may be permitted, by special order of the Medical Health Officer,
to attend the University for a prescribed period, despite the
exposure.
Such students shall report daily (or oftener, at the discretion of the Medical Health Officer), to the Public Health
Nurse for such prescribed period. Failure to so report will
result in immediate exclusion from the University.
University Employment Bureau
The objects of the Employment Bureau are to provide
students with summer employment, to provide part-time work
for students during the Winter Session, and to help students
in obtaining positions after graduation. This service is for
employers seeking help and for students desiring employment.
Those who know of positions vacant are requested to notify the
Bureau. Correspondence should be addressed to the Employment Bureau, Registrar's Office.
Dean of Women
During the session the Dean of Women may be consulted by
parents and students on matters pertaining to living conditions,
vocational guidance, and other questions that directly affect the
social and intellectual life of the women students.
Board and Residence
A list of approved boarding-houses which receive men or
women students, but not both, may be obtained from the
Registrar after September 1st. Men and women students are
not permitted to lodge in the same house, unless they are
members of the same family, or receive special permission from General Information 41
the Senate. Women students under twenty-five years of age
are permitted to occupy suites in apartment houses only when
accompanied by some older person. Any such arrangement
must be made in consultation with the Dean of Women. The
cost of good board and lodging is from $35 per month upwards;
of a room alone, $8 to $12 per month. A grill is operated under
the supervision of the University, and lunch, afternoon tea and
light supper may be obtained there at very reasonable prices.
Refreshments at social functions are also supplied.
General Conduct
The University authorities do not assume responsibilities
which naturally rest with parents. This being so it is the
policy of the University to rely on the good sense and on the
home training of students for the preservation of good moral
standards. 42 The University of British Columbia
ADMISSION TO THE UNIVERSITY
All inquiries relating to admission to the University should
be addressed to the Registrar.
1. Except under special circumstances no student under
the age of sixteen is admitted to the First Year courses in the
Faculty of Arts and Science, and no student under the age of
seventeen to the Second Year courses in the Faculty of Arts
and Science nor to the First Year courses in the Faculties of
Agriculture and Applied Science, including Nursing.
2. Candidates for admission to the courses in the First
Year of the Faculty of Arts and Science or the Faculty of
Agriculture and to the course in Nursing in Applied Science are
required to pass the Junior Matriculation Examination of the
Province of British Columbia or to submit certificates showing
that they have passed an equivalent examination elsewhere.
Students over 18 years of age with full "Normal Entrance"
standing who hold Normal School certificates are admitted to
the University as having full Junior" Matriculation standing.
Special regulations are prescribed for admission to courses in
Applied Science, and are given under the heading of "Admission" in the Applied Science Section of the Calendar.
3. Students who have passed the Senior Matriculation
Examination are admitted to the courses of the Second Year
in the Faculty of Arts and Science. Students who have partial
Senior Matriculation standing, obtained in 1927 or subsequently, will be granted credit in First Year Arts in each subject in which they have made 50 per cent, or over, or in each
paper in which they have made 50 per cent, or over in so far as
these papers correspond with those of First Year Arts.
4. Certificates or diplomas showing that a candidate has
passed the Matriculation Examination of another University will
be accepted in lieu of the Junior or Senior Matriculation Examinations if the Faculty concerned considers that the examination
has covered the same subjects and required the same standard.
If, however, the examination covers some but not all of the Admission to the University 43
necessary subjects the candidate will be required to pass the
Matriculation Examination in the subjects not covered.
i. A candidate who wishes to enter by certificates other
than a Matriculation certificate issued in British Columbia
should submit to the Registrar the original certificates. If he
wishes these returned to him, he must present also a copy of
each certificate for record at the University. He should under
no circumstances come to the University without having first
obtained from the Registrar a statement of the value of the
certificates he holds, as these may lack one or more essential
subjects, or the work done in a subject may not be adequate, or,
again, the percentage gained may not be sufficiently high.
Moreover, it must be remembered that a certificate may admit
to one Faculty and not to another. When an applicant's
diploma or certificate does not show the marks obtained in the
several subjects of the examination he must arrange to have a
statement of his marks sent to tlte Registrar by the Education
Department or University issuing such diploma or certificate.
The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00.
6. A student of another University applying for exemption
from any subject or subjects which he has already studied is
required to submit with his application a Calendar of the
University in which he has previously studied, together with a
complete statement of the course he has followed and a certificate
of the standing gained in the several subjects* The Faculty
concerned will determine the standing of such a student in this
University. The fee for the examination of certificates is $2.00.
7. No candidate under 18 years of age will be admitted to
the University without complete Junior Matriculation; and no
candidate over 18 years of age who has deficient Matriculation
standing will be admitted without the special permission of the
Faculty concerned.
8. The Junior and Senior Matriculation Examinations of
the Province of British Columbia are conducted by the High
*For the conditions under which exemption is granted in the Faculty of Arts
and Science, see "Courses Leading to the Degree of B. A." 44 The University of British Columbia
School and University Matriculation Board of the Province.
This Board consists of members appointed by the Department
of Education and by the University. The requirements for
Matriculation may be obtained in the publication, "Requirements for Matriculation," issued by the University, or in the
"Programme of Studies for the High and Technical Schools,"
issued by the Department of Education.
**-^ > Registration and Attendance 45
REGISTRATION AND ATTENDANCE
Those who intend to register as students of the University
are required to make application to the Registrar, on forms to
be obtained at the Registrar's office. This application should be
made early in August, or as soon as the results of the Matriculation examinations are known. For First Year students in the
Faculties of Arts and Science, and Agriculture, and for other
students coming to the University for the first time, the last day
for registration is Wednesday, September 18th, and for all other
undergraduate students, Friday, September 2Qth, 1929. (See
regulations in reference to "Admission to the University," page
42).
1. There are four classes of students:—
(a) Graduate students—Students who are pursuing courses
of study in a Faculty in which they hold a degree,
whether they are proceeding to a Master's degree or
not.
(b) Full undergraduates—Students proceeding to a degree
in any Faculty who have passed all the examinations
precedent to the year in which they are registered.
(c) Conditioned undergraduates—Students proceeding to
a degree with defects in their standing which do not
prevent their entering a higher year under the regulations governing "Examination and Advancement"
of the Faculty in which they are registered.
(d) Partial students—Students not belonging to one of the
three preceding classes. (See 7, below.)
2. All students other than graduate students are required
to register at the office of the Registrar on or before the last day
for registration, to furnish the information necessary for the
University records, to enrol for the particular classes which they
wish to attend, and to sign the following declaration:
"I hereby accept and submit myself to the statutes, rules,
regulations, and ordinances of The University of British Colum- 46 The University of British Columbia
bia, and of the Faculty or Faculties in which I am registered,
and to any amendments thereto which may be made while I
am a student of the University, and I promise to observe the
same."
In the information furnished for the University records,
students are requested to state what churches they propose to
make their place of worship. This information is available for
any of the city churches desiring it.
3. After the above dates a fee of $2.00 will be charged for
late registration.
4. Students registering for the first time must present the
certificates which constitute their qualification for admission
to the course of study for which they wish to register. The
Registrar is empowered to register all duly qualified students.
Doubtful cases will be dealt with by the Faculty concerned.
5. Students doing work in two academic years will register
in the lower year and fill out their course cards in such a way
as to make clear which courses are required to complete the
lower year.
6. Students desiring to make a change in the course for
which they have registered must apply to the Registrar on the
proper form for a "change of course." Except in special circumstance, no change will be allowed after the fifteenth day of
the session. If the application is approved by the Faculty
concerned, the Registrar will give the necessary notifications.
7. Partial students, who are not proceeding to a degree,
are not normally required to pass an examination for admission,
but before registering they must produce a certificate showing
that they have satisfied the Dean and the Heads of the Departments concerned that they are qualified to pursue with advantage the course of study which they propose to undertake.
8. Students are required to attend at least seven-eighths
of the lectures in each course that they take. Lectures will commence on the hour, and admission to a lecture or laboratory Registration and Attendance 47
and credit for attendance may be refused by the Instructor for
lateness, misconduct, inattention or neglect of duty. Absence
consequent on illness or domestic affliction may be excused only
by the Dean of the Faculty concerned, and medical certificates
or other evidence must be presented immediately on return to
University work. A medical certificate must show the nature
and the period of the disability. Medical report forms may be
obtained from the Dean's office. In cases of deficient attendance
students may (with the sanction of the Dean and the Head of
the Department concerned) be excluded from the final examination in a course; but unless the unexcused absences exceed
one-fourth of the total number of lectures in a course, such
students may sit for supplemental examination.
/■^ At 48 The University of British Columbia
FEES
All cheques must be certified and made payable to "The
University of British Columbia."
1. The sessional fees are as follows:
For Full and Conditioned Undergraduates
In Arts and Science—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 7th $50.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 20th.. 50.00
$100.00
In Teacher Training Course—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 7th $30.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 20th.. 30.00
I $ 60.00
In Applied Science—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 7th $75.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 20th.. 75.00
$150.00
In Nursing and Public Health—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 7th $50.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 20th.. 50.00
$100.00
NOTE.—For Third and Fourth Year students in Nursing the Sessional fee is
11.00, payable, with the Alma Mater fee of $10.00, on or before October 7th.
Students admitted to Nursing B or C and proceeding to the Certificate on
a basis of part-time attendance over two or more years, will pay the regular fee
for the whole course, but the amount payable each year will be pro-rated to
correspond with the proportion of work taken in that year.
In Agriculture—
First Term, payable on or before Oct. 7th $50.00
Second Term, payable on or before Jan. 20th.. 50.00
$100.00
Alma Mater Fee—Payable on or before Oct. 7th $ 10.00
Caution Money—Payable on or before Oct. 7th 5.00 Fees 49
For Partial Students
Fees per "Unit"—Payable on or before Oct. 7th $ 10.00
Alma Mater Fee—Payable on or before Oct. 7th 10.00
Caution Money—Payable on or before Oct. 7th 5.00
For Graduates
Registration and Class Fees — Payable on or before
Oct. 15th $ 25.00
After these dates an additional fee of $2.00 will be exacted
of all students in default.
The Alma Mater Fee is a fee exacted from all students
for the support of the Alma Mater Society. It was authorized
by the Board of Governors at the request of the students themselves.
The Caution Money is a deposit from which deductions will
be made to cover breakages, wastage, and use of special materials
in laboratories, etc. If the balance to the credit of a student
falls below $1.50, a further deposit of $5.00 may be required.
2. Immediately after October 7th and January 20th, the
Bursar will notify students who have not paid their fees that
steps will be taken to ensure their exclusion from classes while
the fees remain unpaid.
3. Students registering after October 7th shall pay their
fees at the time of registration, failing which they become subject to the provisions of Regulation 2.
For Summer Session Students
Fees are payable on registration, otherwise an additional
fee of $2.00 will be exacted.
For students registering in October for preparatory work
one-half of the fees is payable on registration, .and the balance
at the beginning of the Summer Session in the following July. 50 The University of British Columbia
For Saturday Morning, Late Afternoon and Evening
Classes one-half of the fees is payable on registration, and the
balance in January of the following year.
Minimum fee __ _. $20.00
For three units (at the rate of $13 for iy2 units) 26.00
For six units _ 52.00
For Commercial Course 20.00
Summer Session Association 1.00
Students borrowing books from the University Library for
Preparatory Reading courses, will be required to make the usual
deposit of two dollars ($2.00), with the Librarian to cover mailing cost.
Special Fees
Regular supplemental examination, per
paper $ 5.00
Special examination, per paper 7.50
Re-reading, per paper 2.00
Graduation 20.00
Supplemental examination fees must be paid two weeks
before the examination, special examination fees and fees for
re-reading when application is made, and graduation fees two
weeks before Congregation. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 51
MEDALS, SCHOLARSHIPS, PRIZES, BURSARIES AND
LOANS FOR 1929-30
MEDALS
The Governor-General's Gold Medal
A gold medal, presented by His Excellency the Governor-
General of Canada, will be awarded to the student standing at
the head of the graduating class in the Faculty of Arts and
Science. Honour and pass students may compete for this medal.
The Historical Society Gold Medal
A gold medal, donated by E. W. Keenleyside, Esq., and
known as the Historical Society Gold Medal, will be open to the
members of the graduating class. The award will be made by
the Department of History, on the basis of the student's standing in the courses in History which he has taken during his
undergraduate course, and the general interest he has shown in
the subject.
SCHOLARSHIPS FOR POST-GRADUATE STUDIES
University Scholarship
A scholarship of $200 may be awarded to a graduate
student who shows special aptitude for post-graduate studies.
Application should be made to the Registrar not later than the
last day of the final examinations.
The Anne Wesbrook Scholarship
This scholarship of $100, given by the Faculty Women's
Club of the University, is open to graduates of this University
who intend in the following year to pursue post-graduate study
in this or any other approved university. Application should
be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the final
examinations.
The Captain LeRoy Memorial Scholarship
This scholarship of $250, donated by the Universities
Service Club, will be awarded for the academic year 1929-30
to a returned soldier student in attendance at the University of 52 The University of British Columbia
British Columbia. Applications may be made by returned soldier
students who intend doing work in the Second or any later
year at The University of British Columbia, or post-graduate
work at any approved institution. Each application must contain a statement of the academic record, the war record, and
the special claims of the applicant, with two supporting references, and must be made to the Registrar not later than the
last day of the final examinations.
The award will be made by Senate, upon recommendation
of Faculty acting in consultation with the Executive of the
Universities Service Club.
The French Government Scholarship
A scholarship of 10,000 francs is donated by the French
Government for one year's post-graduate study in French. It
is tenable for one year and is contingent upon the voting of the
credits for the year by the French Chambers. (This contingency
applies to every item of the French budget and, practically, the
scholarship may be considered as permanent.)
The award is made by the French Consul for Western
Canada, residing in Vancouver, on the recommendation of the
Head of the Department of French in the University. Applications should be made to the Registrar not later than the last
day of the final examinations.
k The Nichol Scholarship
By the generosity of the late Hon. Walter Nichol—Lieutenant-Governor of the Province, 1921 to 1926,—five three-year
scholarships, each of the annual value of $1,200, have been made
available for study in the University of France, or at one of the
other institutions of higher education in France. With each
scholarship has been given a gold medal, the permanent possession of the successful candidate. These scholarships will be
open to graduates of The University of British Columbia. The
fifth scholarship having been awarded in May, 1929, there will
be no further award in 1930, except by way of renewal.
The intention of the donor being the development in
Canada, and particularly in this Province, of a wider knowledge Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 53
of the people of France, their ideals, literature, art and science,
and the promotion thereby of a better mutual understanding
between French and British in this country, each successful
candidate must undertake to return to British Columbia to
practise his profession for such time as seems reasonable in the
opinion of the Senate of the University.
Each scholarship may be held for three years, provided the
holder-can show from year to year satisfactory progress in the
course of study undertaken. Application must be made to the
Registrar not later than the last day of the final examinations.
The Brock Scholarship
A scholarship of $100, donated by Dean R. W. Brock, may
be awarded to a graduate student in Applied Science who shows
special aptitude for post-graduate studies. Applications should
be made to the Registrar not later than the last day of the
final examinations.
The 1851 Exhibition Scholarship
Under the revised conditions for the award of the 1851
Exhibition Scholarship in Science, The University of British
Columbia is included in the list of universities from which
nominations for scholarships allotted to Canada may be made.
These scholarships of £250 per annum, are tenable, ordinarily,
for two years. They are granted only to British subjects under
26 years of age, who have been bona fide students of pure or
applied science of not less than three years' standing. Application should be made to the Registrar not later than the last day
of the final examinations.
SCHOLARSHIPS FOR UNDERGRADUATES
1. IN ALL FACULTIES
The Rhodes Scholarship
An annual scholarship at one of the colleges of Oxford is
assigned by the trustees of the late Mr. Cecil J. Rhodes to the
Province of British Columbia. Each scholarship is tenable for
three years, and is of the value of £400 a year. Jn accordance 54 The University of British Columbia
with the wish of Mr. Rhodes, the election of candidates will
depend upon: (1) Force of character, devotion to duty, courage,
sympathy, capacity for leadership; (2) Ability and scholastic
attainments; (3) Physical vigor, as shown by participation in
gamles or in other ways. A candidate must be a British subject,
with at least five years' domicile in Canada, and unmarried.
He must have passed his nineteenth but not his twenty-fifth
birthday on October 1st of the year for which he is elected. He
must be at least in his Sophomore Year in some recognized
degree-granting university or college of Canada, and (if elected)
complete the work of that year before coming into residence at
Oxford. He may compete either in the province in which he has
acquired any considerable part of his educational qualification,
or in the province in which he has his ordinary private domicile,
home, or residence.
Candidates for the 1930 scholarship must have their applications, with all the required material, in the hands of the
Secretary of the Selection Committee not later than October
20th, 1929.
The Khaki University and Young Men's Christian Association
Memorial Fund Scholarships
The sum of $12,000, given to the University by the administrators of the Khaki University of Canada, provides a fund
which has so far been used to assist returned soldiers in actual
need of money to complete their courses. Out of the income
from this fund, ten scholarships of $75 each are now to be
offered each year for a period of five years, beginning with the
spring of 1927. They are to be awarded, on the results of
examinations in all years but the final, in all faculties, to such
returned soldiers or dependents of soldiers as have the requisite
academic standing; failing such, to the student body at large.
All returned soldiers and all children of soldiers of the Great
War who have any expectation of attaining scholarship standing in these years should apply to the Registrar on a special
form not later than the last day of the final examinations. Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 55
The Captain Leroy Memorial Scholarship
(See Pane 81)
University Scholarships
Two scholarships of $150 each may be awarded to returned
soldiers taking the work of the First Year, the award to be
based on the work of the year.
2. IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
University Scholarships
Two scholarships in Arts and.Science of $150 each will be
awarded to students proceeding to the Fourth Year, the award
to be based on the work of the Third Year.
Two scholarships in Arts and Science of $150 each will be
awarded to students proceeding to the Third Year, the award
to be based on the work of the Second Year.
The Shaw Memorial Scholarship*
This scholarship of $137.50, founded by friends of the late
James Curtis Shaw, Principal of Vancouver College, and afterwards of McGill University College, Vancouver, will be paid
throughout his undergraduate course to any child of the late
Principal Shaw who is in regular attendance at the University
as a fully matriculated student; when there is no such candidate,
it will be awarded upon the results of the examination of the
Second Year in Arts and Science to the undergraduate student
standing highest in any two of the following three subjects,
English, Latin, Greek, and proceeding to the work of the Third
Year.
The McGill Graduates' Scholarship*
A scholarship of $137.50, founded by the McGill Graduates'
Society of British Columbia, .will be awarded to the undergraduate student standing highest in English and French of
the Second Year in Arts and Science and proceeding to the
• work of the Third Year.
♦Originally donated to the Royal Institution, this has been transferred by that
body, with the consent of the donors, to The University of British Columbia. 56 The University of British Columbia
The Terminal City Club Memorial Scholarship
This scholarship of $110, founded by the members of the
Terminal City Club as a memorial to those members of the
Club who lost their lives in the Great War, will be awarded
to the undergraduate student standing highest in English and
Economics of the Second Year in Arts and Science and proceeding to the work of the Third Year.
The Scott Memorial Scholarship
This scholarship of $110—the proceeds of an endowment
of $2,000—founded by the Imperial Order of the Daughters of
the Empire of the City of Vancouver, in memory of Captain
Robert Falcon Scott, the Antarctic explorer, who sacrificed his
life in the cause of Science, will be awarded for general proficiency in biological subjects to the student who has completed
his Second Year in Arts and Science, and who is proceeding
in the Third Year to Honour work either in Biology or in a
course including Biology.
Royal Institution Scholarship
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded to the student taking
first place in the examinations of the First Year in Arts and
Science.
University Scholarships
Two scholarships of $150 each will be awarded on the examinations of the First Year in Arts and Science, one to the student
taking second place and the other to the student taking third
place in general proficiency.
The P. E. O. Sisterhood Scholarship
A scholarship of $75, given by Vancouver Chapters of the
P. E. O. Sisterhood, will, be awarded to the woman student
standing highest in English in-the First Year of the Faculty
of Arts and Science.
The Beverley Cayley Scholarship
A scholarship of $100.00, given by His Honour Judge
Cayley and Mrs. Cayley in memory of their son, Beverley Cay- Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 57
ley, Arts '18, will be awarded to the male student standing
highest in English in the First Year of the Faculty of Arts
and Science.
The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship
A scholarship of $110 is offered by the Club to be awarded
to the student obtaining first place in the subject, Canadian
History.
3. IN APPLIED SCIENCE
University Scholarship
A scholarship of $150.00 will be awarded, for general proficiency in previous work in this University, to a student proceeding to the Third Year of the Course in Nursing and Health
and having successfully completed the hospital probationary
period. Applications shall be made to the Registrar not later
than September 1st.
The Vancouver Women's Canadian Club Scholarship
A scholarship of $100 is offered by the Club to be awarded
to the student who attains the highest standing in the first four
years' training, academic and practical, of the Nursing and
Health course.
The Dunsmuir Scholarship*
A scholarship of $165, founded by the Hon. James Dunsmuir, will be awarded to the undergraduate student standing
highest in the Mining Engineering Course of the Fourth Year
in Applied Science and proceeding to the work of the Fifth
Year.
University Scholarship
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded to a student proceeding to the Fourth Year in Applied Science, the award to be
based on the work of the Third Year.
Royal Institution Scholarship
A scholarship of $150 will be awarded for general proficiency in the work of the Second Year in Applied Science.
♦Originally donated to the Royal Institution, this has been transferred by that
body, with the consent of the donors, to The University of British Columbia. 58 The University of British Columbia
4. IN AGRICULTURE
The British Columbia Fruit Growers' Association Scholarship
This scholarship of $100, donated by the British Columbia
Fruit Growers' Association, will be awarded to a student, preferably of the Third Year, who is specializing in Horticulture.
The award will be based on proficiency not only in horticultural
subjects, but in the entire work of the year.
University Scholarship
A scholarship in Agriculture of $150 will be awarded to a
Btudent proceeding to the Second Year, the award to be based
on the work of the First Year.
The David Thom Scholarship
A scholarship in Agriculture of $100.00 will be awarded to
a student proceeding to the Second Year, the award to be based
on the work of the First Year.
MATRICULATION SCHOLARSHIPS
University Scholarship
One scholarship of $150 will be awarded upon the results of
the Senior Matriculation Examination.
Royal Institution Scholarships
Seven General Proficiency scholarships will be awarded on
the result of the Junior Matriculation examinations: (a) $150
to the candidate of highest standing in the Province, and (b)
$100 to the candidate of next highest standing in each of the
following districts: (1) Victoria District, (2) Vancouver Island
(exclusive of Victoria District) and Northern Mainland, (3)
Vancouver District, (4) Fraser Delta (exclusive of Vancouver
District but including Agassiz), (5) Yale, (6) Kootenays.
These scholarships will be paid only to students in attendance at The University of British Columbia. Under certain
conditions they may be reserved for limited periods. A winner
who is completing Senior Matriculation in a high school of the Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 59
same district may have the scholarship reserved for one year,
subject to obtaining satisfactory standing in the Senior Matriculation examination. Also a winner who completes the first two
years of the Arts course in an affiliated institution may have
the scholarship reserved for two years. Sums accruing from
unpaid scholarships may be used in the form of bursaries or
loans.
PRIZES
1. IN ALL FACULTIES
The University Prize
A book prize of the value of $25, open to all students of the
University, will be awarded for an essay on a special literary
subject, to be announced at the beginning of the Session by the
Department of English. ■^
The Players' Club Prize
A prize of $50, donated by the Players' Club, is offered for
an original play suitable for the Club's Christmas performance.
The award will be made on the recommendation of the Faculty
members of the Advisory Board of the Players' Club.
2. IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
The Gerald Myles Harvey Prize
A book prize of the value of $50, given by Mr. J. Newton
Harvey in memory of his son, Gerald Myles Harvey, who died
on active service, will be awarded to the student in Arts and
Science who submits the best essay on a subject in Economics
or Political Science which concerns British Columbia or Canada
as a whole. A list of suggested subjects for 1929-30 may be
obtained from the Department of Economics, but competitors
may write on any subject approved by the Department and by
the donor of the prize, and essays written in the course of
University work, if so approved, may be submitted for the
prize. Intending competitors must notify the Department of
Economies before the 31st of December, 1929, of their intention
to compete. 60 The University of British Columbia
The Historical Society Prize
Through the generosity of R. L. Reid, Esq., K.C., the
Historical Society of the University has been able to offer,
annually, a prize of $25, open to all students in Arts and Science,
for the best essay on an assigned subject.
The Vancouver Women's Conservative Association Prize
This prize of $25, given by the Vancouver Women's Conservative Association, is open to students taking the Mathematics
of the First Year in the Faculty of Arts and Science. In
awarding it preference will be given to the son or daughter of
a deceased soldier, provided satisfactory standing is secured in
the subject.
The Letters Club Prize
A prize of $25, presented by R. L. Reid, Esq., K.C.j honorary member of the Letters Club, is offered annually for the
best essay by an undergraduate student in Arts on an assigned
subject in Canadian literature. The award will be made on the
recommendation of the Department of English.
3. IN APPLIED SCIENCE
The Convocation Prize
A prize of $50, donated by Convocation of The University
of British Columbia, will be awarded annually to the student
obtaining first place in the Fifth Year of Applied Science.
The Walter Moberly Memorial Prize
A book prize of the value of $25, donated by the Vancouver
Branch of the Engineering Institute of Canada in memory of
the late Walter Moberly, will be awarded for the best engineering thesis submitted by any Fifth Year student in the Faculty
of Applied Science.
The Professional Engineers' Prizes
Five book prizes, each of the value of $25, are offered by
the Association of Professional Engineers of British Columbia
for competition by those students in the Fourth Year of the Medals, Scholarships and Prizes " 61
Faculty of Applied Science, who are registered as Engineering
Pupils of the Association. The prizes are awarded for the best
summer essays in five branches of engineering.
The Provincial Board of Health Prizes
The Provincial Board of Health of the Province of British
Columbia offers the sum of $100 in prizes for competition in
the Course in Public Health Nursing.
BURSARIES
The Canadian Club of Vancouver Bursary
Through the generosity of the Canadian Club of Vancouver,
a sum of $300 will be available in 1929-30 to assist worthy male
matriculants who would not otherwise be able to enter upon the
University course. Candidates must be British subjects. They
should make application for the award as soon as possible after
the announcement of matriculation results, and not later than
September 1st.
The American Women's Club Bursary
Through the generosity of the American Women's Club of
Vancouver a sum of $110 will be available for 1929-30 to assist
a student who has satisfactorily completed the First Year in
Arts and Science, and who coidd not otherwise continue the
course in the Second Year. Application should be made to
the Registrar not later than September 1st.
The David Thom Bursary
From the funds of the David Thom Estate a sum of $60.00
is available annually to a student who has satisfactorily completed the work of the First Year in Agriculture and is proceeding to the work of the Second Year.
LOANS
Funds are provided from which loans, not to exceed $100,
may be made to undergraduate students who have completed
one year's University work and who are in need of pecuniary 62 The University of British Columbia
assistance. Loans are not granted to graduate students nor to
students taking the Teacher Training Course. Applications for
loans should be addressed to the President of the University.
General Loan Funds
The General Loan Fund is maintained by annual grants
made by the Board of Governors.
The Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy
B. C. Division Fund
This is a cumulative fund of $50 per year, given by the
Institute to the University as a trust, to be used for loans to
students taking the mining course. Applicants for loans must
be recommended by the Departments of Geology, Mining and
Metallurgy.
The David Thom Fund
From the David Thom Estate funds a sum of $500.00 has
been set asides for loans to Third and Fourth Year students in
Agriculture. A loan from this fund will supplement one from
the existing University loan funds.
GENERAL REGULATIONS
1. Scholarships, medals, and prizes will be awarded at the
close of the session, and, in case of Matriculation Examinations,
after the June examination.
2. If the award of a medal, scholarship, or prize is based
on an examination, no award will be made to a candidate who
obtains less than 75 per cent, of the possible marks.
3. Candidates are not permitted to hold more than one
scholarship each, although they may win more and will be given
credit in the published lists if they do. Scholarships thus won
but not held will pass to candidates next in order of merit,
provided they have made the required marks.
4. Scholarships under the jurisdiction of the University are
paid in three instalments—on the 15th of November, the 15th
of January and the 15th of March. Normally this is during the Medals, Scholarships and Prizes 63
session following their award, and undergraduate winners must
continue their courses to the satisfaction of the Faculty concerned. But Faculty may permit a scholarship to be reserved a
year, provided the student shows satisfactory reasons for postponing attendance.
5. Winners of scholarships who desire to do so may resign
the monetary value, while the appearance of their names in the
University list enables them to retain the honour. Any funds
thus made available will be used for additional scholarships or
student loans.
6. Medals, scholarships, prizes, bursaries and loans are open
to winter session students only, unless otherwise stated, and
marks obtained in summer session courses are not taken into
account in awarding them.
7. The University is in possession of a great deal of information regarding postgraduate scholarships, fellowships and
assistantships in other Universities, or as given by various
research bodies. Places are available in practically all departments of University work. Students wishing to pursue postgraduate work outside this University are advised to consult
the Registrar for information. /■^ At THE
FACULTY
OF
ARTS AND SCIENCE TIME TABLE
FACULTY OF ARTS
KEY TO BUILDINGS: A, Arts; Ag, Agriculture;
mornings
Monday
Room
Biology 2
Biology 8
Botany 6 e
Economics 8
Education'...
English 1 a
Secs.7,8,9,10,11,12
English 13
Ap 101
Ap 101
Ap 101
S 800
Ap 204
A 103,
106, 205,
203, 206,
207
A 100
A 101,
104, 105,
108
Apl02
A 102
A 202
A 204
A 208
A 201
Ap 100
S200
y
Geology 8 and 4
Greek 1
Greek 9
Mathematics 8
Mathematics 10
Mathematics 17
Philosophy 1, Sec. 1
AplOl
AplOl
S417
A 108
Ap202
A 204
A 100
A 104
A 105
AplOO
A 101
A 106
108, 203,
205, 206,
207
A 208
S400
S200
S210
10
Botany 6 d
Chemistry 8
Economics 1, Sec. 1
Education
English 1, Sec. 18
English 9
French 3 b
French 4 b _
Geology 1
History 20
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 8, 9,10,11,
12, 18
Philosophy 1,
Sec. 3
Philosophy 8,
Sec. 2
Physics 1, Sec. 2
Agricultural
Biology 1
Agl04
Ap 100
S417
S 400
S 200
Ap 202
A 203
A 105,
108, 204,
207
A 208
A 104
Ap 102
A 205
A 100
A 202
A 101
A 103,
206
A 106
A 102
S210
Ap 101
11
Chemistry 7
Economics 1,
Sec. 2 '
Economics 7
Education
English 14
French 1,
Sees, a, b, c, d
French 8 c _
French 4 d
Geology 8
German, Beg. A
History 2
History 11
History 15
Latin 1, Sees. 1. 2
Mathematics 2,
Sec. 1
Philosophy 4
Physics 4
Zoology 1
Tuesday
Botany 2
Botany 4 .
Economics 2
Education
English 1 b,
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,
French 2,
Sees, e, f, g
Geology 5 and 12...
Latin 2, Sec. 1
Latin 6
Mathematics 1,
Sec. 1
Mathematics 16
Physics 2, Sec. 1
Zoology 2
Zoology 8
Botany 3
Botany 6 c
Chemistry 9
Economics 1,
Sec. 3
Economics 4
Education...
English 17
French 4 a
Geology 2
German 1
Government 1.
Greek a...
History 14
Latin 2, Sec. 2
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 2, 8, 4, 5, 6, 7.
Philosophy 2
Wiysics 2, Sec. 2...
Botany 1
Botany 6 b
Chemistry 1, Sec. 3...
Chemistry 4
Economics 1, Sec. 4
Education
French 1,
Sees, e, f, g, h
French 8 a
French 4 d
Geology 6
Government 2
History 4
History 12
Latin 1, Sees. 3, 4...
Mathematics 2,
Sec. 2
Philosophy 8, Sec. 1..
Zoology 4
Zoology 7
Room
Ap 101
A 108
Ap204
A 100
106, 205.
206, 207,
208
A 101,
104, 105,
Ap 102
A 103
A 102
A 203
Ag 101
S 200
Ap 101
Ap 101
AplOl
Ap 101
S417
A 103
A 100
Ap202
A 203
A 104
A 201
A 108
A 102
A 101
A 202
A 105,
106, 205,
206, 207,
208
A 204
S 200
Ap 101
Ap 235
S 300
S417
Ap 100
A 206
A 104,
105, 108,
203
A 100
A 202
Ap 102
A 102
A 106
A 101
A 103,
207
A 208
A 205
AplOl
AplOl
WEDNESDAY
Biology 2
Biology 8
Botany 6 e
Economics 8
Education
English 1 a,
Sees. 7, 8, 9,10,
11, 12
English 13
French 2,
Sees, a, b, c, d
Geology 3 and 4
Greek 1
Greek 9
Mathematics 3
Mathematics 10
Mathematics 17
Philosophy 1, Sec. 1
Physics 1, Sec. 1
Botany 5 b
Botany 6, b and d ...
Chemistry 3
Economics 1, Sec. 1
English 1, Sec. 13
English 9
French 3 b
French 4 b
Geology 1
Geology 7
History 20
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 8, 9,10,11,
12, IS
Philosophy 1, Sec. 8
Philosophy 8, Sec. 2
Physics 1, Sec. 2
Physics 3
Agricultural
Economics
Biology 1
Botany 6 b
Chemistry 7
Economics 1,
Sec. 2
Economics 7
Education
English 14
French 1,
Sees, a, b, c, d
French 8 c
French 4 d
Geology 8
German, Beg. A
History 2
History 11
History 15
Latin 1,
Sees. 1, 2
Mathematics 2,
Sec. 1
Philosophy 4
Physics 4
Zoology 1
Room
Ap 101
Ap 101
Ap 101
S 300
Ap 204
A 103,
106, 208,
205, 206,
207
A 100
A 101,
104, 105,
108
Ap 102
A 102
A 202
A 204
A 208
A 201
AplOO
S200
AplOl
S417
A 108
A 204
A 100
A 104
A 105
Ap 100
A'Toi
A 106,
108, 203,
205, 206,
207
A 208
S 400
S 200
S210
Agl04
Ap 100
S417
S400
S200
Ap202
A 208
A 105,
108, 204,
207
A 208
A 104
Ap 102
A 205
A 100
A 202
A 101
A103, 206
A 106
A 102
S 210
Ap 101 -1929-30
AND SCIENCE
Ap, Applied Science; S, Science.
MORNINGS
Thursday
Room
Friday
Room
Satubday
Room
Botany 2 —
Economics 2
Education
English 1 b,
Sees. 1,2, 8, 4, 5, 6...
A 108
Ap204
A 100,
106, 205,
206, 207,
208
A 101,
104, 105
Ap 102
A 103
A 102
A 208
AglOl
S200
AplOl
Ap 101
Biology 2
Botany 6 f
Botany 7 a
Economics 8. .....
Education
English 1 b,
Sees. 7, 8, ,9,10,
11, 12
AplOl
AplOl
S800
Ap 204
A 103,
106, 203,
205, 206,
207
A 100
A 101,
104, 105,
108
Ap 102
A 102
A 202
A 204
A 208
A 201
Ap 100
S 200
a"i08
Ap204
A 100,
106, 205,
206, 207,
208
A 101,
104, 103
A 103
A 102
A 203
Ag 101
S200
Chemistry 9 Lab
English 1 a.
Sees. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
French 2,
Sees, e, f, g
Geology 10
Latin 2, Sec. 1
Latin 6 .....:
Mathematics 1, Sec. 1 .
Mathematics 16
Physics 2, Sec. 1
English 13
Geology 5 and 12
Latin 2, Sec. 1
9
French 2,
Mathematics 1, Sec. 1.^
Greek 1
Greek 9
Mathematics 3
Mathematics 10
Mathematics 17
Philosophy 1, Sec. 1 .
Physics 1, Sec. 1
AplOl
AplOl
S417
A 103
A 100
Ap202
A 203
A 104
A 201
A 108
A 102
A 101
A 202
A 105,
106, 205,
206, 207,
208
A 204
S200
Botany 5 a...._
Chemistry 2
Economics 1, Sec. 1
Education
English 1, Sec. 13
English 9
French 3 b
French 4 b
Geology 7 f^. .J
History 20
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 8, 9,10,11,
12, 18
AplOl
S 300
A 103
Ap 202
A 204
A 100
A 104
A 105
A 101
A 106,
108, 203,
205, 206,
207
A 208
S400
S200
Al"08
A 100
Ap 202
A 208
A 104
A 201
A 108
A 102
A 101
A 202
A 105,
106, 205,
206, 207,
208
A 204
S200
Botany 6e
Chemistry 9
Economics 1, Sec. 3
Economics 4
Education
English 17
French 4 a
Geology 2
German 1
Government 1
Greek 2
History 14 —
Latin 2, Sec. 2
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
Chemistry 9 Lab
Economics 1, Sec. 3
Economics 4
Education
Englisli 17
French 4 a...
Geology 10 _
German 1
Government 1
Greek 2
History 14
Latin 2, Sec. 2
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7
10
Philosophy 1, Sec. s
Philosophy 8, Sec. 2
Physics 1, Sec. 2
Physics 2, Sec. 2
Botany 1 _ .
Chemistry 1, Sec.8
Chemistry 4
AplOl
S800
S 417
Ap 100
A 206
A 104,
105, 108,
203
A 100
A 202
Ap 102
A 102
A 106
A 101
A108, 207
A 208
A 205
Ap 101
Ap.101
Agricultural
Agl04
S400
S200
Ap 202
A 203
A 105,
108, 204,
207
A 208
A 104
Ap 102
A 205
S200
A 100
A 202
A 101
A 103
A 106
A 102
Ap 101
Ap 101
S800
AplOO
A 206
A 104,
105, 108,
203
A 100
A 202
A102
A 106
A 101
A 108
A 208
A 205
Chemistry 1, Sec.8
Chemistry 9 Lab
Economics 1, Sec. 4
Education
French 1,
Sees, e, f, g, h
Economics 1, Sec. 2
English 14
Sees, e, f, g, h
French 8 a
French 1,
Sees, a, b, c, d
Geology 6
Geology 10
Geology 8
German, Beg. A
History 4
History 12
Latin 1, Sees. 8, 4
Mathematics 2, Sec. 2
Philosophy 8, Sec. 1
Zoology 4.
11
History 12
History 2 „
History 11
Mathematics 2, Sec. 2.
Philosophy 8, Sec. 1 .
Latin 1, Sees. 1, 2
Mathematics 2, Sec. 1 AFTERNOONS
TIME TABLE
Monday
Botany 8 Lab
Botany 5 c Lab.
Chemistry 1, Sec.l
Economics 8
Education
English 2 b
French 1,
Sees, i, j, k, 1
French 4 c
History 10
Latin 4
Philosophy 9
Zoology 5 Lab
Zoology 6 Lab
Botany 8 Lab
Botany 5 c Lab.
Chemistryl, Sec. 2
Chemistry 7 Lab
Education
English 10
English 16
French 1,
Sees, m, n, o
Geography 1
German 2
History 1
History 18
History 19
Philosophy l, Sec. 2.
Physics 4 Lab
Sociology
Zoology 5 Lab
Zoology 6 Lab
Bacteriology 1
Botany 1 Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab. 1.
Chemistry 2 Lab. a
Chemistry 7 Lab
English 12
Geology 5
Physics 4 Lab
Zoology 5 Lab
Zoology 6 Lab.
Bacteriology 1
Botany 1 Lab
Chemistryl Lab. 1...
Chemistry 2 Lab. a
Chemistry 7 Lab
Geology 5 Lab
Physics 4 Lab
Zoology 5 Lab
Zoology 6 Lab...
Bacteriology
Chemistry 1 Lab. 1...
Chemistry 2 Lab. a
Room
S 300
A 208
A 103
A 100,
Ap 100,
S400,
S200
A 104,
105,108,
203
A 204
A 106
A 102
A 205
S 800
A'ToO
A 206
A 104
A 105,
208, 204,
AplOO
A 201
A 100
A 108
A 101
S210
a'Tos
A 201
Ap 102
S400
Tuesday
Bacteriology 1
Botany 2
Botany 4
Botany 6 e
Education
English 5
English 7
Geology 1 Lab
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 1,2,8,4,5,6,7.
Philosophy 5
Physics 3 Lab., Sec. 1
Zoology 2 Lab
Zoology 8 Lab
Bacteriology 1
Biology 1, Sec. 1
Botany 2
Botany 4
Botany 6 e
Education
English 1 b,
Sees. 7, 8, 9,10,11,
12,18
English 2 c
Geology 1 Lab
Physics 3 Lab., Sec. 1
Zoology 2 Lab
Zoology 8 Lab
Biology 1, Sec. 1
Botany 2 Lab
Botany 4 Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab. 2
Chemistry 2 Lab. b
English 1*
Geology 6 Lab
Physics 8 Lab
Zoology 2 Lab
Zoology 8 Lab
Biology 1, Sec.2
Botany 2 Lab
Botany 4 Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab. 2.
Chemistry 2 Lab. b
Zoology 2 Lab
Zoology 8 Lab
Biology 1 Lab. 2
Botany 2 Lab.
Botany 4 Lab.
Chemistry 1, Lab. 2
Chemistry 2 Lab. b...
Room
Ap202
A 201
A 101
Alois,
106, 208,
205, 206
207, 208
A 204
Ap202
A 108,
105, 106,
205, 206,
207, 208
A 100
A 101
Wednesday
Botany 8 Lab
Botany 5 a and c...
Botany 6 c Lab
Chemistryl, Sec. 1
Economics 8
Education
English 2 a
French 1.
Sees, i, j, k, 1
French 4 c
Geology 7 Lab
History 10
Latin 4
Philosophy 9
Sociology
Zoology 5 Lab....
Zoology 6 Lab
Botany 8 Lab
Botany 5 a and c
Botany 6 c Lab
Chemistry 1, Sec. 2...
Education
English 10
T iglish 16
French 1,
Sees, m, n, o _.
Geology 7 Lab
Geography 1 ...
German 2...
History 1...
History 18....
History 19
Philosophy 1, Sec. 2...
Sociology _
Zoology 5 Lab
Zoology 6 Lab.
Room
S800
A 208
A 108
A 106
A 104,
105,108,
208
A 204
A 106
A 102
A 205
A 200
S800
A 106
A 208
A 104
A 105,
208, 204
Ap'ioo
A 201
A 100
A 108
A 101
S210
A 103 -Continued
AFTERNOONS
Thursday
Biology 1, Sec. 3...
Botany 4...
Botany 6 c and e Lab.
English 8
English 7
Geology 1 Lab.
Mathematics 1,
Sees. 8, 9,10,11,
12,18 ._..
Philosophy 5
Physics 8, Lab., Sec. 2
Zoology 1 Lab
Biology 1, Sec.8...
Botany 4...
Botany 6 c and e Lab.
Chemistry 8 Lab. b.
English 1 a,
Sees. 1, 2, s, 4, 5, «_.
Geology l Lab
Physics 8 Lab., Sec. 2.
Zoology 1 Lab
Biology l, Sec. 4.
Botany 7 Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab. 8
Chemistry 2 Lab. b
Chemistry 8 Lab. b
English 15
Physics 8 Lab.,
Sec. 2
Zoology 1 Lab
Biology 1, Sec. 4
Botany 7 Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab. 8.
Chemistry 2 Lab. b
Chemistry 8 Lab. b
Zoology 1 Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab. 8...
Chemistry 2 Lab. b....
Room
A 201
A 101
A108,
106, 203,
205, 206,
207
A 204
A 100,
106, 205,
206, 207,
208
A 101
Friday
Room
Biology 1, Sec. 5
Biology 3 ,
—......
Chemistry 1, Sec. 1
S800
A 208
Education __
A 108
English 2 a
A 100
French 1,
A 104,
Sees, i, j, k, 1
105, 108,
203
French 4 c
A 204
Geology 2 Lab.
History 10
A 106
Latin 4
A 102
Philosophy 9..
A 205
Sociology
S200
Zoology 4 Lab
Zoology 7 Lab
Bacteriology 1
Biology 1, Sec. 5
Biology 8
Botany 6 d Lab.
Chemistry 1, Sec. 2
S800
Chemistry 8 Lab. a
Education
A 106
English 10
A 206
English 16
A 104
French 1,
A 105,
Sees, m, n, o
203, 204
Geography 1
Geology 2 Lab.f! .^5
AplOO
German 2 ..1 J
A 201
History 1 .
A 100
History 18
A 108
History 19
A 101
Philosophy 1, Sec. 2
S210
Sociology .,
A 108
Zoology 4 Lab
Bacteriology 1
Biology 1, Sec. 6
,
Biology 8
Botany 6 d Lab.
Chemistry 1 Lab. 4
Chemistry 2 Lab. a
Chemistry 8 Lab. a
English 12
A 201
Zoology 4 Lab.
Zoology 7 Lab.
Biology 1, Sec. 6
Biology 8
Botany 6 d Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab. 4.
Chemistry 2 Lab. a
Chemistry 8 Lab. a
Zoology, 4 Lab
Zoology 7 Lab
Chemistry 1 Lab. 4
Chemistry 2 Lab. a Faculty of Arts and Science Supplemental Examinations
SEPTEMBER, 1929
o
Date
Wednesday,
September llth
Thursday,
September 12th
Friday,
September 13th
Saturday,
September 14th
Monday,
September 16th
Tuesday,
September 17th
Wednesday,
September 18th
Hour
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
9 A.M.
2 P.M.
First Year
History 1, 2, 3
English Literature..
Latin Authors
Chemistry 1
Latin Composition
French
Geometry
Greek
Physics 1, 2...
Trigonometry..
Algebra
English Composition.
German
Biology 1
Economics 1
Geography
Second Year
History 1, 2, 3
English Literature...
Latin 2
Chemistry 1, 2.
French
Geometry..
Greek
Physics 1, 2, 3..
Logic
Botany
Calculus
Zoology 1
Algebra
Psychology...
English Composition..
Biology 1
German
Economics 1, 2...
Geography
Third Year
►3
o
P
0
a
d
►3
X.
o
"a
>
►a
CO
t>
iz;
a
ui
o
H
a
H FACULTY OF ARTS AND SCIENCE
The degrees offered in this Faculty are Bachelor of Arts
(B.A.) and Master of Arts (M.A.).
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.
The degree of B.A. is granted with Honours or as a Pass
degree. A'Pass degree will be granted on completion of courses
amounting to 60 units chosen in conformity with Calendar
regulations. No distinction is made between Pass and Honour
students in the First and Second Years, except as regards prerequisites for later work, but in the Third and Fourth Years
there are special requirements for Honour students.
A double course is offered in Arts and Science and Applied
Science leading to the degrees of B.A. and B.A.Sc. (See
"Double Course^')
Credit will not be given for more than 15 units in the
First or Second Year of the Winter Session; nor for more than
18 units in the Third or Fourth Year. (See regulations under
"First and Second Years" and "Third and Fourth Years.")
Credits obtained at the Summer Session (see University
Summer Session) may be combined with Winter Session credits
to complete the 60 units required for the degree of B.A.; but
not more than 30 units of credit may be obtained in the two
academic years subsequent to Junior Matriculation nor more
than 15 in the academic year subsequent to Senior Matriculation.
The degree of B.A. will not be granted within three years
from Senior Matriculation nor within four years from Junior
Matriculation.
The maximum credit for Summer Session work in any one
Calendar year is 6 units; and the maximum credit for work
other than that of the regular Summer and Winter Sessions is
3 units per academic year, and 15 units in all subsequent to
Senior Matriculation or First Year Arts.
No credit will be granted for work done at other universities
in the same academic year in which work has been attempted
at this university, whether in the Summer Session or in the 72 Faculty of Arts and Science
Winter Session or otherwise. Extra-mural work done at other
universities prior to registration at this university may be
accepted, if approved by the Faculty, but may not exceed 3
units in respect of any one academic year or 15 units in all
subsequent to Senior Matriculation. If a student is granted
credit for extra-mural work taken elsewhere the number of units
which he may take at this university without attendance at a
Winter or Summer Session will be correspondingly reduced.
Candidates for the degree of B.A. are advised to attend at
least one Winter Session, preferably that of the Fourth Year.
A student seeking the degree of B.A. without attending a Winter
Session in his Fourth Year will be required to write, in addition
to the examinations in each course, one paper in each of the two
departments in which his major work has been done. This paper
will be on the whole of the student's work in the department
during his Third and Fourth Years.
Courses are described in terms of units. A unit normally
consists of one lecture hour (or one continuous laboratory period
of not less than two or more than three hours) per week
throughout the session, or two lecture hours (or equivalent
laboratory periods) throughout a single term.
Note.—Students in any of the affiliated Theological Colleges
who file with the Registrar a written statement expressing their
intention of graduating in Theology will be allowed to offer,
in each year of their Arts course, in place of optional subjects
set down in the Calendar for the Year and course in which
they are registered, Religious Knowledge options, to the extent
of three units taken from the following list: Hebrew, Biblical
Literature, New Testament Greek, Church History, Christian
Ethics and Apologetics.
FIRST AND SECOND YEARS
1. The requirements of the first two years consist of 30
units, 15 of which must be taken in each year. Courses must
be chosen in conformity with the requirements that follow.
Details of courses are given under the various departments. First and Second Years 73
Each student must take: Units
(a) English 1 in the First Year and
English 2 in the Second Year 6
*(b) The first two courses in a language
offered for Matriculation, one course
in each year 6
(c) Mathematics 1, in the First Year 3
(d) Economics 1, or History 1 or 2 or 4,
or Philosophy 1 3
(e) Biology 1, or Chemistry 1, or Geology 1, or Physics 1, or Physics 2 3
(/) Three courses!—not already chosen—
selected from the following:—
Biology 1, Botany 1, Chemistry 1,
Chemistry 2, Economics 1, Economics 2, French 1, French 2, Geography 1, Geology 1, Geology 2,
fBeginners' German, German 1,
German 2, fBeginners' Greek, Greek
1, Greek 2, History 1, History 2, History 4, Latin 1, Latin 2, Mathematics 2, Mathematics 3, Mathematics 4, Philosophy 1, Physics 1 or
Physics 2, Physics 3, Zoology 1 9
Note.—Botany 1, Zoology 1, Geology 1 and
2 and History 4 are not open to
First Year students. Economics 1,
and Philosophy 1 are open to First
Year students only if the permission
of the Heads of these departments is
obtained. History 2 is open to
First Year students only if they
*See Regulation "2."
tSee Regulations "3" and "4." 74 Faculty of Arts and Science
are preparing for entrance to the
Normal School. Geology 1, normally
a Third Year subject, may be taken
in the Second Year and must be so
taken by students intending to take
the Honour course in Geology.
2. Students, who have not matriculated in Greek, may take
Beginners' Greek in their First Year as a matriculation subject
and follow it up with Greek 1 and Greek 2 to satisfy the language
requirements under 1 (b).
3. No student in his First Year may elect more than one
beginners' course in language, and no beginners' course in
language will count towards a degree unless followed by a second
year's work in that language.
4. Except in the case of beginners' courses, no course in
language may be taken by a student who has not offered that
language at Matriculation. A beginners' course in language
may not be taken for credit by a student who has obtained
credit for that language at Matriculation.
5. A student taking three languages in the first two years
may defer the course selected under 1 (e) to the Third or Fourth
Year, and a student taking four science courses may defer the
course selected under 1 (d) to the Third or Fourth Year.
Note :—Students thinking of entering Applied Science are
referred to the list of subjects required to be taken by them in
First Year Arts, and the regulations in reference to these, given
under "Admission" and "General Outline of Courses" in
Applied Science. They are advised to attend the noon hour
talks on the choice of a profession and on the life and work in
vocations likely to appeal to Applied Science graduates.
To ensure the conformity of their courses to Calendar regulations, all students in their Second Year are advised to submit
to the Dean of the Faculty, on or before March 31st of each year,
a scheme of the courses they propose to take during their last
two years. Pass Courses '75
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS
The requirements of the Third and Fourth Years consist
of 30 units, of which students must take, in their Third Year,
not less than 15 units. The graduation standing is determined
by the results of the Third and Fourth Years combined.
PASS CURRICULUM
1. A minimum of 15 units must be taken in two Major
subjects, not less than 6 units in either, and a minimum of 6
units in some other subject or subjects of the Third and Fourth
Years. Work in the First or Second Year is required in each
of the Major subjects, except in the case of Bacteriology. Both
Major subjects must be chosen from one of the following groups:
(a) Chemistry, Bacteriology, Botany, Geology, Mathematics, Physics, Zoology. % i
(b) English, Government, Greek, Latin, French, German,
History, Economics, Mathematics, Philosophy.
2. Details of courses available in the Third and Fourth
Years are given under the various departments.
3. Only two subjects (6 units) of the First or Second Year
courses may be taken in the combined Third and Fourth Years.
In a number of these courses extra reading will be required of
Third and Fourth Year students.
When two First or Second Year subjects are taken in the
Third and Fourth Years not more than one of these subjects
may be outside the departments in which the student is doing
his major work.
4. No credit will be given for a language course normally
taken in the First Year unless it is taken in the Third Year and
continued in the Fourth Year. Some courses, however, are
intended for Honour students only.
5. During the Fourth Year one course of private reading,
to count not more than 3 units, may be taken with the consent
of the department concerned. A student will, for the purpose of
this rule, be deemed to be in his Fourth Year if he has com- 76 Faculty of Arts and Science
pleted his First and Second Years and 15 units in Third and
Fourth Year courses. Credit for a course of private reading is
part of the maximum of 15 units which may be taken in addition
to the regular work of Winter and Summer Sessions and no
other additional work may be taken in the same academic year.
HONOURS
1. Students whose proposed scheme of work involves Honour
courses must obtain the consent of the departments concerned
and of the Dean before entering on these courses; and this consent will normally be granted only to those students who have a
clear academic record at the end of their Second Year with at
least Second Class standing in the subject or subjects of specialization. (Cards of application for admission to Honour courses
may be obtained at the Registrar's office.)
2. Certain departments offer Honour courses either alone
or in combination with other departments. For Honours in a
single department, at least 18 of the requisite 30 units must be
taken in the department concerned, and at least 6 outside it. For
Honours in combined courses, at least 12 units are required in
each of two subjects. Particulars of these courses are given below.
3. All candidates for Honours may, at the option of the
department or departments concerned, be required to present a
graduating essay embodying the results of some investigation
that they have made independently. Credit for the graduating
essay will be not less than 3 or more than 6 units.
4. Candidates for Honours are required, at the end of their
Fourth Year, to take a general examination, oral or written, or
both, as the department or departments concerned shall decide.
This examination is designed to test the student's knowledge of
his chosen subject or subjects as a whole and is in addition to
the ordinary class examinations of the Third and Fourth Years.
5. Honours are of two grades—First Class and Second Class.
Students who, in the opinion of the department concerned, have
not attained a sufficiently high ranking may be awarded a pass
degree. If a combined Honour course is taken, First Class Honour Courses 77
Honours will be given only if both the departments concerned
agree; and an Honour degree will be withheld if either department refuses a sufficiently high ranking.
6. The following Honour courses are regularly offered, and
other Honour courses may be arranged with the department
or departments concerned.
HONOUR COURSES IN SINGLE DEPARTMENTS
Biology (Botany Option)
Prerequisites:—Biology 1, Chemistry 1, and Botany 1.
Physics 1 or 2, and Zoology 1 are required before completion of
the course and should be taken as early as possible. Students
are advised to take Chemistry 2 and 3.
Required Courses:—Botany 3, 4, 5 (a), and 6 (c).
Optional Courses:—Biology 2 and 3; courses in Botany not
specifically required; and courses in Zoology. Optional courses
should be selected in consultation with the department.
Biology (Zoology Option)
Prerequisites:—Biology 1, Zoology 1, Chemistry 1.
Physics 1 or 2 and Botany 1 are required before completion
of the course and should be taken as early as possible. Students
are advised to take Chemistry 2 and 3.
Required Courses:—Zoology 2, 3, 5, 6.
Optional Courses:—Zoology 4, 7, 8; courses in Botany;
Geology 6. These optional courses should be selected in consultation with the Head of the department.
Chemistry
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2, and Mathematics 2.
Course:—Candidates are required to complete the following
courses: Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 9 and 10. 78 Faculty op Arts and Science
Classics
Course:—Any three of Greek 3, 5, 6, 7, and any three of
Latin 3, 4, 5, 6.
As proof of ability to write Greek and Latin prose, candidates must attain not less than Second Class standing in Greek
8 and Latin 8. During the candidate's Fourth Year, papers will
be set on sight translation; and the candidate is advised to
pursue a course of private reading under the supervision of the
department.
There will also be a general paper on Antiquities, Literature
and History.
'Economics
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course:—Economics 2 if not already taken, any 15 further
units in the department, and a graduating essay which will
count 3 units. (Tutorial instruction will be arranged in connection with the essay.)
Students must pass an oral examination and, if required,
address a general audience on a designated subject.
Work in this department should be supplemented by a
course in Ethics and by the foundational courses in History.
English Language and Literature
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course:—English 19 (involving an examination on the life,
times, and complete works of some major English author), 20,
21 (a), 21 (b), 22, 24 (the seminar, which must be attended in
both years, though credit will be given only for the work of the
final year), and a graduating essay which will count 3 units.
Candidates will be required to take a final Honours examination, written or oral, or both, on the History of English
Literature. In the award of Honours special importance will
be attached to the graduating essay and to the final Honours
Examination. Honour Courses 79
If the candidate's work outside the department does not
include a course in English History, he must take an examination
in that subject.
Geology
Prerequisites:—Geology 1. If possible Geology 2 should be
taken. Chemistry 1 and Physics 1 or 2 should be taken in the
First Year. Zoology 1, to which Biology 1 is prerequisite, should
be taken in the Third Year in preparation for Geology 6.
Course:—18 units to be chosen from Geology 3, 4, 5, 6, 7,
8, 10, 12.
History
Course:—Any 18 units, of which the graduating essay will
count 3 units. The seminar (which carries no credit) must be
attended in either the Third or the Fourth Year. A reading
knowledge of French is required.
French
Course:—French 3 (a), 3 (6), 3 (c) in the Third Year.
French 4 (a), 4 (b), 4 (c) in the Fourth Year.
A graduating essay (in French) which will count 3 units.
Mathematics
Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2.
Course:—Any 18 units in Mathematics, and Physics 3 and
5. Mathematics 3 or 4, but not both, may be taken among the
requisite 18 units. A final Honours Examination is required.
Physics
Prerequisites:—Mathematics 2, Physics 1 or 2.
Course:—Mathematics 10, 16, 17. Physics 3 and 5, and 15
additional units.
COMBINED HONOUR COURSES
(a) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and Bacteriology
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1 and 2; Biology 1; Botany 1,
or Zoology 1. 80 Faculty op Arts and Science
Course:—Bacteriology 1, 2 and 5; the required courses for
either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour
course in Biology.
(b) Biology (Botany and Zoology) and Geology
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Biology 1; Geology 1.
Course:—Geology 2, 3 and 6; the required courses for either
the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour course
in Biology.
(c) Chemistry and Biology (Botany and Zoology)
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1 and 2; Physics 1 or 2;
Biology 1.
Course:—Chemistry 3, 4, 5, 7 and 9; the required courses for
either the Botany option or the Zoology option of the Honour
course in Biology.
(d) Chemistry and Physics
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2, and Mathematics 2.
Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and Physics 3, 5, 8
or 19, and two units from 7, 10, 12, 13 or 14. Candidates are
advised to take Mathematics 10.
(e) Chemistry and Geology
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2, and Geology 1.
Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5 and 7, and at least 12 units
in Geology.
(f) Chemistry and Mathematics
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1; Physics 1 or 2; Mathematics
1 and 2.
Course:—Chemistry 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, and at least 12 units in
Mathematics, including Mathematics 10.
(g) Mathematics and Physics
Prerequisites:—Mathematics 1 and 2; Physics 1 or 2. Honour Courses 81
Course:—Mathematics, at least 12 units, including Mathematics 10, 16 and 17.
Physics, at least 12 units, including Physics 3 if not already
taken, and Physics 5.
(h) Any two of:
Economics, English, French, History, Latin, Philosophy.
Economics
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course:—Any 12 units, including Economics 2, if not
already taken.
English
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French or German.
Course:—English 20 and 24, and any three of the English
courses of the first division. The seminar must be attended
during both of the final years, but credits which count for the
BA. degree will be given only for the work of the Fourth Year.
A final Honours Examination, written or oral, or both, is
required on the History of English Literature since 1500.
French
Course:—If the graduating essay is written on a French
subject, 3 (a) and 3 (c), 4 (a) and 4 (c); otherwise either
these courses or 3 (a) and 3 (6), 4 (a) and 4 (6).
Courses 3 (b) and 4 (6) are intended primarily for Honour
students and should be taken whenever possible, even if they
are not required to make up the minimum number of units.
History
Prerequisite:—A reading knowledge of French.
Course-.—History 10 and any 9 additional units, of which
the graduating essay, if written in History, will count 3 units.
The seminar (which carries no credits) must be attended
in either the Third or Fourth Year. 82 Faculty op Arts and Science
Latin
Course:—Latin 8 and any four of 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. In the
final year candidates must pass an examination (a) in sight
translation, and (b) in Latin Literature, History and Antiquities.
Private reading under the direction of the department is
recommended.
Philosophy
Course:—Any 12 units besides Philosophy 1, six units in
each year.
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A.
1. Candidates for the M.A. degree must hold the B.A. degree
from this University, or its equivalent.
2. A graduate of another university applying for permission
to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his
application an official statement of his graduation together with
a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects of
his course. The Faculty will determine the standing of such
a student in this University. The fee for examination of
certificates is $2.00.
3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records
who proceed to the Master's degree shall be required:
To spend one year in resident graduate study; or
(i) To do two or more years of private work under the
supervision of the University, such work to be
equivalent to one year of graduate study; or
(ii) To do one year of private work under University
supervision and one term of resident graduate
study, the total of such work to be equivalent to
one year of resident graduate study.
4. One major and one minor shall be required. In general
the minor shall be taken outside the Department in which the
student is taking his major, but special permission may be given Courses Leading to the Degree op M.A. 83
by Faculty to take both major and minor in the same department, provided the subjects are different and are under different
professors.
5. Two typewritten copies of each thesis, on standard-sized
thesis paper, shall be submitted. (See special circular of
"Instructions for the Preparation of Masters' Theses.")
6. Application for admission as a graduate student shall be
made to the Registrar by October 15th.
7. The following requirements apply to all Departments:
Prerequisites:
Minor:—For a minor, at least six units of work regularly
offered in the Third and Fourth years shall be
prerequisite.
For details or requirements, see regulations of
the several Departments.
Major:—For a major, at least eight units of work regularly
offered in the Third and Fourth years shall be
prerequisite.
For details of requirements, see fegulations of the
several Departments.
Students who have not fulfilled the requirements outlined
above during their undergraduate course may fulfil the same
by devoting more than one academic year's study to the
M.A. work.
M. A. Courses:
Minor:—Five or six units of regular Third or Fourth year
work, or equivalents in reading courses. Examinations to be written, or oral, or both at the discretion
of the Department concerned.
At least second class standing is required in the
subjects of the minor.
Major:—Nine or ten units of regular Third or Fourth year
work, or equivalents in reading courses, of which
units three to six shall be counted for the thesis. 84 Faculty op Arts and Science
All candidates must submit to a general examination on the major field. This examination may
be written, or oral, or both, at the discretion of
the Department concerned.
At least second class standing is required in the
work of the major.
Languages:—No candidate will receive the degree of M.A,
who has not satisfied the Head of the Department with which he
is majoring of his ability to read technical articles either in
French or in German.
Graduate students, who are Assistants, giving not more
than four hours a week of tutorial instruction, are permitted to
qualify for the M.A. degree after one regular winter session of
University attendance, provided they have done, in the Summer
vacation, research work of nature and extent satisfactory to the
Head of the Department concerned. Such students must be
registered as graduate students and must have secured the
approval of the Head of the Department concerned and of the
Faculty before entering upon the research in question. Other
graduate students doing tutorial work shall not be allowed to
come up for final examination in less than two academic years
after registration as M.A. students.
The following special requirements are prescribed by
different departments:
Biology (Botany Option)
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany and
Zoology.
Major:—Biology 1, Botany 1, and eight additional units
including Zoology 1. Courses Leading to the Degree op M.A. 85
M. A. Course:
Minor:—A minimum of five units chosen in consultation
with the Department.
Major:—Thesis, at least five units, and other courses to complete required units.
Biology (Zoology Option)
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Biology 1, and six additional units in Botany and
Zoology.
Major:—Biology 1, Zoology 1, and eight additional units,
including Botany 1.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—A minimum of five units chosen in consultation
with the Department.
Major:—Thesis, at least five units, and other courses to
complete the required number of units.
Economics
Prerequisites:
Minor:—The B.A. degree involving credit for at least fifteen
units of work in subjects in the Department, or an
equivalent.
Major:—The B.A. degree with Honours in Economics; or in
Economics in combination with some other subject;
or an equivalent.
M.A. Course:
All candidates for the Master's degree in this Department
must attend the Honour Seminar.
English
Prerequisites:
Minor:—At least nine units of credit for English courses
elective in the Third and Fourth years of the
undergraduate curriculum. 86 Faculty op Arts and Science
Major :■—At least fifteen units of credit for courses elective
in the Third and Fourth years.
M. A. Course-
Minor :—Six units of credit in advanced courses in English
not already taken.
Major:—(a) Twelve units of credit in advanced courses
not already taken, one of which courses must
be English 21a, or its equivalent, if this has
not been previously offered for credit.
(b) A graduating essay which will count as an
advanced course involving three units of credit.
(c) Oral examinations on the history of English
Literature.
(d) A reading knowledge of either French or
German. A student who offers both languages
will be allowed three units of credit towards the
M.A. degree.
French
Detailed Study:
(a) O.F.—Aucassin and Nicolette.
(b) XVIth Century—Montaigne, Essais (Hatier). Chefs-
d'oeuvre poetiques du XVIe siecle (Hatier).
Less Detailed:
(c) XVllth Century and after—The evolution of the French
Novel, particularly the novels treated in Le Breton's
Roman au XVIIe siecle—Roman au XVIIIe siecle, and
the chief Romantic Novels.
(d) XVIIIth Century—Beaumarchais, Barbier de Seville.
Rousseau, La Nouvelle Heloise—Emile. Diderot, Le
Neveu de Rameau. Voltaire, Les Lettres philosophiques.
(e) XlXth Century—Auzas, La poesie au 19e sihcle.
(Oxford). Alfred de Musset, Theatre. (Oxford).
Rostand, Cyrano de Bergerac. (Fasquelle). Courses Leading to the Degree op M.A. 87
(f) A general knowledge of French literary history from
XVIth Century to end of XlXth. This not to be
detailed, but to treat of main movements.
(g) A thesis in French on a subject to be approved by the
Head of the Department.
Note:—It is expected that the candidate will have read
and will be able to discuss three plays of Moliere, three of
Corneille, three of Racine, and something of Boileau, Bossuet,
Chateaubriand, La Fontaine, Lamartine, Victor Hugo, Balzac,
Flaubert, Anatole France.
Some help will be given by lectures, explanations of texts,
and advice in reading, but the Department cannot undertake to
cover the whole or any considerable part of the syllabus.
History
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Two courses (six units) to be chosen from History
10 to 20 inclusive.
Major:—Three courses (nine units) to be chosen from
History 10 to 20 inclusive.
M.A. Course: g
Minor:—Two courses (6 units) to be chosen from History
10 to 20 inclusive; or the equivalent in reading
courses. All candidates for a minor in History
must attend the Honours Seminar.
Major:—Two courses (six units) to be chosen from History
10 to 20 inclusive. A thesis embodying original
work to which 3 units of credit is given. All candidates for a major in History must attend the
Honours Seminar. Examinations shall be written
and oral. Candidates for a major will be examined
orally on their thesis and their major field. An
average of 75 per cent, is required to qualify in
the work of a major. 88 Faculty op Arts and Science
Mathematics
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Mathematics 10 and at least two other Honour
Courses.
Major:—Candidates must have completed the Honour
Course in Mathematics, or its equivalent.
M.A. Course:
Minor:—Mathematics 16 and an additional three units to
be chosen from the Honour Courses.
Major -.—Any four of the graduate courses and a thesis.
Physics
Prerequisites:
Minor:—Physics 3 and 5 and at least two mpre units of
work regularly offered in the Third or Fourth
Year.
Major:—At least eight units of work regularly offered in
the Third and Fourth Years.
M.A. Course-
Minor:—Six units of work in advanced courses in Physics
not already taken.
Major:—(a) At least six units of work in the graduate
courses,
(b) A thesis.
EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT
1. Examinations in all subjects, obligatory for all students,
are held in December and in April. Applications for special
consideration on account of illness or domestic affliction must be
submitted to the Dean not later than two days after the close
of the examination period. In eases where illness is the plea
for absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be
presented on the appropriate form which may be obtained from
the Dean's office. Examinations and Advancement 89
2. The passing mark will be 50 per cent, in each subject,
except in the case of First and Second Year students who during
one session do 15 units of regular work, in which case an aggregate of 50 per cent, will be required and not less than 40 per
cent, in each subject. In Beginners' Greek and. Beginners'
German, however, the passing mark is 50 per cent. In any
course which involves both laboratory work and written examinations, students may be debarred from examinations if they
fail to present satisfactory results in laboratory work, and they
will be required to pass in both parts of the course.
3. Successful candidates will be graded as follows: First
Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80
per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent.
4. A request for the re-reading of an answer paper must
be forwarded to the Registrar WITHIN FOUR WEEKS after
the results of the examinations are announced. Each applicant
must state clearly his reasons for making such a request in view
of the fact that the paper of a candidate who makes less than a
passing mark in a subject is read at least a second time before
results are tabulated and announced. A re-reading of an
examination paper will be grante'd only with the consent of the
Head of the Department concerned. The fee for re-reading a
paper is $2.00.
5. A student who makes 50 per cent, of the total required
for a full year's work (at least 15 units chosen in conformity
with calendar regulations), but who fails in an individual subject will be granted a supplemental examination in that subject
if he has not fallen below 30 per cent, in that subject. If his
mark is below 30 per cent, a supplemental examination will not
be granted. Notice will be sent to all students to whom supplemental examinations have been granted.
A student who makes less than 50 per cent, of the total
required for a full year's work (15 units), will not be allowed a
supplemental examination.
6. Supplemental Examinations will be held in September
in respect of Winter Session examinations, and in June or 90 Faculty op Arts and Science
July in respect of Summer Session examinations. They will not
be granted at any other time except by special permission of the
Faculty, and on payment of a fee of $7.50 per paper. Only
under urgent circumstances will the privilege of writing a
Special Examination be granted. Special examinations will be
held during the third week in October and the second week in
January and at these times only. To pass a supplemental examination a candidate must obtain at least 50 per cent.
A candidate with a supplemental examination outstanding
in any subject which is on the Summer Session curriculum may
clear his record by attending the Summer Session course in the
subject and passing the required examinations.
Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied
by the necessary fees (See schedule of Fees) must be in the
hands of the Registrar at least two weeks before the date set for
the examinations.
7. If a student fails in two supplemental examinations
(whether on the regular date or by way of special examination),
in respect of the same course, no further supplemental examination will be granted to that student in respect of that course.
If the course is a required one the student must repeat the
course; if it is an optional course he may repeat it or take an
alternative.
8. No student may enter a higher year with standing defective in respect of more than 3 units.
No student with defective standing of more than 3 units of
the year immediately preceding, or with any defects from a
year earlier than the one immediatly preceding, shall be allowed
to register for more than 15 units of work, these units to include
the subject (or subjects) in which he is conditioned or permissible substitutes.
9. A student may not continue in a later year any subject
in which he has a supplemental examination outstanding from
an earlier year, except in the case of compulsory subjects in the
Second Year. Bacteriology 91
10. A student who is not allowed to proceed to a higher year
may not register as a partial student in respect of the subjects
of that higher year. But a student who is required to repeat
his year will be exempt from attending lectures and passing
examinations in subjects in which he has already made at least
50 per cent. In this case he may take, in addition to the subjects of the year which he is repeating, certain subjects of the
following year.
11. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year
may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by
the Senate to withdraw from the University.
12. Any student whose academic record, as determined by
the tests and examinations of the first term of the First or
Second Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the
recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to
discontinue attendance at the University for the remainder of
the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to the
University as long as any supplemental examinations are outstanding.
13. Term essays and examination papers will be refused a
passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English, and,
in this event, students will be required to pass a special examination in English to be set by the Department of English.
DEPARTMENTS IN ARTS AND SCIENCE
Department of Bacteriology
Professor: Hibbert Winslow Hill.
Instructor: Freda W. Stewart.
Assistant: Helen M. Mathews.
Assistant: Elizabeth M. Guernsey.
1. General Bacteriology:—A course consisting of lectures,
demonstrations, and laboratory work.
The history of bacteriology, the place of bacteria in nature,
the classification of bacterial forms, methods of culture and
isolation, and various bactericidal substances and conditions will 92 Faculty op Arts and Science
be studied. The relationship of bacteria to agriculture, household science, and public health will be carefully considered.
Text-book:—Buchanan, Agricultural and Industrial Bacteriology, Appleton.
Students proceeding to Bacteriology 2 need procure Jordan
only (see Bacteriology 2).
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 1, and Biology 1.
Seven hours a week. First Term. 2 units.
2. Special Bacteriology:—A course consisting of lectures,
demonstrations, and laboratory work.
The more common pathogenic bacteria will be studied, together with the reaction of the animal body against invasion by
these bacteria. The course will include studies in immunity
and the various diagnostic methods in use in public health
laboratories.
Text-book:—Jordan, General Bacteriology, Latest Edition,
Saunders. ^^
Prerequisite:—Bacteriology 1.
Seven hours a week. Second Term. 2 units.
3. As in Dairying 3 (under Faculty of Agriculture.)
V/2 units.
4. As in Dairying 5 (under Faculty of Agriculture.)
iy2 units.
5. Advanced Bacteriology:—A reading and laboratory
course, including immunology. Tutorial instruction of one hour
per week; laboratory and demonstration hours to be arranged
with the class.
Text-books:—Kolmer, Infection and Immunity. Jordan,
General Bacteriology, Latest Editions, Saunders. Jordan and
Falk, Newer Knowledge of Bacteriology and Immunology, University of Chicago Press, Latest Editions.
Prerequisites:—Bacteriology 1 and 2. 3 units.
6. Soil Bacteriology:—A laboratory and lecture course, in
which the bacteria of soils are studied qualitatively and quantitatively, with special reference to soil fertility. Botany 93
Text-book:—Lohnis and Fred, Text-book of Agricultural
Bacteriology, Latest Edition, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite:—Bacteriology 1.
Five hours a week. First term. 2 units.
7. As in Dairying 7 (under Faculty of Agriculture).
3 units.
Department of Botany
Professor: A. H. Hutchinson.
Associate Professor: Prank Dickson.
Assistant Professor: John Davidson.
Honorary Lecturer: William Newton.
Assistant: Jean Davidson.
Assistant: R. W. Pillsbury.
Assistant: Margaret Keillor.
Biology
1. Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory to
more advanced work in Botany or Zoology; also to courses
closely related to Biological Science, such as Agriculture, Forestry, Medicine.
The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelationships of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and division
of labour; life-histories; relation to environment.
The course is prerequisite to all courses in Botany and
Zoology.
Text-book: — Smallwood, Text-book of Biology, Lea &
Febiger, 1920.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
2 (a) Principles of Genetics:—The fundamentals of Genetics illustrated by the race histories of certain plants and
animals; the physical basis of heredity; variations; mutations;
acquired characters; Mendel's law with suggested applications.
Text-book:—Castle, Genetics and Eugenics, Harvard Press.
Prerequisite:—Biology 1.
Two lectures and one laboratory period per week. First
Term. IV2 units. 94 Faculty op Arts and Science
2 (b) Principles of Genetics:—A continuation of the
studies of genetic principles with suggested applications. A
lecture and laboratory course. The laboratory work will consist
of problems, examination of illustrative material and experiments with Drosophila.
Text-book:—Sinnott and Dunn, Principles of Genetics,
McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite:—Biology 2 (a).
One lecture and four hours laboratory per week.
Second Term. iy2 units.
3. General Physiology:—A study of animal and plant life
processes. Open to students of Third and Fourth Years having
prerequisite Biology, Chemistry and Physics; the Department
should be consulted. W^ 1
Text-book:—Bayliss, Principles of General Physiology,
Longmans, Green.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week.
Reference reading. Second Term. 3 units.
Botany
1. General Botany:—A course including a general survey of
the several fields of Botany and introductory to more specialized
courses in Botany.
This course is prerequisite to all other courses in Botany,
except the Evening Course. Partial credit (2 units) toward
Botany 1 may be obtained through the Evening Course.
Text-book:—Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany,
Vol. T, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite:—Biology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
2. Morphology:—A comparative study of plant structures.
The relationship of plant groups. Comparative life-histories.
Emphasis is placed upon the increasing complexity of plant
structures, from the lower to the higher forms, involving a
progressive differentiation accompanied by an interdependence
of parts, Botany 95
Text-book:—Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany,
Vol. I, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. First
Term. 2 units.
3. Plant Physiology.
Text-book:—V. I. Palladin, Plant Physiology, English
Edition (Translation of 6th Russian Edition), 1918, Blakiston.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory work per week.
First Term. 2 units.
4. Histology:—A study of the structure and development
of plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning,
Btaining, mounting, drawing, reconstructing. Use of microscope,
camera lucida; photo-micrographic apparatus.
Text-books:—Eames and McDaniels, Introduction to Plant
Anatomy, McGraw-Hill. Chamberlain, Methods in Plant Histology, University of Chicago Press.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
Seven hours per week. Second Term. 2 units
5. Systematic Botany.
5 (a) Economic Flora:—An introduction to the classification of plants through a study of selected families of economic
plants of British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine
and industrial arts; harmful to crops and stock. Weeds, and
poisonous plants. Methods of control.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
Texts:—Jepson, Economic Plants of California, University
of California; Thomson and Sifton, Poisonous Plants and Weed
Seeds, University of Toronto Press.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. First
Term. IV2 units.
5 (6) Dendrology:—A study of the forest trees of Canada,
the common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of 96 Faculty of Arts and Science
the United States which are not native to Canada. Emphasis
on the species of economic importance. Identification, distribution, relative importance, construction of keys.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
Text-books:—Morton & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada,
Dominion Forestry Branch, Ottawa; Sudworth, Forest Trees of
the Pacific Slope, Superintendent of Documents, Washington,
D.C. Davidson and Abercrombie, Conifers, Junipers and Yew,
T. F. Unwin.
One lecture and one period of two or three hours laboratory
or field work per week. 2 units.
5 (c) Descriptive Taxonomy:—An advanced course dealing
with the collection, preparation and classification of "flowering
plants." Methods of field, herbarium and laboratory work.
Plant description, the use of floras, preparation of keys, identification of species. Systems of classification. Nomenclature.
Prerequisites:—Botany 1 and 5 (a).
Texts:—Hitchcock, Descriptive Systematic Botany, Wiley
& Sons, N. Y.; Henry, Flora of Southern British Columbia, Gage
& Co., Toronto.
One lecture and four hours laboratory per week. Second
Term. IV2 units.
6 (a) General Plant Pathology:—Identification and life
histories of pathogens causing disease of some common economic
plants; means of combating them.
Text-book:—Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw-
Hill.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
One lecture and two hours laboratory per week. Second
Term. 1 unit.
6 (6) Forest Pathology:—Nature, identification and control of the more important tree-destroying fungi and other plant
parasites of forests. Botany 97
Text-book:—Rankin, Manual of Tree Diseases, Macmillan.
One lecture and two hours laboratory per week during one-
half of the Second Term. y2 unit.
6 (c) Plant Pathology (Elementary):—A course similar to
6 (a), but including more details concerning the diseases studied.
Text-book:—Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases, McGraw-
Hill.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. Second
Term. 2 units
6 (d) Plant Pathology (Advanced):—A course designed for
Honour or Graduate students. Technique; isolation and culture
work; inoculations; details concerning the various stages in the
progress of plant diseases; a detailed study of control measures.
Prerequisite:—Botany 6 (a) or 6 (c).
One lecture and four hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
6 (e) Mycology:—A course designed to give the student a
general knowledge of the fungi from a taxonomic point of view.
Text-books:—Stevens, Plant Disease Fungi, Macmillan.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. Credit
will be given for a collection of fungi made during the summer
preceding the course. First Term. 2 units.
6 (/) History of Plant Pathology:—A lecture course dealing with the history of the science of Plant Pathology from
ancient times to the present.
Text-book:—Whetzel, An Outline of the History of Phytopathology, Saunders.
Prerequisite:—Botany 6 (a) or 6 (c).
One lecture per week. Second Term. y2 unit.
7. Plant Ecology.
7 (a) Forest Ecology and Geography:—The inter-relations
of forest trees and their environment; the biological character- 98 Faculty op Arts and Science
istics of important forest trees; forest associations; types and
regions; physiography.
Reference books: Whitford and Craig, Forests of British
Columbia, Ottawa; Zon and Sparhawk, Forests of the World,
MeGraw, Hill; Hardy, The Geography of Plants, Oxford University Press.
Prerequisite:—Botany 1.
One lecture and one period of field and practical work per
week. First Term. 1 unit.
Evening and Short Courses in Botany
A Course in General Botany, comprising approximately
fifty lectures, is open to all interested in the study of plant life
of the Province. No entrance examination and no previous
knowledge of the subject is required.
The course is designed to assist teachers, gardeners, foresters,
and other lovers of outdoor life in the Province. As far as
possible, illustrative material will be selected from the flora of
British Columbia.
The classes meet every Tuesday evening during the University session (Sept.-May) from 7.30 to 9.30 p.m. Field or
laboratory work, under direction, is regarded as a regular part
of the course.
No examination is required except in the case of University
students desiring credit for this course. This course may be
substituted for the lecture part of Botany 1. Other students
desiring to ascertain their standing in the class may apply for a
written test.
A detailed statement of requirements, and work covered in
this course, is issued as a separate circular. Copies may be had
on request. Chemistry 99
Department of Chemistry
Professor: R. H. Clark.
Professor of Analytical Chemistry: E. H. Archibald.
Associate Professor: W. F. Seyer.
Associate Professor: M. J. Marshall.
Assistant Professor: J. Allen Harris.
Assistant Professor: William Ure.
Instructor: John Allardyce.
Assistant: H. R. Lyle Streight.
Assistant: A. Ernest Morell.
Assistant: E. C. Hallonquist.
Assistant: F. L. Munro.
1. General Chemistry.—This course is arranged to give a
full exposition of the general principles involved in modern
Chemistry and comprises a systematic study of the properties of
the more important metallic and non-metallic elements and their
compounds, and the application of Chemistry in technology.
Text-book:—Kendall, General Chemistry, Century Co.
Three lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis. — One lecture and six hours
laboratory per week throughout the First Term. (During the
first six weeks of the term an additional lecture may be substituted for a part of the laboratory work.)
(6) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the more
important methods of gravimetric and volumetric analysis.
Text-book:—Cumming & Kay, Quantitative Analysis,
Gurney & Jackson.
Prerequisite:—Chemistry 1.
One lecture and six hours laboratory per week. Second
Term. 3 units.
Course (b) must be preceded by Course (a).
3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study of the
compounds of carbon will include the methods of preparation
and a description of the more important groups of compounds
in both the fatty and the aromatic series. 100 Faculty of Arts and Science
Chemistry 3 will only be given to those students taking
Chemistry 2, or those who have had the equivalent of Chemistry 2.
Books recommended:—Holleman-Walker, Text-book of
Organic Chemistry, Wiley; Gatterman, The Practical Methods
of Organic Chemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
4. Theoretical Chemistry.—An introductory course on the
development of modern theoretical chemistry, including a study
of gases, liquids, and solids, solutions, ionization, and electrical
conductivity, thermochemistry, chemical equilibrium, kinetics
of reactions, colloids.
Books recommended:—Millard, Physical Chemistry for
Colleges, McGraw-Hill; Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles,
Macmillan; For Laboratory Use:—Findlay, Practical Physical,
Chemistry, Longmans.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2, Mathematics 2.
Two lectures and three hours' laboratory per week. Second
Term. V/2 units.
5. Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—The work of this course will
include the detection and separation of the less common metals,
particularly those that are important industrially, together with
the analysis of somewhat complex substances occurring in
nature.
One lecture and six hours laboratory per week. First Term.
(b) Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made will
include the more difficult estimations in the analysis of rocks,
as well as certain constituents of steel and alloys. The principles
on which analytical chemistry is based will receive a more minute
consideration than was possible in the elementary course.
Prerequisite:—Chemistry 2.
One lecture and six hours laboratory per week. Second
Term. 3 units. Chemistry 101
6. Industrial Chemistry.—Those industries, which are dependent on the facts and principles of Chemistry, will be considered in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures will
be supplemented by visits to manufacturing establishments in
the neighbourhood, and it is hoped that some lectures will be
given by specialists in their respective fields.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures per week. 2 units.
7. Physical Chemistry.—This course is a continuation of
Chemistry 4 and treats in more detail the kinetic theory of gases,
properties of liquids and solids, elementary thermodynamics and
thermochemistry, properties of solutions, theoretical electrochemistry, chemical equilibrium, kinetics of reactions, radioactivity.
Books recommended:—Getman, Outlines of Theoretical
Chemistry, Wiley; Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles,
Macmillan; For Laboratory: Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments
on Physico-Chemical Principles, Macmillan; Findlay, Practical
Physical Chemistry, Longmans.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2, 3 and 4.
Two lectures and three hours' laboratory per week. 3 units.
8. Electrochemistry.—(a) Solutions are studied from the
standpoint of the osmotic and dissociation theories. The laws of
electrolysis, electroplating, electromotive force, primary and
secondary cells are considered in detail.
For reference:—LeBlanc, Elements of Electrochemistry,
Macmillan; Creighton-Fink, Theoretical Electrochemistry, Vol.
1, John Wiley & Sons; Allmand, Applied Electrocliemistry,
Longmans-Green.
Two lectures and three hours' laboratory per week. First
Term. iy2 units.
(b) As in Applied Science.
9. Advanced Organic Chemistry.—Important organic reactions will be discussed. The Carbohydrates, Proteins, Enzyme
Action, Terpenes and Alkaloids will be studied in more or less 102 Faculty of Arts and Science
detail. In the laboratory some complex compounds will be prepared and quantitative determinations of carbon, hydrogen,
nitrogen, sulphur and the halogens made with the view of
identifying organic compounds.
For reference:—Cohen, Organic Chemistry, Arnold.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
10. History of Chemistry.—Particular attention will be paid
to the development of chemical theory.
For reference:—Moore, History of Chemistry, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2, 3, and 4.
Two hours a week. Second Term. | 1 unit.
11. Physical Organic Chemistry.—Stereochemical theories
will be discussed in greater detail than in Chemistry 9, and
chemical and physico-chemical methods employed in determining
the constitution of organic compounds will be studied. The
electronic conception of valency as applied to organic compounds
will be considered, and an outline of the work done in Electro-
Organic chemistry will be given.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 7 and 9.
Lectures:—2 units. 2 units.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.)
12. Colloid Chemistry.—The Chemistry of colloids and the
application of colloidal chemistry to industry.
For reference:—Bogue, Colloidal Behaviour, Vol. I and II,
McGraw-Hill; Freundlich, Colloid Chemistry, Methuen; Reports
on Colloid Chemistry by British Association for Advancement
of Science.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 3 and 4.
Two hours a week. First Term. 1 unit.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
14. Organic Agricultural Chemistry.—An introduction to
the compounds of carbon, with special applications to problems Chemistry 103
in agriculture. The laboratory work will be adapted to the needs
of the individual student.
Prerequisite:—Chemistry 2.
Two lectures and three hours laboratory per week. 3 units.
15. Dairy Chemistry.—The chemistry of the carbohydrates,
fats, and proteins will be discussed in outline, and the chemical
processes involved in enzyme action and fermentation will receive
consideration.
Text-book:—Chamberlain, Agricultural Chemistry, Macmillan.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2 and 3.
One lecture and three hours laboratory per week. 2 units.
17. Chemical Thermodynamics.—Derivation of fundamental equations and application to the gas laws, theory of
solutions, chemical equilibrium, electrochemistry and capillarity.
Study of the quantum theory and the Nernst heat theorem.
Text-book:—Lewis & Randall, Principles of Thermodynamics', McGraw-Hill. Reference:—Sackur, Thermochemistry
and Thermodynamics, Macmillan.
Prerequisite:—Chemistry 7.
Two lectures per week. Second Term. 1 unit.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.)
18. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry.—A more detailed
treatment of the chemistry of the metals than is possible in
Chemistry 1, together with the chemistry of the Rare Elements.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2 and 4.
Two lectures per week. 2 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
19. Clinical Laboratory Chemistry.—This course is a general introduction to the chemical problems met with by the
technician in the modern clinical laboratory. The underlying
chemical facts and principles of the various tests in common use 104 Faculty of Arts and Science
will be considered, with a general discussion of their physiological significances.
Prerequisites:—Chemistry 2 and 3.
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory work
per week. 3 units.
20. Methods in Teaching High School Chemistry.—This
course is offered primarily for students in the Teacher Training
Course and does not carry undergraduate credit.
For reference:—Black and Conant, Practical Chemistry,
The Macmillan Company. Kendall, General Chemistry, The
Century Company.
Three lectures per week. Second Term.
Department of Classics
Professor: Lemuel Robertson.
Professor of Greek: O. J. Todd.
Associate Professor: H. T. Logan.
Instructor: Geoffrey B. Riddehough.
Assistant: George F. Davidson.
Greek
Beginners' Greek.—White, First Greek Book, Chap. I-
LIII; Copp, Clark.
Four hours a week. 3 units.
1. Lectures.—White, First Greek Book, Chap. LIV-
LXXX. Xenophon, Anabasis I and IV, Goodwin and White,
Ginn.
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece
and Rome, Chap. I-XXXII.
Four hours a week. 3 units.
2. Lectures.—Plato, Apology, Dyer-Seymour, Ginn; Aeschylus, Prometheus Bound, Weeklein-Allen, Ginn.
Composition.—Arnold's Greek Prose Composition, ed.
Abbott, Longmans. Selected passages will occasionally be set
for Unseen Translation. Classics 105
Literature.—Norwood, The Writers of Greece.
Four hours a week. Mr. Todd, Mr. Logan. 3 units.
3. Lectures.—Thucydides, History, Book VII, Marchant,
Macmillan; Sophocles, Antigone, Jebb and Shuckburgh, Cambridge; Euripides, Heracles, Gray and Hutchinson, Cambridge.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
5. Lectures.—Homer, Iliad (Selections), Monro, Iliad, 2
Vols., Oxford; Demosthenes, Third Olynthiac, First and Third
Philippics, Butcher, Oxford (Vol. I.).
Three hours a week. Mr. Robertson, Mr. Todd. 3 units.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.)
6. Lectures.—Aristophanes, The Birds, Hall and Geldart,
Oxford; Herodotus, History, Hude, Oxford (the equivalent of
one book will be read); Lysias, Orations (Selections), Hude, Oxford. (Open only to those who have taken or are taking Greek
3 or 5.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
7. Lectures.—Aristotle, Ars Poetica, Bywater, Oxford;
Plato, The Republic (Selections), Burnet, Oxford. (Open only
to those who have taken or are taking Greek 3 or 5.)
Three hours a week. Mr. Todd, Mr. Logan. 3 units.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.)
8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to be
taken in both Third and Fourth Years.
One lecture a week (for Third Year students); individual
conferences. Mr. Todd. 1 unit.
9. Greek History to 14 A.D.—The course will begin with a
brief survey of contributory civilizations of pre-Hellenic times
and will include a study of social and political life in the Greek 106 Faculty of Arts and Science
world during the period. Knowledge of Greek is not prerequisite.
Three hours a week. Mr. Logan. 3 units.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.)
10. Greek Literature in English Translation.—A survey of
Greek literary history from Homer to Lucian, with reading and
interpretation of selected works from the most important authors.
Knowledge of Greek is not prerequisite.
Members of the class will provide themselves with the
following books: Aeschylus, translated by Campbell, Oxford;
Sophocles, translated by Campbell, Oxford; Euripides, Two
Vols. Everyman; Aristophanes, translated by Frere, Vol. I,
(Everyman).
Two hours a week. Mr. Todd. 2 units.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.)
For those wnn wish to extend the work to 3 units additional
reading will be provided.
Latin
1. Lectures.—Cicero, Cicero and Antony, Turberville,
Oxford Press; Ovid, Elegiac Selections, Smith, Bell.
Composition.—Bradley, Arnold's Latin Prose Composition,
Longmans, to exercise 19.
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece
and Rome, Dent, Chap. I to XXXII.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Mr. Robertson, Mr. Riddehough.
A fourth hour a week will be devoted to lectures on the
History prescribed. Attendance at these lectures is voluntary
and no formal credit is given.
2. Lectures.—Virgil, Aeneid, Bk. VI, Page, Macmillan;
Cicero, Pro Archia, Nail, Macmillan; Horace Odes II, Page,
Macmillan. Classics 107
History.—Robertson and Robertson, The Story of Greece
and Rome, Dent, Chap. XXXII-LIV.
Three hours a week. Mr. Robertson, Mr. Riddehough, Mr.
Logan. 3 units.
A fourth hour a week will be devoted to lectures on the
Roman History prescribed. Attendance at these lectures is
voluntary and no formal credit is given.
3. Lectures.—Terence, Phormio, Sloman, Oxford; Virgil,
Bucolics and Georgics, Page, Macmillan.
Literature.—Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
4. Lectures.—Horace, Epistles, Wilkins, Macmillan; Cicero,
Selected Letters, Prichard & Bernard, Oxford.
Literature.—Duff, Writers of Rome, Oxford.
Three hours a week. Mr. Logan, Mr. Robertson. 3 units.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.)
5. Lectures.—Juvenal, Satires, Duff, Cambridge; Seneca,
Select Letters, Summers, Macmillan. (Open only to those who
have taken or are taking Latin 3 or 4.)
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
6. Lectures.—Tacitus, Histories I, II, Godley, Macmillan;
Garrod, Oxford Book of Latin Verse (Selections), Oxford.
(Open only to those who have taken or are taking Latin 3 or 4.)
Three hours a week. Mr. Robertson, Mr. Todd. 3 units.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.)
7. Lectures.—Roman History from 133 B.C. to 180 A.D.
Text-books: A Short History of the Roman Republic, Heit-
land, Cambridge; A History of the Roman Empire, Bury,
Murray.
A knowledge of Latin is not a prerequisite for this course.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.) 108 Faculty of Arts and Science
8. Composition.—Obligatory for Honour students; to be
taken in both Third and Fourth Years.
One lecture a week (for Third Year students); individual
conferences. Mr. Todd. 1 unit.
9. Methods in High School Latin. Spring term only. This
course is offered primarily for students in the Teacher Training
Course, and does not carry undergraduate credit. Readings to
be assigned.
Three hours a week. Mr. Robertson.
Department of Economics, Sociology and Political Science
Professor: Theodore H. Boggs.
Associate Professor: H. F. Angus.
Associate Professor:
Assistant Professor: G. F. Drummond.
Assistant: Doris E. Lazenby.
Assistant: Peter F. Palmer.
Economics
It is hoped that, in the session of 1929-1930, it will be possible to offer (particularly in the direction of commercial
studies), a wider range of courses than that described in the
Calendar.
The sudden death of Mr. Beckett at the moment of sending
the Calendar to press makes it necessary to warn students that
the courses listed below as Sociology 1, Economies 2, 5 and 8
may be altered or cancelled.
Students whose plans will be affected by these arrangements are asked to leave their names and addresses with the
Registrar so that full information can be sent to them as soon
as it is available.
1. Principles of Economics.—An introductory study of
general economic theory, including a survey of the principles of
value, prices, money and banking, international trade, tariffs,
monopoly, taxation, labour and wages, socialism, the control of
railways and trusts, etc. Economics 109
Rufener, Principles of Economics, Houghton Mifflin; The
Canada Year Book, 1928.
Economics 1 is the prerequisite for all other courses in the
department, but may be taken concurrently with Economics 2,
or Government 1. This rule may be waived in the case of
students of the Department of Nursing who may find it impossible to take both Economics 1 and Sociology 1.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
2. History of Economic Life and Economic Thought.—A
brief outline of Economic Thought, and of Economic and Social
conditions in England previous to 1776. A survey of the more
important phases of European Organization from the time of the
Middle Ages, with special reference to the Industrial Revolution,
the Progress of Agriculture, and resultant social conditions. The
development of modern Economic Thought, with a study of the
influence of Smith, Malthus, Ricardo, Mill and others; the relation between economic theory and existing economic organization, and the place of the Deductive and Historical Methods.
Toynbee, The Industrial Revolution, Longmans. Marshall
and Lyon, Our Economic Organization, Macmillan; and assigned
readings.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
3. Labour Problems and Social Reform.—A study of the rise
of the factory system and capitalistic production, and of the
more important phases of trade unionism in England, Canada,
and the United States. A critical analysis of various solutions
of the labour problem attempted and proposed; profit-sharing,
co-operation, arbitration and conciliation, scientific management,
labour legislation and socialism.
Furniss, Labor Problems, Houghton Mifflin. Carpenter,
Guild Socialism, Appleton. Simkhovitch, Marxism versus Socialism, Williams & Norgate; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Boggs. 3 units.
(Riven in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 110 Faculty op Arts and Science
4. Money and Banking.—The origin and development of
money. Banking principles and operations, laws of coinage,
credit, price movements, foreign exchange. Banking policy in
the leading countries, with particular reference to Canada.
Holdsworth, Money and Banking, Appleton. Foster and
Catchings, Money, Houghton Mifflin. Dunbar, Theory and History of Banking, Putnam, 1917. Phillips, Readings in Money
and Banking, Macmillan; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Boggs. 3 units.
5. Government Finance.—An outline course dealing with
the principles and methods of taxation, and administration of
public funds. Topics examined include: growth of taxation
methods; theories of justice in taxation; classification, increase,
economic effects, and control of expenditures; property, business, personal, commodity, and inheritance taxes, with reference
to Canada, Britain and other countries; the single tax; double
taxation; shifting, incidence and economic effects of taxation;
flotation, administration, conversion and redemption of government loans.
Lutz, Public Finance, Appleton, 1924; and assigned
readings.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
6. International Trade and Tariff Policy.—A survey of the
theory of international trade and the foreign exchanges; the
balance of trade, foreign investments and other fundamental
factors; the problem of Reparations and of War Debts; the protective tariff and commercial imperialism; the commercial policy
of the leading countries, with considerable attention to Canada.
Griffin, Principles of Foreign Trade, Macmillan. Fraser,
Foreign Trade and World Politics, A. A. Knopf. Taussig,
Selected Readings in International Trade and Tariff Problems,
Ginn; and assigned readings.
Three hours a week. Mr. Boggs. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.) Economics 111
7. Corporation Economics.—Historical development of the
different forms of industrial organization, including the partnership, joint-stock company, and the corporation, and the later
developments, such as the pool, trust, combination, and holding
company. Methods of promotion and financing, over-capitalization, stock market activities, the public policy toward corporations, etc.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week Mr. Angus. 3 units.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.)
8. Provincial and Local Finance. — A brief summary of
fundamental principles of taxation. Sources of revenue, and
tax systems of federal, and provincial and municipal governments, especially of British Columbia. War Finance and its
influences on local finance. Chief problems of provincial and
municipal finance and administration. Separation of sources of
provincial and municipal revenues. Methods of municipal supervision and control. Government debts.
Assigned readings.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.)
Agricultural Economics
1. Agricultural Economics.—The principles of Economic!
as applied to Agriculture; historical background, the agricultural problem; and some special topics, such as the agricultural
surplus, production in relation to population growth, the farm
income, and the share of Agriculture in the national income.
Taylor, Agricultural Economics, Macmillan.
References and assigned readings from Gray, Carver,
Nourse, and others.
Three lectures a week. Mr. Clement. 3 units.
2. Marketing.—The principles of Marketing as applied to
the individual farftn and to Agriculture as a whole. The general 112 Faculty of Arts and Science
principles of Marketing, the marketing of agricultural products
as compared to wholesale and retail distribution of manufactured goods, the contributions of national Farmer Movements,
co-operative marketing as illustrated by the marketing of wheat,
fruit and milk in Canada.
Brown, Marketing, Harper and Brothers; Mackintosh,
Agricultural Co-operation in Western Canada, Ryerson Press,
Toronto; references and assigned readings from Macklin, Hib-
bard, Boyle, Benton, and others.
Three lectures a week. Mr. Clement. 3 units.
Government
1. Constitutional Government.—This course deals with the
nature, origin, and aims of the State; and with the organization
of government in the British Empire, the United States of
America, France, and Germany.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units.
2. Introduction to the Study of Law.—(a) A rapid survey
of Legal History, (b) Outlines of Jujjgprudence.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units.
3. Imperial Problems.—A course on problems of government within the British Empire, to be given in alternate years
with Economics 7.
Readings to be assigned.
Government 1 is a prerequisite of this course, but may be
taken concurrently with it.
Three hours a week. Mr. Angus. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
Sociology
1. Principles of Sociology.—An introductory study of early
man and his relation to his environment; of races of men and
their distribution; of the early forms and development of Education 113
industrial organization, marriage and the family, arts and
sciences, religious systems, government, classes, rights, etc. A
review also of certain of the social problems of modern society
growing out of destitution, crime, overcrowding, etc. A critical
survey of schemes for betterment.
Blackmar & Gillin, Outlines of Sociology, Macmillan. Beach,
An Introduction to Sociology and Social Problems, Houghton-
Mifflin Company.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
Department of Education
Professor: G. M. Weir.
Associate Professor: Jennie Wyman Pilcher.
Special Lecturer: H. T. J. Coleman.
Lecturers in High School Methods: the following Heads of Departments: H. Ashton, D. Buchanan, R. H. Clark, T. C. Hebb, L.
Robertson, D. C. Harvey, G. G. Sedgewick, also W. K. Beech and
C. H. Scott of the Vancouver School staff.
Lecturers in Elementary School Methods: A. Anstey, A. R. Lord,
Miss R. E. Bassin, C. H. Scott, R. Straight, Miss E. J. Trembath.
Lecturer in Junior High School Organization and Administration:
H. B. King.
Courses in Education
-
Teacher Training Course
Candidates qualifying for the "Academic Certificate"
(given by the Provincial Department of Education, Victoria,
on the completion of the Teacher Training Course as specified
below), take the courses prescribed on Pages 115 to 117 below.
These courses are open only to graduates registered in the
Teacher Training Course.
Four Courses in Education open only to Third and Fourth
Year undergraduates in Arts, see Pages 117-119.
1. Registration
Documentary evidence of graduation in Arts or Science
from a recognized university must be submitted to the University 114 Faculty op Arts and Science
Registrar by all candidates other than graduates of The University of British Columbia. All correspondence in connection
with the Teacher Training course should be addressed to the
University Registrar, from whom registration cards may be
procured.
2. Certificates and Standing
At the close of the University session, successful candidates
in the Teacher Training Course will be recommended to the
Provincial Department of Education for the Academic Certificate, and to the Faculty of Arts and Science for the University
Diploma in Education. Successful candidates will be graded as
follows: First Class, an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second
Class, 65 to 80 per cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent.
All students registered in the Teacher Training Course at the
University are entitled to the privileges accorded to students in
the various Faculties, and are also subject to the regulations of
the University regarding discipline and attendance at lectures.
In the case of students who have completed the Teacher
Training Course, First or Second Class standing in each of
(1) History and Principles of Education, and in (2) Educational Psychology is accepted as equivalent to a Minor for an
M.A. degree, subject in each case to the consent of the Head of
the Department in which the student wishes to take his Major.
3. Preparatory Courses in Arts and Science
For the season 1929-30 candidates will not be admitted to
courses in High School Methods unless they shall have obtained
at least six units of credit in the corresponding academic courses
normally offered in the Third and Fourth Years. After 1930
the prerequisite will be nine units. Special cases will be considered on their merits by the Head of the Department concerned and the Professor of Education. (The academic courses
referred to above are English, History, Mathematics, etc., and
not Courses in Education.) Education 115
4. Courses Offered
A. Throughout the University Session.
(1) Educational Psychology:
Text: Gates, Psychology for Students of Education,
Macmillan.
References: Pillsbury, Education as a Psychologist Sees
It, Macmillan; Thomson, Instinct, Intelligence and Character, Longman; Burnham, The Normal Mind, Appleton.
Prerequisite: Philosophy 1, or its equivalent—obligatory from 1929.
(2) School Administration and Law:
Texts: Sears, Classroom Organization and Control
(Revised Edition), Houghton Mifflin. Manual of School
Law, British Columbia. Foster, High School Administration, The Century Co.
References: Cubberley, Public School Administration,
Houghton, Mifflin; Cubberley, The Principal and His
School, Houghton, Mifflin; Perry, The Management of a
City School, Macmillan (Revised Edition); Davis, Junior
High School Education, World Book Company; Johnson,
Administration and Supervision of the High School, Ginn &
Co.; Report of the School Survey Commission, British Columbia; Fifth Year book of the Department of Superintendence; Assigned readings.
(3) History and Principles of Education:
(a) Educational leaders and movements with special
reference to the period since 1800.
(») Educational systems:—Canada with special reference to British Columbia; England; France; Germany ; the United States.
Texts: Cubberley, A Brief History of Education,
Houghton Mifflin. Chapman and Counts, Principles of
Education, Houghton Mifflin. Reisner, Nationalism and
Education Since 1789, Macmillan. 116 Faculty of Arts and Science
References: Williams and Rice, Principles of Secondary Education, Ginn & Co.; Birchenough, History of
Elementary Education in England and Wales, University
Tutorial Press; Sandiford, Comparative Education, J. M.
Dent; Balfour, Educational Systems of Great Britain and
Ireland, Oxford; Farrington, Public Primary School System
of France, Columbia University; Kandel, The Reform of
Secondary Education in France, Columbia University;
Alexander, The Prussian Elementary Schools, Macmillan;
Kandel, Twenty-five Years of American Education, Macmillan; Cubberley, Readings in the History of Education,
Houghton Mifflin; Frasier and Armentrout, An Introduction to Education (Revised Edition), Scott, Foresman & Co.
(4) Interpretation and Construction of Educational
Tests and Measurements.
Text: Hines, A Guide to Educational Measurements,
Houghton Mifflin. ^m
References: Pintner, Intelligence Testing, Holt; Monroe, DeVoss and Kelly, Educational Measurements, Houghton Mifflin; Williams, Graphic Methods in Education,
Houghton Mifflin; Otis, Statistical Measurement, World
Book Co.; Ruch, Improvement of the Written Examination,
Scott Foresman & Co.; Ruch and Stoddard, Tests and
Measurements in High School Instruction, World Book Co.
The above courses are obligatory for all students.
B. During the First Term.
From the three courses listed below candidates will
select at least six hours of work a week.
(1) Psychology of the Elementary School Subjects.
Texts: Reed, Psychology of Elementary School Subjects, Ginn & Co.; Stone, Silent and Oral Reading, Houghton
Mifflin; Cameron, Educational Psychology, The Century
Co.
References: Freeman, Psychology of the Common
Branches, Houghton Mifflin; Stormzand, Progressive Education 117
Methods of Teaching, Houghton Mifflin; Charters, Teaching
the Common Branches, Houghton Mifflin.
Assigned readings from the Year Books and Educational Journals.
(2) Methods in Elementary School Subjects:
Assigned Readings.
(3) Junior High School Organization and Administration: Assigned Readings.
C. During the Second Term.
(1) Methods in High School Subjects:
Text: Judd, Psychology of Secondary Education,
Ginn & Co.
References: Douglass, Modern Methods in High School
Teaching, Houghton Mifflin Co. |
Assigned Readings.
Methods Courses in the following high school subjects are
offered: English, History, Latin, French, Mathematics, Physics,
Chemistry. Two courses are obligatory (for teaching and examination purposes), while one course may be attended as an
auditor. Nine hours a week.
5. Observation Assignments and Practice Teaching
1. First Term: At least forty (40) hours in the elementary schools of the Province. Obligatory for all students.
2. Second Term: At least sixty (60) hours in the high
schools of the Province. Obligatory for all students.
6. Courses in Education for Third and Fourth Year
Undergraduates in Arts
Undergraduates who intend to register in the Teacher Training Course are advised to take six units in Education for credit
towards the B.A. degree.
1. Introduction to the Study of Education.—This course
is intended to serve as an introduction to the formal study of
education. The following topics, among others, will be discussed: 118 Faculty op Arts and Science
Significant phases of educational development in Eastern
Canada and British Columbia; Section 93, B.N. A. Act—legal
and social implications; present-day educational problems;
recent educational developments, such as scientific school supervision, use of tests and measurements, problems of curriculum
reconstruction, principles of educational finance; a general study
of the philosophy of the educational process—the knowledge-as-
power conception, the disciplinary conception, etc., the learning
process, the teaching process, etc.; problems in educational sociology—social relations of the school, problems of rural education, rural-school types and problems of reorganization, adult
vocational and extension education; educational and vocational
guidance; comparative survey of outstanding educational
developments in Europe and America in the last half century.
An attempt will be made to familiarize the student with current
tendencies in educational theory and practice and critically to
examine the sociological, economic, and philosophic background
of these tendencies.
Text: Cubberley, Introduction to the Study of Education,
Houghton Mifflin.
References: Judd, Introduction to the Scientific Study of
Education, Ginn & Co.; Smith, Principles of Educational Sociology, Houghton Mifflin. Readings from the Yearbooks, School
Surveys and Educational Journals. 3 units.
2. Elementary Educational Psychology.—An introductory
survey of the field of psychology as applied to education. A
study of the literature on the learning process, formal discipline,
transfer of training, work and fatigue and of individual differences in relation to heredity and environment.
Texts and references to be assigned. 3 units.
3. History and Principles of Education (not offered in
1929-1930).
Note: Courses in Education for undergradutes in Arts of
the Third and Fourth Years are preparatory to the Teacher English 119
Training Course, and do not exempt candidates from any of the
work prescribed for the latter course.
The following conditions apply to courses in Education:
(a) Not more than six units in Education may be taken
for credit towards the B.A. degree.
(b) An undergraduate with special qualifications may
(on the recommendation of the Faculty) be allowed
to substitute an advanced course in Education (of
similar content) for one of the courses mentioned
above.
(c) Until the work of the First and Second Years has
been completed, courses in Education are not open
(for credit) to undergraduates.
Department of English
Professor: G. G. Sedgewick.
Professor: W. L. MacDonald.
Associate Professor: F. G. C. Wood.
Associate Professor: Thorleif Larsen.
(On leave of absence, 1929-30)
Associate Professor: F. C. Walker.
Assistant Professor: M. L. Bollert.
Assistant Professor: Frank H. Wilcox.
Assistant Professor: Philip A. Child.
Assistant: Dorothy Blakey.
Assistant: M. Dorothy Mawdsley.
First Year
1. (a) Literature. — Elementary study of a number of
literary forms to be chosen from the short story, the play, the
novel, the essay, the simpler sorts of poetry.
Texts for 1929-30: A book of short stories to be selected.
Euripides, Bacchae, in Gilbert Murray's paraphrase. Shakespeare, Julius Caesar. Sheridan, The School for Scandal, Everyman. Ibsen, The Doll's House, Everyman. The Golden Book
of Modern English Poetry, Dent.
Two hours a week. 120 Faculty of Arts and Science
(b) Composition. — Elementary forms and principles of
composition.
Two hours a week. 3 units.
The work in composition consists of (i) themes and class
exercises, and (ii) of written examinations. Students will be
required to make a passing mark in each of these two parts of
the work.
Second Year
2. (a) Literature. — Studies in the history of English
Literature.
Lectures and texts illustrative of the chief authors and
movements from Tottel's Miscellany to Shelley. Neilson and
Thorndike, A History of English Literature, Macmillan.
Two hours a week.
(b) Composition.—Narrative and descriptive themes; the
writing of reports.
One hour a week. 3 units.
(c) Literature.—Readings from Nineteenth Century poetry
since 1830.
For this course, which is intended for prospective Honour
students in English and for others especially interested in the
study of Literature, no formal credit is given.
One hour a week.
Third and Fourth Years
The curriculum in English for students of the Third and
Fourth Years is arranged in three divisions. The first includes a
central body of general courses which will be offered, as far as
possible, every year, and to each of which are assigned 3 units
of credit. In the second division are listed courses carrying 2
units of credit and usually given in alternate years. And the
third consists of courses designed especially for Honour and
Graduate students, and open to others only by special permission. English 121
Division I
9. Shakespeare.—This course may be taken for credit in two
successive years. In 1929-30, 9 (a) will be given as follows:
i. A detailed study of the text of Romeo and Juliet,
Twelfth Night, Hamlet, The Winter's Tale.
ii. Lectures on Shakespeare's development, on his use
of sources, and on his relation to the stage and the
dramatic practice of his time.
Students will provide themselves with annotated editions of
the four plays named above, and with The Facts about Shakespeare, by Neilson and Thorndike, Macmillan. They are advised
to get the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed. Neilson, or the Oxford
Shakespeare, ed. Craig.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units.
9 (b) (Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
10. The Drama to 1642.—The course begins with a study of
the Theban plays of Sophocles and of Aristotle's Theory of
Tragedy. The main subject of the course is Elizabethan Drama:
(1) its beginnings in the Miracle and Morality Plays and in
the Interludes; (2) its development in Shakespeare's predecessors—Lyly, Peele, Greene, Kyd, and Marlowe; (3) its culmination in Shakespeare; (4) and its decline in Jonson, Beau-
mlont and Fletcher, Middleton, Webster, Massinger, Shirley,
and Ford.
Texts: Lewis Campbell, Sophocles in English Verse,
World's Classics, Oxford. Everyman and Other Interludes,
Dent. Chief Elizabethan Dramatists, ed. Neilson. Shakespeare,
ed. Craig, Oxford, or the Cambridge Shakespeare, ed. Neilson.
Three hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 3 units.
13. The English Novel from Richardson to the Present Time.
—The development of English fiction will be traced from Richardson, Fielding, Smollett, and Sterne through Goldsmith, Mrs.
Radcliffe, Jane Austen, Scott, C. Bronte, Dickens, Thackeray,
and George Eliot to Trollope, Meredith, Stevenson, Hardy, and
a few representative novelists now living. 122 Faculty op Arts and Science
A fair knowledge of the works of Jane Austen, Scott,
Dickens, Thackeray, and George Eliot is a prerequisite for those
taking this course.
Three hours a week. Mr. Wood. 3 units.
14. Eighteenth Century Literature.—This course aims to
give a view, as comprehensive as possible, of the main currents
of English thought and literature during the period 1660-1800.
From year to year various periods will be stressed and the work
of various writers emphasized. Generally speaking, the course is
mainly concerned with the work of such men as Dryden, Pope,
Swift, Addison, Steele, Johnson, Goldsmith, Burke and Burns.
Three hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 3 units.
16. Romantic Poetry, 1780 to 1830.—Studies in the beginnings and progress of Romanticism, based chiefly on the work of
Wordsworth, Coleridge, Byron, Keats, Shelley, Scott.
Texts: The Oxford editions of the first five poets named.
For reference: Elton, A Survey of English Literature,
1780-1830.
Three hours a week. Mr. Walker. 3 units.
17. Victorian Poetry.—This course is concerned chiefly with
the work of Tennyson, Browning, and Arnold. A few weeks
at the close of the term will be devoted to a survey of the
development of later poetry down to the work of Hardy.
Texts: Browning, Complete Poetical Works, Cambridge
Edition. Arnold, Poems, Oxford Edition. Tennyson, Poems,
Globe Edition. Page, British Poets of the Nineteenth Century,
Sanborn.
For reference: Elton, A Survey of English Literature,
1830-1880.
Three hours a week. Mr. Wilcox. 3 units.
19. Contemporary Literature.—Some tendencies of English
Literature of the last generation, in poetry and the essay and
the novel, will be studied in this course.
Three hours a week. 3 units. English 123
25 (a) Private Reading.—Students who are candidates for
an Honours degree in English may elect a course of private
reading in their Junior Year. 3 units.
25 (b) Private Reading.—Students of the Senior Year
may pursue, with the consent and under the direction of the
Department, a course of private reading. In such courses examinations will be set, but no class instruction will be given.
3 units.
Division II
5. The Elements of Poetics.—Studies in the criticism and
appreciation of poetry; the poetic frame of mind; the emotional
element in poetry; poetic content and the nature of poetic truth;
poetic form and its varieties; metrics; contemporary developments in poetry; literary criticism, its nature and function; and
an outline of aesthetic theory from Aristotle to Croce.
Winchester, Principles of Literary Criticism.
Two hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 2 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
6. Narrative Writing.—A study of narrative composition:
(a) critical reading of a considerable number of modern short
stories and of two or three modern novels; (6) frequent critical
and narrative themes.
Only a limited number of students will be admitted to this
course.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Not given in 1929-30.)
7. Technique of the Drama.—A practical study of dramatic
form and structure based on the analysis of modern plays, with
special reference to the one-act play as an art form. Playmaking,
by Wm. Archer, and Representative One-act Plays by British
and Irish Authors, Little, Brown, are the texts used in this
course.
Two hours a week. Mr. Wood. 2 units.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) 124 Faculty of Arts and Science
8. English Poetry, exclusive of the Drama, from the death
of Chaucer to 1649.—(1) The Renaissance; (2) the Fifteenth
Century; (3) the Scottish Chaucerians; (4) John Skelton and
the poets of the Transition; (5) the Elizabethan Lyric; (6) the
Sonneteers; (7) Spenser and the Spenserians; (8) the Jacobean
Poets; (9) the Caroline Poets;. (10) the Theory of Poetry
throughout the period.
Texts: Ward, The English Poets, Vol. I. Spenser, ed.
Smith and de Selincourt, Oxford.
Two hours a week. Mr. Larsen. 2 units.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.)
11. English Drama since 1600.—A survey of English drama
from the time of Ben Jonson to the present. Later Elizabethan
drama, representative plays of the Restoration, the works of
Goldsmith, Sheridan, and of early Nineteenth Century writers
will be considered. There will follow a study of some dramatists
©f recent years, including Wilde, Shaw, Galsworthy, Pinero,
Jones, Stephen Phillips, Barrie, and the Irish School.
Two hours a week. Mr. Wood. 2 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
12. Narrative Poetry. — Discussion of the types,—epic,
ballad, and romance—with readings, in suitable translations or
modern versions where desirable; modern ballads and metrical
romances represented by the work of Scott, Tennyson, Morris,
Masefield and others.
Two hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 2 unite.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.)
15. American Literature.—A survey of the principal writers
of this continent during the Nineteenth Century.
Texts: Broadus, A Book of Canadian Prose and Verse,
Oxford. Foerster, American Prose and Poetry, Houghton,
Mifflin.
Two hours a week. Mr. Wilcox. 2 units.
(Given in 1929-30.) English 125
18. Social, literary, religious and scientific movements of
the Victorian period.—Carlyle, Ruskin, Macaulay, Newman,
Darwin, Mill, Arnold, Butler, Stevenson.
Two hours a week. Mr. MacDonald. 2 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
Division III
20. Chaucer and Middle English.— (a) Middle English
grammar with the reading of representative texts. (6) The
Canterbury Tales.
Texts: A Middle English reader and the Oxford Chaucer,
ed. Skeat.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
21a. Anglo-Saxon.—Moore & Knott, The Elements of Old
English, George Wahr. Bright, Anglo-Saxon Reader, Henry
Holt.
Two hours a week. Mr. Walker. 2 units.
21b. Anglo-Saxon.—Beowulf.
Two hours a week. Second Term. Mr. Walker. 1 unit.
22. Studies in Linguistic History. — Origins, growth, and
development of the English language. A brief introduction to
Germanic philology; the Indo - European language group;
Grimm's Law; the Anglo-Saxon period; Norman, French, and
Latin influences; study of the gradual evolution of forms, sounds,
and meanings.
Two hours a week. First Term. Mr. Walker. 1 unit.
24. Seminar.—In this class advanced students will get practice in some of the simpler methods of criticism and investigation.
The subject for 1930-31 will probably be some questions in
Shakespeare text and criticism.
Two hours a week. Mr. Sedgewick. 2 units. 126 Faculty of Arts and Science
Department of Geology and Geography
Professor: R. W. Brock.
Professor of Physical and Structural Geology: S. J. Schofield.
Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy: M. Y. Williams.
Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrology: T. C. Phemister.
1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction
to the science of Geology. The following subjects are treated in
the lectures and laboratory:
(a) Physical Geology, including weathering, the work of
the wind, ground water, streams, glaciers and the ocean, the
structure of the earth, earthquakes, volcanoes and igneous intrusions, metamorphism, mountains and plateaus, and ore-deposits.
Two lectures per week, First Term. Mr. Schofield.
(b) Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology, including
•the study and identification of the most comlmon minerals and
rocks, the interpretation of topographical and geological maps,
and the study of structures by the use of models.
Two hours laboratory per week, First Term. Mr. Schofield.
(c) Historical Geology, including the earth before the Cambrian, the Palaeozoic, the Mesozoic, the Cenozoic and Quarter-
nary eras.
Two lectures per week, Second Term. Mr. Williams.
(d) Laboratory Exercises in Historical Geology, consisting
of the general study of fossils, their characteristics and associations, their evolution and migration as illustrated by their
occurrence in the strata. The principles of Palaeogeography will
be taken up and illustrated by the study of palaeogeography of
North America.
Two hours laboratory per week, Second Term. Mr. Williams.
Field Work will replace laboratory occasionally, and will
take the form of excursions to localities, in the immediate neighborhood of Vancouver, which illustrate the subject matter of the
lectures.
Prerequisite: Matriculation Chemistry or Physics, or Chemistry 1 or Physics 1, taken either before or concurrently. Geology 127
Text-book: Pirsson and Schuchert, Introductory Geology,
Wiley.
Reference Books: Geikie, Text-book of Geology. Merrill,
Rocks, Rock-Weathering and Soils. Coleman and Parks, Elementary Geology. Shimer, Introduction to the Study of Fossils.
Davis, Geographical Essays. Hugh Miller's works.
Students will be required to make a passing mark in each
of the above subdivisions. 3 units.
2. (a) General Mineralogy.—A brief survey of the field of
Mineralogy.
Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1) Crystallography, (2) Physical Mineralogy, and (3) Descriptive
Mineralogy of 40 of the most common mineral species, with
special reference to Canadian occurrences.
Laboratory Work consists of the study of the common
crystal forms and of 40 prescribed minerals, accompanied by a
brief outline of the principles and methods of Determinative
Mineralogy and Blowpipe Analysis.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
Wiley. §j
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week, First
Term. Mr. Phemister. IV2 units.
2. (6) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy. — This
course supplements 2(a) and consists of a more complete survey
of Crystallography, Physical and Chemical Mineralogy, with a
critical study of about 50 of the less common minerals, special
emphasis being laid on their crystallography, origin, association
and alteration.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
Wiley.
Prerequisite: Geology 2(a).
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week, Second
Term. Mr. Phemister. IV2 units. 128 Faculty op Arts and Science
3. Historical Geology.—Continental evolution and development of life with special reference to North America.
Text-book: Schuchert, Historical Geology, 2nd Ed., Wiley.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three hours per week, First Term. Mr. Williams.
iy2 units.
4. Structural and Physiographicdl Geology.—The following
subjects are treated in the lectures: Fractures, faults, flowage,
structures common to both fracture and flow, mountains, major
units of structure, forces of deformation, the origin and development of land forms with special reference to the physiography
of British Columbia.
Text-book: Leith, Structural Geology, 2nd Ed., Holt.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three hours per week, Second Term. Mr. Schofield.
iy2 units.
5. (a) History of Geology.—A brief history of the study
of the earth and the development of the geological sciences.
Mr. Brock.
(b) Geology of Canada.—The salient features of the geology
and economic minerals of Canada. Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield,
Mr. Brock. ^
(c) Regional Geology.—The main geological features of the
continents and oceanic segments of the earth's crust, and their
influences upon life. Mr. Brock.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures and one hour laboratory per week. 3 units.
6. Palaeontology.—A study of invertebrate and vertebrate
fossils, their classification, identification and distribution both
geological and geographical.
Reference books: Grabau and Shimer, North American
Index Fossils. Zittel-Eastman, Text-book of Palaeontology.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week.
Mr. Williams. 3 units. Geology 129
7. Petrology.—This course consists of systematic studies of
(i) optical mineralogy and (ii) petrography, with an introduction to petrogenesis.
The laboratory work deals with the determination of rocks,
first under the microscope, and then in hand specimen.
Text-books: Pirsson, Rocks and Rock Minerals, Wiley.
Johannsen, Essentials for the Microscopical Determination of
Rock-forming Minerals and Rocks, University of Chicago Press.
Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley.
Reference works: Johannsen, Manual of Petrographic
Methods. Rosenbusch, Microscopical Physiography of the Rock-
making Minerals, translated by Iddings. Rosenbusch, Elemente
der Gesteinslehre. Harker, Petrology for Students. Gruben-
mann, Die Kristallinen Schiefer.
Prerequisites: Geology 1 and 2. j
Two lectures and two laboratory periods of 2 hours per
week. Mr. Phemister. 4 units.
8. Economic Geology.—A study of the occurrence, genesis,
and structure of the principal metallic and non-metallic mineral
deposits with type illustrations; and a description of the ore
deposits of the British Empire, special stress being placed on
those in Canada.
Text-book: Emmons, General Economic Geology, McGraw-
Hill.
Reference books: Lindgren, Mineral Deposits (2nd edition).
Ries, Economic Geology.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 7 must precede or accompany this course.
Four hours per week. Mr. Brock, Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield, Mr. Phemister. 4 units.
9. Mineralography.—Principally a laboratory course dealing
with the study and recognition of the opaque minerals by means
of the reflecting microscope.
The work consists of practice in the cutting, grinding and
polishing of ore specimens, accompanied by training in miero-
chemical methods of mineral determination. 130 Faculty of Arts and Science
During the second term each student is assigned a suite
of ores from some mining district for a critical examination and
report.
Text-book: Davy and Farnham, Microscopic Examination of
the Ore Minerals, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Geology 7 and 8 must precede or accompany
this course.
Two hours laboratory per week. Mr. Phemister. 1 unit.
10. Field Geology.—The methods taught are the fundamental ones used by professional geologists and by the officers
of the Geological Survey of Canada. The course is essentially
practical, and is designed to teach methods of observing, recording and correlating geological facts in the field. The students
construct geological maps of selected areas in the vicinity of
Vancouver which require the use of the various methods and
instruments employed in field geology.
Reference books: Lahee, Field Geology. Hayes, Handbook
for Field Geologists. Spurr, Geology Applied to Mining.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 4, if not already taken,
must be taken concurrently.
Three hours per week. Mr. Schofield. iy2 units.
12. Meteorology and Climatology.—A course covering in a
general way the whole field, with practice in using instruments,
constructing and using weather charts, and weather predicting.
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per
week. Second Term. Mr. Schofield. iy2 units.
14. Crystallography.—This course consists of a systematic
study of the morphology of crystals, with an introduction to
mathematical crystallography.
The practical work deals with the measurement of crystals
and, in the case of students in chemistry, a certain number of
the crystals measured will be grown in the laboratory.
Students are advised to consult with the instructor before
registering for this course. History 131
Text-book: Tutton, Crystallography and Practical Crystal
Measurement, Macmillan.
Two lectures and six hours laboratory work per week.
Mr. Phemister. 5 units.
Geography
1. Principles of Geography. — A general course dealing
especially with the effects of the physical features of the earth
upon life, and the ways in which various forms of life respond
to their physical environment. The following topics are studied:
earth relations; earth features; climate and climatic factors;
oceans; materials of the land and their uses; changes of the
earth's surface; coasts, plains, plateaus, mountains, inland
waters, and their relations to life; human geography.
Text-book: Salisbury, Barrows and Tower, Elements of
Geography, Holt.
Three lectures per week. Mr. Brock and Mr. Schofield.
3 units.
10. Introduction to Geography.—A brief introduction to
the study of modern Geography, outlining the history and
content of the subject, physical geography and human geography.
For nurses only.
One lecture a week. Mr. Brock and Mr. Schofield. 1 unit.
Department of History
Professor: D. C. Harvey.
Professor: W. N. Sage.
Assistant Professor: F. H. Soward.
Assistant Professor: A. C. Cooke.
Assistant: Francis Painter.
Assistant: Sylvia Thrupp.
Students who intend to specialize in History are advised to
study one or more modern languages. A reading knowledge
of French, at least, will be required for Honours. 132 Faculty of Arts and Science
First and Second Years
1. Main Currents in Modern History.—Intended primarily
for First Year students and dealing with the following subjects:
The waning of the Middle Ages; Consolidation of Monarchy in
France, Spain, and England; the Peace of Westphalia and the
Emergence of the European States System; the Balance of
Power; Rise of Russia and Prussia; the Revolutionary and
Napoleonic Era; the Industrial Revolution; Growth of Democracy and Nationality; the Eastern Question; Expansion of
Europe; the Awakening of the Far East; Armed Peace (1870-
1914); World War; the Russian Revolution; the League of
Nations and Post-war Problems.
Text-books: Higby, History of Europe (1492-1815) ;
Schapiro, Modern and Contemporary European History, or
Hayes, Political and Social History of Modern Europe, Vol. II,
1815-1924.
Essays will be assigned throughout the session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Soward. 3 units.
2. (a) Outlines of Canadian History.—Discovery and exploration; geographic and institutional background of French
and English colonies; relations with the Indians in the fur-
trade; conflict and British supremacy; French and British in
Canada; effects of American Revolution; representative institutions; achievement of Responsible ^Government; Confederation;
Canadian-American relations; Imperial relations; in the stream
of world polities; growth of literature and the arts.
(b) The History of British Columbia.—Early explorations
of Spaniards and Russians; Captains Cook and Vancouver;
Maritime Fur-trade; MacKenzie, Fraser, Thompson; North-
West Company in New Caledonia; Hudson's Bay Company in
"Old Oregon"; Colonies of Vancouver Island and British
Columbia; Gold Rush of 1858; work of the Royal Engineers;
Cariboo; Confederation; development of the Province of British
Columbia. History 133
A preliminary essay counting 10 per cent, of the year's
work must be submitted early in the autumn term. Subject:
The Causes of European Expansion or Joseph Howe and
Responsible Government.
Text-books: Lucas, New France; Skelton, The Canadian
Dominion; Borden, Canadian Constitutional Studies; Howay,
British Columbia, the Making of a Province; Sage, Sir James
Douglas and British Columbia; Sage, Outline of British Columbia History.
Reading and reference: Eastman, Church and State in
New France; Brebner, Acadia, New England's Outpost; Abbe
Groulx, La Naissance d'une Race; Chapais, Cours d'hjstoire;
Egerton, History of Canada; Trotter, Federation of Canada;
Keenleyside, American-Canadian Relations; Howay and Schole-
field, British Columbia, Vol. I and II; Denton, The Far West
Coast; The Chronicles of Canada; The Makers of Canada,
Canada and Its Provinces.
Three hours a week. Mr. Harvey and Mr. Sage. 3 units.
4. Mediaeval History.—A sketch of Mediaeval History from
the Council of Nicaea to the Fall of Constantinople. The following subjects will be discussed: The triumph of Christianity;
the breakdown of the Western Roman Empire; the Barbarian
Invasions; the earlier monastic movements; Mohammed and
Islam; the rise of the Papacy; the Franks and Charlemagne;
the struggle between Empire and Papacy; the Normans in
Europe; the Crusades; the Mediaeval Towns; the later monastic
movements; the rise of the Universities; Frederick II; the later
Mediaeval Empire; the national kingdoms in France, Spain and
England; the Turks and the Byzantine Empire.
A preliminary essay counting 10 per cent, of the year's
work must be submitted early in the autumn term. Subject:
The Causes of the Downfall of the Western Roman Empire or
The Rise of the Frankish Empire.
Text-book: Munro and Sontag, The Middle Ages, or Thorn-
dike, A History of Mediaeval Europe. 134 Faculty of Arts and Science
Additional reading: Oman, The Dark Ages; Tout, Empire
and Papacy; Lodge, The Close of the Middle Ages; Bryce, The
Holy Roman Empire.
This course is intended primarily for Second Year students
who hope to specialize in history.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. 3 units.
Third and Fourth Years
History 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14 are intended for Third Year
students; History 15, 19 and 20 for Fourth Year. History 10
must be taken by all candidates for Honours.
All Honours students (whether in History alone or in a
combined course), must take the History seminars in their
Third and Fourth Years. The Seminar is offered as a training
in intensive work and carries no credits.
If the graduating essay be written in History it will count
as 3 units.
10. English History to the Act of Settlement.—The political
aptitudes and institutions of the Anglo-Saxons; relations of
Church and State; royal supremacy under Normans and Ange-
vins; the Great Charter; the evolution of Parliament; the
Lancastrian experiment; the New Monarchy; the National
Church; struggle between King and Parliament; the Puritan
Rebellion; the Commonwealth; the Revolution Settlement; the
bginnings of party and cabinet government.
A preliminary essay counting 15 per cent, of the year's
work must be submitted early in the autumn term. Subject:
Feudalism in England, or The Rise of the English Towns.
Text-book: Trevelyan, A History of England; Davis, England under the Normans and Angevins; Trevelyan, England
under the Stuarts.
Reading and reference: Stubbs, Constitutional History of
England; McKechnie, Magna Charta; Pollard, The Evolution
of Parliament; Stubbs, Select Charters; Prothero, Statutes and
Constitutional Documents; Gardiner, Constitutional Documents
of the Puritan Revolution; Robertson, Select Statutes, Cases and History 135
Documents; and the standard series published by Longman and
Methuen.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sage and Mr. Harvey. 3 units.
11. British Expansion Overseas.—General aspects of the
expansion of Europe; early English discoverers and navigators;
early trading companies; English Settlements in America; the
Old Colonial System; the duel with France in India and North
America; the American Revolution; colonization of Australasia
Dutch and British in South Africa; British North America
Responsible Government; Colonial and Imperial Conferences
India under the Company and Crown; India under the Dyarchy
Crown Colonies, Chartered Companies; Protectorates, and Mandates; The British Commonwealth of Nations.
Essay subjects will be assigned at the beginning of the
autumn term.
Text-books: Muir, A Short History of the British Commonwealth; Robinson, The Development of the British Empire;
Egerton, Origin and Growth of Greater Britain; Scott, A Short
History of Australia; Lyall, British Dominion in India; Walker,
A History of South Africa.
Reading and reference: Bolton, A History of the Americas;
Osgdode, The American Colonies in the llth Century, in the
18th Century; Rusden, A History of Australia; Marais, The
Colonization of New Zealand; Theal, History of South Africa;
Williams, Cecil Rhodes; Innes, A Short History of the British
in India.
Three hours a week. Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
12. History of the United States of America.—This course
begins with a sketch of the American colonies at the outbreak
of the Revolution and traces the history of the United States
from the commencement of the War of Independence to the close
of the World War.
Text-books: Pease, The United States; Pease and Roberts,
Selected Readings in American History. 136 Faculty of Arts and Science
Reading and reference: Morison, Oxford History of the
United States; Turner, The Frontier in American History;
Lingley, Since the Civil War; Faulkner, American Economic
History; The American Nation Series; The Chronicles of
America; The Riverside History of the United States; and the
Histories by Rhodes and Channing.
A preliminary essay counting 15 per cent, of the year's
work must be submitted early in the autumn term. Subject:
Jefferson and Jackson, or The Origin and Development of the
Monroe Doctrine.
Three hours a week. Mr. Soward. 3 units.
13. The Age of the Renaissance and Reformation.—The
transition from the Mediaeval to the Modern world; the forerunners of the Renaissance, the Renaissance in Italy and
throughout Europe; the Reformation; the Counter-reformation;
the struggle for mastery; the peace of Westphalia.
Essay subjects will be announced at the beginning of the
autumn term.
Text-books: Hudson, The Story of the Renaissance; Johnson, Europe in the l&th Century; Fisher, The Reformation;
Froude, Life and Letters of Erasmus; Smith, Martin Luther.
Reading and reference: Symonds, The Renaissance in Italy;
Andre Michel, Historie de I'Art (iii. iv.); Christopher Hare,
Life and Letters in the Italian Renaissance; Smith, Erasmus;
Walker, The Reformation.
Three hours a week. Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
14. The Age of Louis XIV; The Revolutionary and Napoleonic Era.—The establishment of absolutism; its strength,
weaknesses, and decline; the converging movements of the 18th
Century; the "philosophers"; the Revolution; Napoleon; the
Congress of Vienna.
A preliminary essay counting 15 per cent, of the year's
work must be submitted early in the autumn term. Subject:
The Foreign Policy of Louis XIV, or France and the New World
in the 17 Century. History 137
Text-books: Wakeman, The Ascendancy of France; Lowell,
The Eve of the French Revolution; Rose, The Revolutionary
and Napoleonic Era; Bradby, The French Revolution; Fisher,
Napoleon.
Reading and reference: Young, Travels in France; Rousseau, Social Contract; Burke, Reflexions on the French Revolution; Taine, L'ancien regime; Aulard, The French Revolution;
Lacour-Gayet, or Rose, or Fournier,, Napoleon; Fisher, Bona-
partism.
Three hours a week. Mr. Harvey and Mr. Cooke. 3 units.
15. Europe, 1815-1919.-—The political, social and economic
history of the chief countries of continental Europe, with
especial attention to international relations.
An introductory essay counting 15 per cent, of the year's
work must be submitted early in the autumn term. Subject:
Geographic Factors in European History of the l§th Century
or The Growth of Democracy, 1815-1914.
Text-book: Hazen, Europe Since 1815.
Additional reading required of Honours students: Gooch,
History of Modern Europe, 1878-1919; Fueter, World History,
1815-1920; Moon, Imperialism and World Politics; Knight,
Barnes and Flugel, Economic History of Europe in Modern
Times.
Reading and reference: Cambridge Modern History;
Lavisse et Rambaud, Histoire Generate; Buell, International
Relations; Tilley, Modern France; Rambaud, Histoire de la
Civilisation Francaise; Grant Robertson, Bismarck; Thayer,
Cavour; Gooch, Germany; Makeef, Russia; Toynbee, Turkey;
The Balkans; Wright, The Geographic Basis of European History; Marvin, Century of Hope and the Unity Series; Fay, The
Origins of the World War; Dickinson, The International
Anarchy.
Three hours a week. Mr. Soward. 3 units. 138 Faculty op Arts and Science
19. Great Britain Since 1688.—This course aims at an
interpretation of the constitutional, political, economic and
religious development of the British Isles since 1688.
A preliminary essay counting 15 per cent, of the year's
work must be submitted early in the autumn term. Subject:
The War Policy of William Pitt the Younger, or The Irish
Question in the Nineteenth Century, or The Social Effects of
the Industrial Revolution.
Text-books: Grant Robertson, England Under the Hanoverians; Slater, The Making of Modern England; Trevelyan,
British History in the Nineteenth Century.
Reading and reference: Cambridge Modern History
(V-XII); Cambridge History of British Foreign Policy; Poole
and Hunt, The Political History of England; Mantoux, The
Industrial Revolution; Williams, Life of Chatham; Morley,
Life of Gladstone; Moneypenny and Buckle, Life1 of Disraeli.
Three hours a week. Mr. Sage. 3 units.
20. The Evolution of Canadian Self-government.—A survey of the period from the Peace of Utrecht to the present day.
The following subjects will be dealt with: French and British
Colonial Systems; British experience in Acadia; British policy
after the Treaty of Paris; The Quebec Act; the effect of the
American Revolution; the Constitutional Act; the opening of
the West; the War of 1812; the formation of parties and the
struggle for Reform; Durham's Report; the achievement of
Responsible Government; Confederation and the completion of
the Dominion; the development of Responsible Government and
the growth of nationhood.
Text-books: Martin, Empire and Commonwealth; Kennedy,
The Constitution of Canada; Kennedy, Documents of the Canadian Constitution.
Reading and reference: Egerton and Grant, Canadian
Constitutional Development; Shortt and Doughty, Constitutional Documents, 1759-1791; Doughty and McArthur, Documents, 1791-1918; Oliver, The Canadian North-West; Durham, Mathematics 139
Report; Pope, Confederation Documents; Whelan, The Union
of the British Provinces; Confederation Debates; Chisholm,
Speeches and Public Letters of Joseph Howe; Keith, Responsible Government in the Dominions; Morison, British Supremacy and Canadian Self-government; Toynbee, The Conduct of
British Empire Foreign Relations Since the Peace Settlement;
Corbett and Smith, Canada and World Politics; Borden, Canada
in the Commonwealth; The Chronicles of Canada; The Makers
of Canada; Canada and Its Provinces.
Essays will be assigned throughout the Session.
Three hours a week. Mr. Harvey. 3 units.
21. Methods in High School History.—This course is offered
primarily for students in the Teacher Training Course and does
not carry undergraduate credit.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week in Spring term only.
Honours Seminar:
(a) Third Year: Historical Method.
(b) Fourth Year: The Quebec Act and The Constitutional Act.
Department of Mathematics
Professor: Daniel Buchanan.
Professor: F. S. Nowlan.
Associate Professor: G. E. Robinson.
Associate Professor: E. E. Jordan.
Associate Professor: L. Richardson.
Assistant Professor: B. S. Hartley.
Assistant: May L. Barclay.
Assistant: C. Islay Johnston.
Assistant: H. D. Smith.
Assistant: C. G. Patten.
Assistant: R. D. James.
Assistant: Mary E. Pollock.
Courses 2, 3, and 4 are open to students who have completed
Course 1. 140 Faculty op Arts and Science
Pass Courses
1. (a) Algebra. — An elementary course, including ratio,
proportion, variation, interest and annuities, theory of quadratic
equations, simple series, permutations, combinations, the binomial theorem, logarithms.
Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra, Chapters I to
XV, Oxford.
Students intending to take Mathematics 2 or to enter
Applied Science should purchase the larger edition of The Intermediate Algebra.
Four hours a week. First Term.
(6) Analytical Geometry.—Fundamental concepts, loci, the
straight line and circle, and an introduction to the other conies.
Buchanan and Nowlan, Analytical Geometry (Chapters I to V).
Two hours a week. Second Term.
(c) Trigonometry. — An elementary course involving the
use of logarithms.
Playne and Fawdry, Practical Trigonometry, Copp Clark.
Wentworth and Hill, Tables (Ginn).'
Two hours a week. Second Term. 3 units.
2. (a) Analytical Geometry.—A review of the straight line
and circle, and a study of the other conies.
Buchanan and Nowlan, Analytical Geometry.
Two hours a week. First Term. Mr. Nowlan.
(b) Algebra.—The binomial theorem, induction, remainder
theorem, Horner's method of approximating roots, exponential
logarithmic and other series, undetermined coefficients, partial
fractions, convergence and divergence.
Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra (Larger
Edition), Oxford.
Two hours a week. Second Term. Mr. Nowlan.
(c) Calculus.—An introductory course in differential and
integral calculus, with various applications. Mathematics 141
Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus, Ginn.
One hour a week. Mr. Buchanan. 3 units.
3. The Mathematical Theory of Investments.—This course
deals with the theory of interest, annuities, debentures, valuation
of bonds, sinking funds, depreciation, probability and its application to life insurance.
Rietz, Crathorne and Rietz, Mathematics of Finance, Holt.
Three hours a week. Mr. Robinson. 3 units.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.)
4. Descriptive Astronomy.—The object of this course is to
acquaint the student with the various heavenly bodies and their
motions. It is intended primarily for Pass students, and only a
knowledge of elementary mathematics is essential. The subject-
matter treated includes: The shape and motions of the earth,
systems of coordinates, the constellations, planetary motion,
gravitation, tides, time, the stars and nebulae, theories of evolution of the solar system.
Two hours a week. Mr. Buchanan. 2 units.
Students desiring credit for an additional unit in connection
with this course may register for Mathematics 18. They will
be required to write essays on prescribed subjects dealing with
various phases of Astronomy. 1 unit.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
Honour Courses
10. Calculus.—The elementary theory and applications of
the subject.
Granville, Differential and Integral Calculus, Ginn.
Three hours a week. Mr. Nowlan. 3 units
11. Plane and Spherical Trigonometry.—The work in plane
trigonometry will deal with the following: Identities and trigonometrical equations, the solution of triangles with various applications, circumscribed, inscribed and escribed circles, De Moivre 's
theorem, expansions of sin nd , etc., hyperbolic and inverse func- 142 Faculty of Arts and Science
tions. The work in spherical trigonometry will cover the solution
of triangles with various applications to astronomy and geodesy.
Loney, Plane Trigonometry, Parts I and II.
Dupuis and Matheson, Spherical Trigonometry and Astronomy, Uglow.
Two hours a week. Mr. Hartley. 2 units.
12. Synthetic Plane and Solid Geometry.—The course in
plane geometry is intended to cover such topics as the principle
of duality, cross ratio geometry, etc. In solid geometry the principal properties of solid figures are studied, as well as the theory
of projection in space, with various applications to the conic
sections.
Dupuis, Elementary Synthetic Geometry, Macmillan.
Wilson, Solid Geometry and Conic Sections, Macmillan.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
13. Plane and Solid Analytical Geometry.—A general study
of the conies and systems of conies, and elementary work in
three dimensions. 2 units.
Ford, Brief Course in Analytical Geometry, Holt.
Two hours a week. Mr. Nowlan. 2 units.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.)
14. Theory of Equations and Determinants. — A course
covering the main theory and use of these subjects.
Burnside and Panton, Theory of Equations, Vol. I, Dublin.
Weld, Theory of Determinants.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
15. Higher Algebra. — Selected topics in higher algebra,
including infinite series, continued fractions, the theory of numbers, probability.
Hall and Knight. Higher Algebra, Macmillan. ChrystaL
Text-book of Algebra, Part IT.
Two hours a week. Mr. Jordan. 2 units.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) Mathematics 143
16. Calculus and Differential Equations.—A continuation of
the previous course in calculus, treating partial differentiation,
expansions of functions of many variables, singular points,
reduction formulae, successive integration, elliptic integrals, and
Fourier series.
Ordinary and partial differential equations, with various
applications to geometry, mechanics, physics and chemistry.
Granville, Differential and Integral Calculus, Ginn.
Murray, Differential Equations, Longmans.
Three hours a week. Mr. Buchanan. 3 units.
17. Applied Mathematics. — A course dealing with the
applications of mathematics to dynamics of a particle and of a
rigid body, and to the two body problem in celestial mechanics
Loney, Theoretical Mechanics.
Three hours a week. Mr. Richardson. 3 units.
18. History of Mathematics.—A reading course covering the
historical development of the elementary branches of mathematics from the earliest times to the present.
Ball, History of Mathematics. Cajori, History of Elementary Mathematics; Smith, History of Mathematics.
Mr. Buchanan. 1 unit.
19. Methods in High Scltool Mathematics.
This course is offered primarily for students in the Teacher
Training Course and does not carry undergraduate credit.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours a week. Second Term.
Graduate Courses
20. Vector Analysis.—Weatherburn, Vector Analysis.
21. Theory of Functions of a Real Variable. — Goursat-
Hedrick, Mathematical Analysis, Vol. I.
22. Theory of Functions of a ComplexVariable.—Townsend,
Functions of a Complex Variable. 144 Faculty op Arts and Science
23. Differential Geometry.—Eisenhart, Differential Geometry.
24. Projective Geometry.—Veblen and Young, Projective
Geometry, Vol. I.
25. Celestial Mechanics.—Moulton, An Introduction to
Celestial Mechanics.
26. Advanced Differential Equations. — Moulton, Periodic
Orbits.
27. Theory of Numbers and Algebraic Numbers. — Reid,
Elements of the Theory of Algebraic Numbers.
28. Hyper-complex Numbers—Dickson, Algebras and Their
Arithmetics.
29. Modern Algebraic Theories. — Dickson, Modem Algebraic Theories.
Department of Modern Languages
Professor: H. Ashton.
Associate Professor: A. F. B. Clark.
Associate Professor: Isabel Maclnnes.
Associate Professor:
Assistant Professor: Janet T. Greig.
Instructor: Joyce Hallamore.
Assistant: E. E. Delavault.
Assistant: G. Barry.
Assistant: W. Tipping.
Assistant: Y. Darlington.
Assistant: D. Dallas.
With the consent of the Professor in charge of the course,
a student taking a Pass Degree may be admitted to any course
in the Third and Fourth Years in addition to, but not in lieu
of, 3(a) and 4(a). Students from other universities who have
already taken the work of 3(a) or 4(a), may be given special
permission by the Head of the Department to substitute other
courses. Modern Languages 145
French
1. (a) Moliere, Les Precieuses Ridicules, Longmans, Toronto. Victor Hugo, Prose et Poesies (Wilson Green), Cambridge. Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 1. Dent.
Ashton, A Preface to Moliere, Longmans, Toronto.
1. (6) Prescribed texts as for 1(a).
Revision of the essentials of French grammar and syntax
applied to the correct writing of French. There will be an oral
examination based on the texts read. 3 units.
Note :—Students who choose French will be informed which
course 1(a) or 1(6) they must take. The decision will be made
after a consideration of the marks in French obtained at the
Matriculation examination. Students in 1(6) will normally take
not more than two years French, as they will not be sufficiently
prepared to profit by the Third and Fourth Year courses. If,
however, they make rapid progress in the First Year they may be
transferred to the higher course in the Second Year when they
have satisfied the examiners of their fitness for more advanced
work Students who have not passed the Matriculation
examination in French (or its equivalent) are not allowed to
take either of the First Year courses in this subject. Courses
1 (6) and 2 (6) do not fulfill the conditions required of graduates taking the Teacher Training Course. Students who intend
to teach French must take 1 (a) and 2 (a).
Summer Reading:—See the announcement after the Fourth
Year courses.
2. (a) La Fontaine, One Hundred Fables, Ginn. Moliere,
Les Femmes Savantes, Didier. Faguet, Ce que disent les livres,
Cambridge.
Conversation in French on the* above. Written resumes.
Composition from Kastner and Marks, French Composition,
Pt. 1. French 1 (a) is a prerequisite.
There will be oral tests. 3 units.
2. (b) Text as above. French 1 (a) or 1 (6) prerequisite.
3 units. 146 Faculty of Arts and Science
2. (c) Lectures in French on Literature for students who
intend to take French throughout the four years. One hour a
week; no credits, no examination.
Summer Reading: See the announcement after the Fourth
Year Courses.
3. (a) The Literature of the Age of Louis XIV.—Lectures
on the history and social conditions of the period, and on the
development of the literature. Careful reading and discussion
of the following texts: Racine, Andromaque, Didier. Moliere,
Le Misanthrope, Didier; Le Tartuffe, Heath. An Anthology of
Seventeenth Century French Readings, Princeton University
Press. A*^
Conversation and written resumes based on the above.
This course is obligatory for all students taking Third Year
French. French 2(a) is prerequisite. Students who cannot
write French with some facility are advised not to attempt 3 (a).
They will not be admitted to 3 (b), which is intended for
Honours students.
Students who intend to take French throughout the four
years or who wish to teach this subject should also take 3 (c).
3. (6) The Literature of the Eighteenth Century.—Lectures
on the history and social conditions of the period, with special
emphasis on the philosophe movement, and the beginnings of
romanticism. The inter-relations of French and English thought
and literature will be touched upon. Careful reading and
discussion of the following texts: Selections from Voltaire
(Havens), Century Co. Rousseau, Morceaux choisis (Mornet),
Didier. Diderot, Extraits (Fallex), Delagrave. Beaumarchais,
Le Barbier de Seville, Macmillan. 3 units.
3. (c) Bibliography, French Composition and Translation from English into French. Kastner and Marks, French
Composition, Pt. 2. 3 units.
Summer Reading: See the announcement after the Fourth
Fear Courses. Modern Languages 147
4. (a) The Romantic Drama.—Musset, Quatre Come"dies,
Oxford. Hugo, Hernani, Oxford. Rostand, Cyrano de Bergerac.
3 units.
French 3 (a) is a prerequisite. Students who cannot write
accurate French with facility and understand spoken French
are advised not to attempt 4 (a).
4. (6) Literature and Society in the XVIIth Century.—
Mme de La Fayette, La Princesse de Cleves (Cambridge); La
Bruyere, Les Caracteres (Cambridge); Mme de Sevigne, Lettres
(Manchester); Moliere, Les Precieuses Ridicules (Longman),
Les Femmes Savantes (Hatier), L'Avare (Hatier), Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme (Hatier). French 3 (a) and 3 (6) are prerequisite. The requirements for entrance to 4 (6) are accurate
written French and a sufficient mastery of spoken French to
permit conversation on a literary subject.
4. (c) Composition and Oral French.—Book required:
Kastner and Marks, French Composition, Pt. 3. 3 units.
4. (d) Eighteenth Century Drama.—Lesage, Turcaret,
Cambridge; Marivaux, Le jeu de Vamour et du hasard, Hatier,
Paris (Les classiques pour tous); Regnard, Le joueur, Hatier,
Paris; Sedaine, Le Philosophe sans le savoir, Hachette, London.
3 units
5. Methods in High School.—Modern Languages. Phonetics
during First Term (1 hour a week). Methods during Spring
Term (2 hours a week). Texts for discussion: Hedgcock, Prac-
tical French Teaching, Pitman; Modern Studies, 1918. This
course is primarily for students in the Teacher Training course
and does not carry undergraduate credit.
Summer Reading •
Upon entering the courses for the years stated, the student
must satisfy the instructor that he has read the books mentioned
below.
Second Year:
1. Bernardin de St Pierre, Paul et Virginie.
2. Balzac, Eugenie Grandet.
3. Saintine, Picciola; or Vigny, Poesies Choisies. 148 Faculty of Arts and Science
Third Year:
1. Chateaubriand, Atala.
2. Le Sage, Gil Bias.
3. Vigny, Servitude et grandeur militaires.
4. Banville, Gringoire; or Musset,, Poesies Choisies.
Fourth Year:
1. Moliere, L'Avare.
2. Moliere, Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme.
3. Moliere, Les Femmes Savantes.
4. Racine, Andromaque.
5. Racine, Les Plaideurs.
6. Musset, Fantasio.
7. Musset, Un Caprice.
The above have all been chosen from the series Les Classiques
pour tous so as to lighten the cost of buying books for vacation
reading. At the present rate of exchange they can be bought at
the University Bookstore for ten or fifteen cents each. As these
books can be carried in the pocket and read at odd moments
no excuse will be accepted for failure to do summer reading.
German
A. Beginners' Course. Composition, Grammar, Conversation.—Texts: (a) Zinnecker, Deutsch fur Anf anger, Heath.
(b) Haertel, German Reader for Beginners. 3 units.
B. Beginners' Course (Scientific) Composition, Grammar,
Conversation.—Texts: (a) Zinnecker, Deutsch fiir Anf anger,
Heath, (b) Gore, German Science Reader, Heath. 3 units.
1. Completion and Revision of Zinnecker. Composition
and conversation based on texts read. Von Hillern, Hoher
als die Kirche, Scribner; Diamond and Uhlendorf, Mitten im
Leben, Holt; Bruns, Book of German Lyrics, Heath.
Science Section with alternate reading. 3 units.
2. (a) Whitney and Stroebe, Easy German Composition,
Holt. Composition and conversation based on texts read. Philosophy 149
Fretag, Die Journalisten, Ginn. Schiller, Wilhelm Tell,
Heath. Bruns, Book of German Lyrics. 3 units.
(b) A general survey of German literature.
Prerequisite for German 3. Lectures in English and
open to students of other literatures. One hour. No credit.
3 (a) The Classical Period.
Texts: Lessing, Emilia Galotti, Heath. Goethe, Faust I,
Heath. Schiller, Die Jungfrau von Orleans, Holt.
Composition based on above texts and Whitney and Stroebe,
German Composition, Holt. 3 units.
3 (6) Introduction to Modern Literature.
Texts: Schweizer, Der deutsche Geist der Neuzeit, Cambridge. Porterfield, Modern German Stories, Heath. 3 units.
Composition on above texts.
4. (a) Nineteenth Century Drama. 3 units.
4. (6) Nineteenth Century Fiction. 3 units.
These courses, which include the reading of a number of
standard works, will be given alternately.
Department of Philosophy
Professor: H. T. J. Coleman.
Associate Professor: James Henderson.
Associate Professor of Psychology and Education:
Jennie Wyman Pilcher.
1. (a) Elementary Psychology.
Text-book: Warren, Elements of Human Psychology,
Houghton Mifflin Co.
References: Woodworth, Psychology, A Study of Mental
Life. Stout, A Manual of Psychology. Titchener, A Text-book
in Psychology; A Beginner's Psychology. James, Psychology
(Briefer Course). Pillsbury, Essentials of Psychology.
Two hours a week. 2 units. 150 Faculty of Arts and Science
(6) Elementary Logic.
Text-book: Mellone, Introductory Text-book of Logic,
Blackwood (latest edition).
One hour a week. 1 unit.
(c) A fourth hour per week will be devoted to lectures
introductory to the main problems of Philosophy, and a special
study of Descartes' Discourse on Method and Berkeley's Treatise
Concerning the Principles of Human Knowledge. Attendance
at this hour is voluntary and no formal credit is given. Students
contemplating Honours are, however, advised to take this course.
2. Ethics.
Text-book: Everett, Moral Values, Holt.
A special study will be made of selected portions of Aristotle's Ethics, Mill's Utilitarianism, and Kant's Metaphysic of
Morals.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
3. History of Greek Philosophy from Tholes to Plato
(inclusive).
Text-books: Bakewell, Source Book in Ancient Philosophy,
Charles Scribner's Sons, and Burnet, Greek Philosophy (Part 1),
Macmillan. In connection with this course a special study will
be made of Plato's Republic, Phaedo, and Philebus.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
4. The History of Philosophy from the Renaissance to the
Present time.
Text-book: Alexander, A Short History of Philosophy,
Macmillan.
Works of Reference: Rand, Modem Classical Philosophers,
and the various Histories of Philosophy.
Three hours a week. 3 units
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) Philosophy 151
5. The Philosophy of Kant, with special study of the
Critique of Pure Reason.
Two hours a week. 2 units.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.)
6. Philosophic Movements since the time of Kant. Post-
Kantian Idealism, Pragmatism, Modern Realism, Bergson and
others.
Two hours a week. 2 units
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
7. Philosophy of Education. A course of lectures and
discussions dealing with educational movements since the beginning of the 19th century, and with the theories of life and of
mind which are implicit in these movements.
Texts: Spencer, Education, Everyman Edition. Dewey,
Democracy and Education, Macmillan.
References: Butler, The Meaning of Education. Moore,
What is Education? Adams (ed.), The New Teaching. Holmes,
What is and What might be. Articles in Cyclopedia of Education, Macmillan.
Philosophy 1 is recommended as preparatory to this course.
Three hours a week. 3 units.
8. Social Psychology. — A study of those particular phases
of mental life and development which are fundamental in social
organization and activity.
Texts: McDougall, Social Psychology, The Group Mind,
Methuen, London. Ginsberg, Psychology of Society, Methuen,
London. Collateral reading will be prescribed from the following : Hobhouse, Mind in Evolution, Morals in Evolution. Sutherland, Origin and Growth of the Moral Instinct. Cooley, Human
Nature and the Social Order. Wallas, Human Nature in Politics;
The Great Society. Ross, Social Psychology. Trotter, Instincts
of the Herd in Peace and War. Bernard, Introduction to Social
Psychology.
Philosophy 1 is recommended as preparatory to this course.
Three hours a week. 3 units. 152 Faculty op Arts and Science
9. (1) A study of the concept of intelligence. Current
theories of the nature and growth of intelligence. Its practical
bearing in modern life. Principles and applications of the
measurement of intelligence. History of the movement. The
nature and causes of mental defects and peculiarities.
References: Spearman, The Nature of Intelligence and the
Principles of Cognition, Macmillan; Woodrow, Brightness and
Dullness in Children, Lippincott; Peterson, Early Conceptions
and Tests of Intelligence, World Book Co.; Gesell, The Mental
Growth of the Pre-School Child, Macmillan; Freeman, Mental
Tests, Houghton Mifflin; Pintner, Intelligence Testing, Henry
Holt.
(2) Principles of Experimental Procedure. Method of
Measurement. Practical training in the methods of individual
and group examinations. Treatment of subnormal, normal and
gifted children.
Text: Terman, Measurement of Intelligence, Houghton
Mifflin Co.
References: Terman, Stanford Revision of Binet Simon
Scale, Warwick and York; Wells, Mental Tests in Clinical Practice, World Book Co.; Bisch, Clinical Practice, Williams and
Wilkins; Mateer, The Unstabe Child, Appleton; Hollingworth,
Gifted Children, Macmillan; Wallin, Clinical and Abnormal
Psychology, Houghton Mifflin; Cyril Burt, The Young Delinquent, Appleton. , 3 units.
Department of Physics
Professor: T. C. Hebb.
Associate Professor: A. E. Hennings.
Associate Professor: J. G. Davidson.
Associate Professor: G. M. Shrum.
Assistant: H. W. Fowler.
Assistant: C. G. Patten.
Assistant: H. D. Smith.
Assistant: R. D. James.
Primarily for First and Second Year students.
1. Introduction to Physics.—A general study of the principles of mechanics, properties of matter, heat, light, sound and Physics 153
electricity, both in the lecture room and in the laboratory. The
course has two objects: (1) to give the minimum acquaintance
with physical science requisite for a liberal education to those
whose studies will be mainly literary; (2) to be introductory to
the courses in Chemistry, Engineering and Advanced Physics.
Students must reach the required standard in both theoretical
and practical work. Open only to students who have not matriculated in Physics.
Text-book: Millikan, Gale and Edwards, A First Course in
Physics for Colleges.
Three lectures and two hours' laboratory per week. 3 units.
2. Elementary Physics.—This course consists of a general
course in Physics suitable for those students who have obtained
standing in Junior Matriculation Physics or its equivalent. It
covers mechanics, properties of matter, heat, light, sound, electricity and some of the more recent developments and theories.
Text-book: Stewart, Physics, A text-book for Colleges,
Ginn.
Prerequisite: High School Physics.
Three lectures and one two-hour laboratory period per
week. 3 units.
Books for reference: Watson, A Text-book of Physics,
Longmans; Kaye and Laby, Physical and Chemical Constants,
Longmans.
3. Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat.—A study of the
statics and dynamics of both a particle and a rigid body, the
laws of gases and vapors, temperature, hygrometry, capillarity,
expansion, and calorimetry.
Text-book: Millikan, Mechanics, Molecular Physics, Heat,
Ginn.
Prerequisite: Physics 1 or 2.
Two lectures and three hours' laboratory per week. 3 units. 154 Faculty op Arts and Science
Primarily for Third Year Students
5. Electricity, Sound, and Light.—A study of the fundamentals of magnetism, electricity, sound, and light.
Text-book: Millikan and Mills, Electricity, Sound and
Light, Ginn.
Prerequisite: Physics 1 or 2.
Two lectures and three hours' laboratory per week.
3 unite.
6. Theoretical Mechanics.—A selected course in statics,
dynamics of a particle and of a rigid body.
Text-book: Smith and Longley, Ginn.
Two lectures per week. 2 units.
7. Introduction to Theoretical Physics.—A course of lectures upon selected topics, including elasticity, viscosity, and
hydromechanics.
Two lectures per week. 2 units.
8. Physical Optics.—A course of lectures accompanied by
laboratory work, covering optical instruments, interference,
diffraction and polarisation.
Two lectures and one three-hour laboratory period per
week. 3 unite.
Reference Books: Schuster and Nicholson, The Theory of
Optics; Houstoun, Treatise on Light; Mann, Advanced Optics;
Wood, Physical Optics; Preston, Theory of Light; Drude,
Theory of Optics; Taylor, College Manual of Optics; Edser,
Light for Students.
Primarily for Fourth Year Students
10. Elementary Spectroscopy. — An introductory course,
outlining the general characteristics of spectra and their classification.
One lecture per week. 1 unit.
' Reference Books: Baly, Spectroscopy (4 vols.); Kayser,
Handbuch der Spectroscopic; Wood, Physical Optics. Physics 155
11. Electricity and Magnetism.—In this course, especial
attention is given to the theoretical phases of Electricity and
Magnetism.
Text-book: Starling, Electricity and Magnetism.
Prerequisites: Physics 3 and 5 and Mathematics 10.
Two lectures per week. 2 units.
12. Ions, Electrons, and Ionising Radiations.—A course of
lectures dealing with the conduction of electricity through gases,
cathode and positive rays, photo-electricity, X-rays, and radioactivity.
Reference Books: Thomson, Conduction of Electricity
Through Gases; Rutherford, Radio-active Substances and Their
Radiations; Millikan, Electron; Thomson, Positive Rays;
Hughes, Photo-electricity; and Kaye, X-rays.
Prerequisites: Courses 3 and 5, and Differential and
Integral Calculus.
Two lectures per week. 2 units.
13. Kinetic Theory of Gases.—A course of lectures giving
an exposition of the classical deductions and an outline of recent
experimental advances of the subject.
Text-book: Loeb, Kinetic Theory of Gases.
Two lectures per week. 2 units.
14. Thermodynamics.—A course of lectures covering the
fundamental principles of the subject.
Text-book: Birtwistle, The Principles of Thermodynamics.
One lecture per week. 1 unit.
18. Experimental Physics.—A laboratory course accompanying Physics 10.
Three hours per week. 1 unit.
19. Advanced Experimental Physics.—In this course the
candidate for Honours is expected to perform one or more classical experiments and to do some special work. 156 Faculty of Arts and Science
Carefully prepared reports, abstracts, and bibliographies
will constitute an essential part of the course.
Six hours' laboratory per week. 2 to 3 units.
With the consent of the head of the department Fourth
Year students may select one or more units from the graduate
Courses.
Primarily for Graduate Students
20. Spectroscopy.—A study of the methods of excitation
and observation of spectra, series in arc and spark spectra,
multiplets, Zeeman and Stark effects, and band spectra.
One lecture per week. 1 unit.
21. Radiation and Atomic Structure.—A study of the
theories of radiation and miscellaneous related topics selected
from current literature.
One lecture per week. 1 unit.
22. Advanced Electricity and Magnetism.—A study of the
Electromagnetic theory and its application, the theories of
metallic conduction, and electrical oscillations.
One lecture per week. 1 unit.
23. Vector Analysis.—A course of lectures upon the applications of Vector Analysis to problems in Physics.
One lecture per week. 1 unit.
24. X-rays and Crystal Structure.—A study of the modern
methods of production and observation of X-rays, the Compton
effect, X-ray analysis, and the structure of crystals.
One lecture per week. 1 unit.
25. The Theory of Sound.—A course of lectures covering
the propagation of sound, and the general phenomena associated
With vibrating systems.
One lecture per week. 1 unit.
26. The Theory of Potential.—A general course giving the
applications of the Theory of Potential to Physics.
One lecture per week. 1 unit. Zoology 157
27. The Theory of Relativity.—An introductory course to
the theory of relativity.
One lecture per week. 1 unit.
40. Methods in High School Physics.—Spring term only.
This course is offered primarily for students in the Teacher
Training Course and does not carry undergraduate credit.
Readings to be assigned.
Three hours per week.
Department of Zoology
Professor: C. McLean Fraser.m ^
Assistant Professor: G. J. Spencer.
Assistant: Verna Z. Lucas.
Note—Biology 1 is prerequisite to all courses in Zoology.
1. General Morphology.—General morphology of animals.
Comparative anatomy. The relationships of animal groups.
Comparative life-histories.
Text-books: Parker and Haswell, Manual of Zoology, Macmillan. (American Edition, 1916.)
This course is prerequisite to other courses in Zoology.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week 3 unite.
2. Comparative Anatomy of Vertebrates.—A detailed comparative study of a member of each of the classes of Vertebrates.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. First
Term. 2 units.
3. Comparative Anatomy of Invertebrates. — A detailed
comparative study of a member of each of the main classes of
Invertebrates.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. Second
Term. 2 unite.
4. Morphology of Insects.—General Entomology.
Two lectures and four hours laboratory per week. First
Term. 2 units.
A collection of insects is required. 158 Faculty op Arts and Science
5. Histology.—Study of the structure and development of
animal tissues. Methods in histology.
Ten hours per week. Second Term. 3 units.
6. Embryology.—A general survey of the principles of
vertebrate embryology. Preparation and examination of em-
bryological sections.
Ten hours per week. First Term. 3 unite.
7. Economic Entomology.—A study of the insect pests of
animals and plants; means of combating them.
Lecture and laboratory work, six hours per week. Second
Term. 2 units.
8. Private Reading. — A course of reading on Biological
theories. In this course examinations will be set, but no class
instruction will be given. 2 units. THE
FACULTY
OF >**.
APPLIED SCIENCE /■^ At FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE
FOREWORD
The object of the courses in Applied Science is to train
Btudente in exact and fertile thinking, and to give them a sound
knowledge of natural laws and of the means of utilizing natural
forces and natural products for the benefit of man and the
advancement of civilization. Experience shows that such a
training is the best yet devised for a large and increasing proportion of the administrative, supervisory and technical
positions.
The object, then, is to turn out, not finished engineers or
industrial leaders—these are the product of years of development in the school of experience—, but young men with a special
capacity and training for attaining these goals, and thus for
helping to develop the industries of the province. Consequently
the undergraduate course is made broad and general rather than
narrow and highly specialized.
Furthermore, such a course is not only better suited to the
British Columbia conditions that the graduate will encounter in
his after life, but also better for later specialization, for it
furnishes a more solid foundation, a better background, a
broader outlook and a more stimulating atmosphere, all necessary
if the specialist is to achieve the maximum results of which
he is capable.
The student is offered a full undergraduate course and an
additional year of graduate study. The preliminary year
required in Arts is intended to increase the student's general
knowledge and to broaden his outlook. It is hoped that enough
interest will be aroused to encourage the student to continue
some study of the humanities as a hobby or recreation.
The first two years in Applied Science proper are spent in
a general course that includes Mathematics and all the basic
sciences. This gives not only a broad training, but enables the
student to discover the work for which he has special liking or 162 Faculty of Applied Science
aptitude and to select more intelligently the subjects in which
to specialize during the two final years. During the latter
periods students acquire more detailed knowledge and get
practice in applying scientific knowledge, in solving problems,
in doing things; and there is also training in Economics, Law
and Industrial Management.
During the long period between sessions, the student is
required to engage in some industrial or professional work that
will afford practical experience not obtainable in the laboratory
or field classes, but that is a necessary supplement to academic
study.
An engineering degree in the Applied Science Course of
the University is accepted by the Association of Professional
Engineers of the Province of British Columbia in lieu of four
of the six years practical experience required by the Engineering Act of the Province for registration to practise engineering.
Students are advised to register with the Association of
Professional Engineers of British Columbia in their third year;
and to associate themselves with the appropriate engineering
societies listed on Page 341.
FACILITIES FOR WORK
For laboratory and other facilities see Pages 25-37.
ADMISSION
The general requirements for admission to the University
are given on Pages 42-44.
As for Arts, complete Junior Matriculation or its equivalent is required for admission to Applied Science, and no
student may enter with any outstanding supplemental in Junior
Matriculation.
DEGREES
The degrees offered students in this Faculty are:
Bachelor of Applied Science (B.A.Sc). (See below.)
Master of Applied Science (M.A.Sc). (See Page 192.) Courses in Applied Science 163
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF B.A.Sc
The degree of Bachelor of Applied Science is granted on the
completion of the work in one of the coursesf given below:
I. Chemical Engineering.
II. Chemistry.
III. Civil Engineering.
IV. Electrical Engineering.
V. Forest Engineering.
VI. Geological Engineering.
VII. Mechanical Engineering.
VIII. Metallurgical Engineering.
IX. Mining Engineering.
X. Nursing and Health.
A double course in Arts and Science and in Applied Science
is offered, leading to the degree of B.A., and B.A.Sc. (See
Page 192.)
This course is strongly recommended to students who are
young enough to afford the time and to students wishing to
enter Applied Science, and who have to their credit some, but
not all, of the requirements of First Year Applied Science as
set forth on Page 165. The latter can select subjects in their
Second Year Arts that will satisfy the Arts requirements for
the double degree, and at the same time complete the work of
First Year Applied Science. Thus they may qualify for an
Arts degree without expending any more time than would be
required to qualify them for entrance into Second Year Applied
Science.
PRACTICAL WORK OUTSIDE THE UNIVERSITY
In order to master professional subjects it is very important
that the work done at the University should be supplemented
by practical experience in related work outside. Therefore
students are expected to spend their summers in employment
that will give such experience. But summer employment will
fThe curriculum described in the following pages may be changed
from time to time as deemed advisable by the Senate. 164 Faculty op Applied Science
not be accepted as an excuse for failure to write off supplemental
examinations at the regular date specified in the Calendar or
for failure to enter University on the opening date, except when
the summer employment affords experience necessary for the
course the student is specializing in, as Geological Survey field
work for geological students, and the student furnishes a statement from his employer showing that circumstances made it
impossible for him to release the student in time to reach the
University on the opening day. Under these circumstances the
student may, upon the approval of the Dean, register without
penalty after the specified date of admission. Before a degree
will be granted, a candidate is required to satisfy the Department concerned that he has done at least four months' practical work related to his chosen profession. Fourth and Fifth
Year Essays (see Page 167) should be based, as far as possible,
upon the summer work.
Upon approval of the Dean and the Head of the Department concerned, University credit may be granted for work
done outside the University under the immediate supervision
of the University staff, during the University session.
Practical work such as Shop-work, Freehand Drawing,
Mechanical Drawing, Surveying, etc., done outside the University, may be accepted in lieu of laboratory or field work (but
not in lieu of lectures) in these subjects, on the recommendation of the Head of the Department and approval of the Dean.
Students seeking exemption as above must make written
application to the Dean accompanied by certificates indicating
the character of the work done and the time devoted to it.
GENERAL OUTLINE OF UNIVERSITY COURSES
Students in Nursing and Health register directly in
Applied Science and take the special course outlined on Pages
184-191. All other students of Applied Science have a general
course common to all for the First three years as under: Courses in Applied Science 165
FIRST YEAR
The students register in Arts and take the following classes
as Arts students:
English 1 (a and b).
Mathematics 1 (Algebra, Geometry, Trigonometry.)
Chemistry 1.
Physics 1 or 2.
Latin 1 or French 1 or German B.
The passing grade is 50 per cent, for Chemistry, Physics
and each of the Mathematics subjects, but in the others a mark
of 40 per cent, will be accepted, provided an average of 50
per cent, has been obtained in the total work of the year.
Biology 1 may with advantage be taken as an optional extra
subject, and, if passed with a grade of at least 50 per cent., need
not be repeated in the Second Year. So, too, Economics 1
taken in Arts is accepted in lieu of Economies in Applied
Science.
A reading knowledge of French and German is desirable
for students in Engineering. No student may proceed to the
Second Year with a supplemental against him in Chemistry.
Physics or Mathematics nor with supplemental in other subjects to the extent of more than three unite.*
Students who have passed First Year Arts and Science,
but who have failed to make the necessary fifty per cent, in
Mathematics, Chemistry or Physics, may take the September
Supplemental Examinations of Arts and Science in these subjects.
First Year students are advised to attend the noon-hour
talks on the choice of a profession and on the life and work in
various callings likely to be selected by Applied Science graduates, as these may assist the student in determining whether
Applied Science is the best course for him. If he finds it is not
he can proceed in Arts without any loss of time.
*A unit normally consists of one lecture hour, or one continuous
laboratory period of not less than two or more than three hours, per week
throughout the session; or two lecture hours or equivalent laboratory
periods throughout a single term. 166
Faculty op Applied Science
Equivalent standing in the subjects of the First Year
outlined above, obtained outside the University, may be
accepted in lieu of this First Year work, but students are
strongly advised to take this year within the University if it is
at all possible, for it is a professional course co-ordinated
throughout. It gives the student a year longer in which to
become acquainted with the work in Applied Science, and
hence be in a better position to choose the particular branch
of Applied Science to follow; the friendships formed with his
classmates in Arts are continued throughout his college life,
and tend to offset the narrowing effect of a somewhat specialized
course with associates confined to students of the same interests
and knowledge as himself; he becomes acquainted with the
University methods and life during the year that planned to
help him make these adjustments and enters the comparatively
heavy Second Year prepared and able to work effectively from
the opening of the term, which is unlikely to be possible for the
student beginning life at the University.
The work of the Second and Third Years is the same in all
courses, except those in Nursing and Health.
SECOND YEAR
Second Term.
Subject.
2 S
First Term.
O % ■
rt « a.
O Q, ■
2 50 *
-5
St-*
Math. 1 Trigonometry
Math. 2 Solid Geometry
Math. 3 Algebra
Math. 4 Calculus
C.E. 1 Descriptive Geom.
M.E. I Drawing 1
Physics 3 Mechanics
Physics 4 Heat -
Chem. 2a Qual. Analysis
M.E. 2a Shop Practice
Biology 1* Introductory
CE. 2 Surveying
C.E. 30 Engineering Prob. 1...
225
226
226
226
204
227
243
243
200
227
196
204
214
Field Work
I 4 I
*Biology 1, Arts, passed with a grade of at least 50 per cent, will be
accepted in lieu of this course. Courses in Applied Science
167
THIRD YEAR
Subject.
Q *
U, ra
First Term.
s*
3«
Second Term.
a; oj
Math. 6 Calculus
Math. 7 Anal. Geom.
Chem. 2b Quan. Analysis
CE. 4 Graphics
M.E. 6a Elem. Theory
Physics 5 Electricity
Physics 6 Mechanics
C.E. 5 Mapping
C.E. 6 Surveying
Geology 1 General
tCE. 7 Surveying
CE. 31 Engineering Prob. 2...
226
8
226
2
200
1
204
229
2
243
2
243
2
205
205
2
220
2
205
F
214
PV^
Field Work
3 I
3
2
fStudents entering Civil, Forest, Geological, Metallurgical, and Mining
Engineering are required to take Civil Engineering 7 (see Page 205)
immediately after the spring examinations.
FOURTH AND FIFTH YEARS
Essays
Essays are required of all students entering the Fourth
and Fifth Years, and must conform to the following:—
1. The essay shall consist of not less than 2,000 words.
2. It must be a technical description of the engineering aspects
of the work on which the student was engaged during the
summer, or of any scientific or engineering work with which
he is familiar. In the preparation of the essay, advantage
may be taken of any source of information, but due
acknowledgment must be made of all authorities consulted.
It should be suitably illustrated by drawings, sketches,
photographs or specimens.
3. It must be typewritten, or clearly written on paper of substantial quality, standard letter size (8V2XH inches), on
one side of the paper only, leaving a clear margin on top
and left-hand side. Students are recommended to examine 168 Faculty of Applied Science
sample reports to be found in the library or in the departments.
4. All essays must be handed in to the Dean not later than
November 15th.
All essays, when handed in, become the property of the
Department concerned, and are filed for reference. Students
may submit duplicate copies of their essays in competition for
the students' prizes of the Engineering Institute of Canada, or
the Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
Essays will be considered as final Christmas examinations.
A maximum of 100 marks is allowed, the value being based on
presentation, English and matter. In fourth year essays
presentation, that is, the manner in which the material is
arranged and presented to the reader, is given most weight,
with English second and matter third. In fifth year essays
most emphasis is placed on matter, but the other two are still
rated highly.
COURSES
I. Chemical Engineering
The course in Chemical Engineering should prepare the
student for the duties of managing engineer in a chemical
manufactory. As such he must be conversant not only with
the chemical processes involved, but he must be prepared to
design and to oversee the construction of new buildings and
to direct the installation and use of machinery. In the industrial life of British Columbia the chemical engineer may be
more particularly concerned with the manufacture of acids and
alkalies, the preparation from natural sources of various organic
and inorganic compounds, the pulp and paper industry, and
the utilization of the waste from a number of industrial plants
indigenous to the Province. Accordingly, the course of study
includes a number of courses in the older branches of engineering
along with the maximum of chemical training allowed by the
time at the disposal of the student. Courses in Applied Science
169
Fourth Year
Subject.
S ■■
ai cs
Q *
O <D
fa M
First Term.
0) QJ
^8,
Second Term.
Ml £
tiL
Essay
Economics 1 Introductory
Met. 1 Introductory
Geol. 2(a) Mineralogy
Chem. 3 Organic
Chem. 4 Theoretical
Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis _..
E.E. 1 General.....)
Physics 7 Light
CE. 12 Hydraulics
167
215
240
222
201
201
201
232
243
207
Fifth Year
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
8-
$X
IS v
sr*w
6 8
► S«
ft m V
b S «
■§§*
■31
Essay
Chem. 6 Industrial
167
202
2
2
Chem. 7 Physical
Chem. 8 Electro :
202
202
2
2
3
3
2
2
3
3
Chem. 9 Adv. Organic
Chem. 16 Engineering -.
Met. 2 General -
203
203
240
2
2
2
3
2
2
2
3
Thesis
12
15
II. Chemistry
The aim of this course is to train the students in the practice
of Chemistry, and to give a thorough knowledge in the fundamental principles of this subject, that they may be prepared to
assist in the solution of problems of value to the industrial
and agricultural life of the Province. The course is arranged
to give in the first two years a knowledge of the fundamental 170
Faculty of Applied Science
principles of Chemistry and Physics, with sufficient mathematics
to enable the theoretical parts of the subject to be understood.
In the Fourth Year, Analytical, Organic, and Physical
Chemistry are studied from the scientific side and in relation to
technology; while in the Fifth Year a considerable amount of
time is devoted to a short piece of original work.
Fourth Year
Subject.
a ■■
» S
Q *
t. *
S. CO
First Term.
3s=
•5 s
3»
Second Term.
KM
H
§a-
Essay
Econ. 1 Introductory
Chem. 3 Organic '....
Chem. 4 Theoretical
Chem. 5 Adv. Analysis
Met. 1 Introductory
Geol. 2(a) Mineralogy.
Met. 5 Assaying
German (Arts) B ..
Physics 7 Light
167
215
201
201
201
240
222
241
148
243
Fifth Year
S "
I*
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
a> aj
H
*5£
sg,.
S2 8
fa ^
2 °vJ
°* » *
fee*
•S °
3«
Bacteriology 1 (Arts)
Physics 12 Advanced
Chem. 6 Industrial
Chem. 7 Physical
167
91
155
202
202
202
203
240
2
2
2
2
2
2
7
3
3
3
9
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
Chem. 8 Electro-
Chem. 9 Adv. Organic
Met. 2 General
Thesis
3
3
IS Courses in Applied Science 171
III. Civil Engineering
The broad field covered by Civil Engineering makes it an
adjunct of many other branches of engineering, yet the Civil
Engineer occupies a distinctive field and is intimately associated
with a wide group of undertakings vitally affecting the health,
comfort and prosperity of the commonwealth.
The various branches of Civil Engineering deal with problems in water supply and water purification; in sewerage systems, sewage disposal plants, and the handling of municipal and
industrial wastes; in hydraulic power development; in irrigation
and drainage for agricultural activities; in all types of structures, bridges and buildings, piers and docks, sea walls and
protective works; in transportation, canals, locks, highways,
electric and steam railways; and in the management and direction of public works, public utilities, industrial and commercial
enterprises.
The course in Civil Engineering is designed to provide,
in so far as time will permit, foundations for continued growth
along those lines which the student's interests and environment
determine, without compelling too early specialization. Training
in pure and applied science, in the humanities, in economics and
engineering law, and in the technical phases of professional
work establishes a broad basis for the stimulation of a sincere
spirit of public service and for the development of that capacity
for reliable work and judgment which makes safe the assumption
of responsibilities.
The methods of instruction are planned with the view of
bringing out the powers and initiative of the students while
training them in habits of accurate analysis and careful work.
Students are encouraged to secure summer work which will
give them an insight into the various phases of the career upon
which they are about to enter, and the summer essays lay the-
foundation for the ability to set forth, in clear and precise-
language, descriptions and analyses of projects and engineering-
activities. In the Fifth Year thesis an opportunity is given
for special investigation and research under the supervision off
experienced engineers. 172
Faculty of Applied Science
Fourth Year
Subject.
a ■■
'3 Si
« J?
(, OQ
First Term.
Sv at
3a
Second Term.
'8
°-4
jM
Essay
CE. 8 Foundations
CE. 9 Elementary Design.
CE. 10 Strength of Mtls...
C.E. 11 Railways
CE. 12 Hydraulics
CE. 13 Mapping
CE. 14 Surveying
CE. 15 Drawing
M.E. 6(b) Laboratory
E.E. 1 General
Econ. 1* Introductory
CE. 16 Surveying
CE. 21 Water Power
CE. 28 Seminar
167
205
206
206
207
207
208
208
208
229
232
215
208
210
213
Field Work
3
3
•Economics 1 in Arts will be accepted in lieu of the Science Course.
Fifth Year
Subject.
a ■■
■a *
First Term.
u
V
S8
J*
I
Second Term.
$•8
h3 v
t»
Ml
CE. 17 Structural Design
C.E. 18 Engineering Economics
CE. 19 Law—Contracts
CE. 20 Geodesy
CE. 22 Municipal
CE. 23 Transportation
CE. 24 Mechanics of Mtls
CE. 25 Theory of Structures
CE. 26 Trips.
CE. 27 Thesis
CE. 28 Seminar ,
C.E. 29 Hydraulic Machines
167
209
209
209
210
210
211
212
212
213
213
213
213
Required Sat A.
I 3
M. Courses in Applied Science
173
IV. Electrical Engineering
This course is designed for those students who desire a
general training in the theory and practice of Electrical Engineering. The Fourth Year of the course is devoted to the
study of the basic principles of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering, and is intended to prepare the student for the more
specialized courses which are given in the Fifth Year. In the
Fifth Year an intensive course in all the important branches of
Design, Transmission, Electro-Technology, Radio and Electric
Traction, is given, together with thorough laboratory work in
most of these subjects.
Fourth Year
Subject.
£1
Firit Term.
III
Second Term.
|BI
Essay .:
E.E. 2 Direct Current Technology
E.E. 3 Elementary AC Technology...
E.E. 4 Direct Current Machine
Design.
Math. 8 or 9 (Adv. Calculus)
M.E. 3 Kinematics
M.E. 7 Heat Engines
M.E. 4 Dynamics _
E.E. 5 Electrical and Magnetic Measurements and Instruments..
E.E. 6 Electrical Problem Course
CE. 12 Hydraulics
5 Machine Design.....
5(a) Problem Course in
Strength of Materials
and Design...
M.E.
M.E.
CE. 10 Strength of Materials...
167
233
234
234
226
228
229
228
234
235
207
228
229
206
8
8 174
Faculty of Applied Science
Fifth Year
Subject.
a .■
First Term.
•a «
■3 y
P *
fe 8
00.M
Sg, •
g&8
3a
167
2
3
235
235
2
2
235
231
2
238
3
3
236
2
236
2
226
3
236
3
6
237
1
Second Term.
►J I,
l?S
a«
Essay .-. „
E.E. 7 Design of Electrical
Machinery
E.E. 8 Electrical Traction
E.E. 9 Transmission and Distribution
of Electrical Energy
M.E. 15 Prime Movers
E.E. 14 Mechanical Design
E.E. 10 Electrical Problem Course
E.E. 11 Radio Telegraphy and
Radio Telephony
Math. 8 or 9 (Differential Equa. or
Adv. Calculus)
E.E. 12 Electro-technology...
E.E. 13 Transient Phenomena and
Oscillations
3
3
V. Forest Engineering
In British Columbia the forest industries, including logging
and the manufacture of lumber, pulp and paper, now lead all
others, and are rapidly expanding. They must always play a
very important part in the economy of the Province, because
seven-eighths of the productive land is absolute forest soil, that
will grow good timber but no other crop of value; and because
over half the remaining stand of saw-timber — the last big
reserve — of Canada is here. The development of these industries is requiring more and more the services of engineers, and
especially is this true in logging. Furthermore, most of the
forest land is owned by the public, and the management of these
vast estates is a task that will require constant growth on the
part of the government forest services.
This indicates very briefly the various fields of service open
to Forest Engineers, and for which the course of studies is
designed. Primarily the course is planned for the lumber
industry, and a major part of the time — apart from the preliminary foundation work — is devoted to the branches of Courses in Applied Science
175
engineering most used in it. In addition, the fundamental
subjects of forestry are covered. As in other engineering courses
the students are expected to obtain practical experience during
the summer vacations, this being an essential supplement to the
studies at the University.
Vancouver contains large sawmills, wood-working plants,
and plants for seasoning and preserving wood — more, in fact,
than any other plaee in the Province. Pulp mills, logging
operations and extensive forests are within easy reach. The
advantages of location are therefore exceptional. A special
feature is the affiliation of the Forest Products Laboratory of
Canada, maintained at the University by a co-operative arrangement with the Dominion Forestry Branch. A description of
this Laboratory and its activities is given in another part of this
calendar. It affords opportunities for instruction in testing the
mechanical properties of timber and other structural materials,
and facilities are now provided for experimental and demonstration work in wood seasoning.
Fourth Year
a ■■
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
S<2
at v
3 ""M
3 "•#
S 8
S " «
1*
k(«
%2*
3»
38
M a
1°*
S» -
Essay
167
F.E. 1 General Forestry
215
l
1
F.E. 2 Mensuration
215
1
4
1
4
F.E. 3 Protection
216
1
F.E. 4 Finance
216
2
Bot. 1 General Botany
197
2
2
2
2
Bot. 5 (b) Dendrology
198
1
2
1
2
E.E. 1 Fundamentals
232
2
2
2
2
CE. 8(a) Foundations
205
1
3
CE. 9 Structural Design
206
1
8
CE. 10 Strength Materials
206
2
3
2
3
CE. 11 Railways
207
2
2
CE. 13 Mapping
208
3
C.E. 14 Surveying
208
2
CE. 12 Hydraulics
207
1
3
1
3 176
Faculty of Applied Science
Fifth Year
Subject.
a*
5 8
First Term.
33
P* 91 «
I *
3«
Second Term.
111
3w
Essay
F.E. 5 Technology
F.E. 6 Organization...
F.E. 7 History
F.E. 8 Silviculture
F.E. 9 Lumbering
F.E. 10 Logging
F.E. 11 Milling
F.E. 12 Products
Bot 6(b) Pathology )
Zool. 7 Entomology )
Bot. 7(a) Ecology
CE. 17 Structural Design...
CE. 18 Economics
CE. 19 Law
M.E. 6(b) Steam Lab
167
216
217
217
217
218
218
218
219
199
249
249
209
209
209
229
2
1
1
2
2
.}
3
3
4
2
8
VI. Geological Engineering
This course is designed to meet the requirements of students
who intend to enter Geology as a profession.
It gives a broad training not only in Geology, but also in
the sciences of Biology, Chemistry, Physics, and Mathematics,
which are extensively applied in the solution of geological
problems. The engineering subjects are useful not only to the
Mining and Consulting Geologist and the Geological Surveyor,
but to the Geologist engaged in original research in any branch
of the science.
The course therefore furnishes a foundation for the professions of Mineralogist, Geological Surveyor, Mining Geologist,
Consulting Geologist, Palaeontologist, Geographer, etc., and is
useful for those who will be in any way connected with the
discovery or development of the natural resources of the country.
As a supplement to the work in the classroom, laboratory
and field during the session, the student is expected to obtain
practical experience during the summer vacations. Courses in Applied Science
177
Students are advised to become student members of the
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
Fourth Year
Subject.
First Term.
V a-
in
3«
Second Term.
V V
I*
Ik
IF
Essay
Geol. 2 Mineralogy
Geol. 3 Historical
Geol. 4 Structural
Geol. 5 Regional
Chem. 4 Theoretical
Econ. 1 (Arts)
Min. 1 Metal Mining
Met. 5 Fire Assaying .,
Met 1 General
Ore Dressing 1 General.
Zool. 1
CE. 13 Mapping
Chem. 5* Adv. Analysis
Met. 6* Wet Assaying
167
221
222
222
223
201
108
238
241
240
241
249
208
201
241
'Either Chem. 5 or Met. 6 must be taken.
Fifth Year
a ■•
oo to)
|2
t. *
5 2.
First Term.
Second Term.
Subject. ^
oo M
18
3|
Laboratory
Hours per
Week.
H
Hi 1
Laboratory
Hours per
Week.
Geol. 7 Petrology
CE. 18 Engr. Economics
Geol. 10 Field
Min. 2 Coal and Placer
Min. 3 Metal Mining
Min. 5 Surveying
167
223
223
224
209
224
224
238
239
239
240
242
2
2
3
2
2
2
1
2
2
4
1
2
3
3
4
2
2
3
2
2
2
2
2
4
1
2
3
Met. 2 Smelting
Ore Dressing 2 Laboratory
Thesis
3
5 178 Faculty of Applied Science
VII. Mechanical Engineering
The course in Mechanical Engineering has been designed
to give the student a thorough knowledge of the theory and
application of those basic subjects which are essential in this
branch of Engineering.
With this in view stress has been laid upon such subjects
as Mathematics, Physics, Applied Mechanics, Strength of Materials, Applied Thermodynamics and Hydraulics. Graduates
of this course are therefore qualified to enter upon any of the
many specialized branches of this profession, especially in
British Columbia, whose rapid industrial development demands
Mechanical Engineers prepared to attack a great diversity of
problems.
Although fundamentally general in character the course
embodies design of prime movers, mechanical electrical and
hydraulic, machinery design, power plant operation and design
and the testing of engines and power plants, thus giving sufficient specialized training in Mechanical Engineering to enable
students to enter the field of design or research should they
so desire.
Students following this course are given a general course
in the fundamentals of Electrical Engineering.
Governed by the fact that values and costs are controlling
factors in the practice of Engineering, the subjects of the final
years are treated with a view to developing a business sense,
an understanding of men and the ability to report clearly on
industrial problems. This demands a study of Economics, the
use of good English and the participation in outside industrial
work during vacation. Courses in Applied Science
179
Fourth Year
a-
3|
fa"
First Term
Second Term
Subject
3S
to §)
S v
C.E. 10 Strength of Materials
206
228
228
228
229
229
231
233
207
226
226
167
2
2
2
2
3
1
3
1
3
3
3
3
2
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
1
3
1
3
3
M.E. 5(a) Problems in Materials
and Design -
M.B. 7 Heat Engines
3
3
M.E. 13 Physical Treatment on
Metals
E.E. 2 and 3 General _.
2
3
CE. 12 Hydraulics
3
Math. 8 Advanced Calculus or 1
Math. 9 Differential Equations )
Essay
Fifth Year
Subject
1ST
First Term
IC^
a0*
1!
2§S
Second Term
•r.M
fl> QJ
•-1 Q.
CBJB
M.E. 8 Steam Turbines
M.E. 9 Internal Combustion
M.E. 10 Refrigeration
*M.E. 11 Heating and Ventilation
M.E. 12 Power Plant Design
M.E. 15 Prime Movers
M.E. 16 Machine Design
M.E. 17 Mechanics of Materials
*M.E. 18 Aeronautics -
M.E. 19 Problems in Mech. and
Elec. Eng.
E.E. 14 General
Math. 9 Differential Equations or
Math 8 Adv. Calculus
Essay
230
n
230
ii
5
230
ij
230
i
231
i
3
231
2
231
3
5
232
2
232
1
232
2
238
2
5
226
226
3
167
"Alternative subjects. 180 Faculty of Applied Science
VIII.-IX. Metallurgical and Mining Engineering
Modern Metallurgical practice covers a wide and expanding
field. The Metallurgical Engineer has to design and operate a
great variety of plants and processes. He must be able to deal
with furnace and solution processes, based on chemical principles,
and mechanical crushing and separating processes, based on
physical principles, together with an immense variety of principal and auxiliary machinery, from small to immense, used in
the separation and refining of ores, artificial mineral products
and metals. The whole forms a keenly competitive and strictly
commercial industry, based on, and closely limited by, the
practical economic considerations of costs and profits. Rapid
and continuous change and improvement is the rule. Methods
and machines quickly become obsolete. The field for research
and improvement in methods and machinery is ever widening,
though the economic margin is ever narrowing.
The Metallurgical course, in the Fourth and Fifth Years,
based on the fundamental earlier years, is designed to give the
student a broad general knowledge of standard metallurgical
methods and machinery, with a fundamental grasp of the actual
applications of the basic sciences in practical metallurgical
operations, also sufficient laboratory practice to illustrate and
fix these in his mind and train him for an actual junior position
after graduation.
Modern mining operations cover a field notable for its
breadth and variety. The discovery, steadily becoming more
difficult, and the development, steadily becoming more scientific,
of new mineral deposits are based largely on a knowledge of
the laws and processes of Nature, ultimately physical and
chemical, but, immediately, chiefly geological in kind. On
the other hand, the operations of actual mining are largely
mechanical in kind, and call for use and knowledge of mechanical
and electrical equipment, adapted to underground methods and
conditions.
The conditions under which mining operations are carried
on are often of great natural difficulty, and many of the factors
to be dealt with are, to a large extent, obscure or indefinite Courses in Applied Science 181
oftener than measureable. The qualities of good judgment and
decision are therefore of great importance in the application
of technical knowledge to mining. As in metallurgy, economic
considerations are paramount.
The Mining course is correspondingly broad in scope. In
addition to the fundamental sciences, it includes fundamental
subjects in Civil, Electrical and Mechanical Engineering,
Economics and Economic Geology.
The special mining subjects cover the underlying principles
and practice on which the discovery, development and economic
operation of mines are based, the practical application of
technical knowledge to actual operations, and the use of judgment and decision, by precept, example and illustration. Sufficient practical training and laboratory work are included to fit
the student for an actual junior position after graduation.
While not given as separate subjects, the social, administrative
and ethical sides of the professions of Mining and Metallurgy
are included in the general treatment of appropriate subjects.
In this University, emphasis is naturally placed on British
Columbia conditions and its chief mineral products, namely:
Gold, Silver, Lead, Zinc, Copper, Coal and Coke.
The University is conveniently located in proximity to coal
and metal mining districts, large coal and metal mining operations being carried on within a few hours' journey, in connection
with which there are large washing and ore concentration plants.
There is a large metallurgical plant at Tacoma, within an easy
day's journey. Students have little difficulty in obtaining
positions in mines or smelters during their vacation, as several
of the larger companies have established the practice of accepting
student employees in reasonable numbers during the vacation
months.
Students are recommended to spend their vacations at
practical works, in connection with Metallurgy or Mining, and
are required to do so between the Fourth and Fifth Years as
an essential part of their course, without which a degree will
not be granted. An essay covering this work is also required,
as specified in the Fifth Year curriculum. 182
Faculty of Applied Science
Students are advised to become student members of the
Canadian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy.
VIII. Metallurgical Engineering
Fourth Year
Subject.
I*
First Term.
o a, .
£ oa 91
life
3b
Second Terra.
&
IS*
3«
Essay
Econ. 1
CE. 9 Elem. Design
CE. 10 Str. of Materials
CE. 12 Hydraulics
CE. 13 Mapping
M.E. 6(b) Laboratory
Geol. 2 Mineralogy
E.E. 1 General
Min. 1 Metal Mining
Ore Dressing 1 General
Met. 1 General
Met. 5 Fire Assay
Met 6 Wet Assay
167
215
206
206
207
208
239
221
232
238
241
240
241
241
Fifth Year
2 ■»
tS00
First '
rerm.
Second
Terra.
Subject.
5 «
O Q. .
£ tt **
■SJs
3fe
in
3«
Geol. 9 Mineralography
C.E. 18 Engr. Economics
167
224
224
209
202
242
239
240
240
240
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
3
9
9
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
Chem. 8 Electro-
3
9
Min. 3 Metal Mining
Met. 2 Smelting
Met. 3 Calculations
Met. 4 Analysis
9 Courses in Applied Science
183
IX. Mining Engineering
Fourth Year
As in Metallurgical Engineering. (See Page 182.)
Fifth Year
First
Term.
Seconc
Term.
a ■■
& en
3 E
Subject.
Q *
S&*
v <u
!°*
w> *
2 « g
3£
gBS
£«
Ii*
•2§*
" a
3«
w 0.
3»
167
Geol. 7 Petrology
223
2
4
2
4
Geol. 8 Economic
224
209
209
3
2
1
1
3
2
1
1
C.E. 18 Engr. Economics
CE. 19 Engr. Law
Met 2 Smelting
240
2
2
242
9
9
Min. 2 Coal and Placer
238
2
2
Min. 3 Metal Mining
239
2
2
Min. 4 Machinery
239
2
2
Min. 5 Surveying
239
1
Min. 7 Methods
239
1
Min. 6 Design |
239
3
3
Short Courses in Mining
The regular Short Courses in Mining for the Session commence on the second Monday in January, and continue for eight
weeks. These courses include Mining, Smelting, Ore Concentration, Geology and Ore-deposits, Mineralogy and Rock Study,
Fire Assaying, Chemistry, and Surveying.
The courses are thoroughly practical in nature. They are
not primarily intended for those who have had a technical
training, but rather for those who have had practical experience
in mining and prospecting, or are connected with the business of
mining in any way. The courses are designed to give practical
and technical knowledge, helpful in practical mining work and
mining business. "While they are short they are complete in themselves, and require no other preparation than a common-school
education or ability to read and write. 184 Faculty op Applied Science
Experience has shown that they fill a real need, and they
have proved very successful in the past.
As they do not form part of the regular University course,
a special bulletin is issued, in which details of the courses and
requirements for admission are given. Copies of this may be
obtained on application to the Registrar of the University.
These courses will not be given unless at least ten students
register for them.
X Nursing and Health
1. Nursing A.—A five-year undergraduate course. (See
below.)
2. Nursing B.—A graduate course of one academic year
in Public Health Nursing. (See Page 188.)
3. Nursing C.—A graduate course of one academic year in
Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing. (See Page
189.)
Registration for these courses will be subject to the general
University Regulations (see Pages 45-47) and to the special
requirements of the Department.
All regulations are subject to change from year to year, and
subjects or courses may be modified during the year as the
Faculty may deem advisable.
Nursing A (Five-year Undergraduate Course)
This is a five-year combined course leading to the Degree of
B.A.Sc. (Nursing) and to the Diploma in Nursing of an associated hospital. It is given by the University in co-operation
with the Schools of Nursing of associated hospitals, which means
those that have signified their willingness to supply the professional part of the course, and have received the approval of the
University Senate for that purpose. Up to the present time the
Vancouver General is the only hospital which has entered into
association with the University to this end.
The course is open to applicants who meet the general requirements mentioned above, and who, in the opinion of the
Department, are personally fitted for the profession of nursing.
In addition they must satisfy the entrance requirements of the Courses in Applied Science
185
associated Hospital Schools of Nursing; the individual applicant must make her arrangements for admission to the associated
hospital directly with the Superintendent of Nurses and in
advance of the opening of the University term.
The aim of the five-year combined course is to afford a
broader education than can be given by the Hospital Schools of
Nursing alone, and thus to build a sound foundation for those
who desire to fit themselves for Teaching and Supervision in
Schools of Nursing or for Public Health Nursing service.
The First and Second Years, which are academic, give the
students an introduction to general cultural subjects and a
foundation in the sciences underlying the practice of nursing.
Between the First and Second years a probationary period of
four months will be spent in an associated Hospital School of
Nursing. The Third and Fourth Years are devoted to professional training in an Associated Hospital, and are planned to
afford experience and training in the care of the sick, and to
develop the skill, observation and judgment necessary to the
efficient practice of nursing. The Fifth Year affords two alternative courses, one in Public Health Nursing (Nursing B) and the
second in Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing
(Nursing C).
First Year (Academic)
s'i
First
Term.
Second Term.
Subject.
£8
Bl
&*-
1*
!^*
3«
1*
3s§
English 1 (a)
119
2
2
English 1 (b)
120
2
2
Choice of Mathematics 1
140
or Latin 1
106
or French 1
145
3
3
or History 1, 2, or 3
132
Physics 1 or 2
152
3
2
3
2
Chemistry 1
m
3
3
3
3
Biology 1
93
2
2
2
2
Nursing 1
244
1
1 186
Faculty of Applied Science
Probationary Period (Hospital)
It is expected that the probationary period of four months
(to be spent in an associated hospital), will be taken between
the first and second academic years. The student must, however, meet the admission requirements of the associated Hospital
School of Nursing (which requirements each student will learn
upon making application to the School). The student must have
attained such age as may be fixed by the associated Hospital
School of Nursing—in the Vancouver General Hbspital School
of Nursing the eighteenth birthday must be passed; and her
academic standing must be acceptable to the associated Hospital
School of Nursing.
During this period the student will undergo rigid examination as to fitness in physique, temperament and character for
the practice of nursing. This will afford the Hospital School of
Nursing information upon which to judge the students' qualifications for the profession of nursing. It also enables the student
to determine whether she feels herself personally fitted or inclined to proceed in the course. The Hospital Schools of Nursing
reserve the right to reject candidates who do not reach the
required standards.
Second Year (Academic)
Bubject.
First Term.
3&m
3a
Second Term.
I -a
g S £
■9§£
English 2(a)
English 2(b)
Zoology 1 _
Philosophy 1
Economics 1
Bacteriology 1...
Bacteriology 2...
Nursing 2
Anatomy and Physiology...
120
120
157
149
108
91
92
245
245
Third and Fourth Years (Professional)
The Third and Fourth Years will be spent in practical
training in an associated Hospital School of Nursing. Students Courses in Applied Science 187
in these years are required to register with the University even
though during this portion of the course they are in residence
at the Hospital. During these professional years students are
subject to the authority and are under the direction of the
officers of the associated Hospital Schools of Nursing. The
required professional period is twenty-eight months, in which
is included the probationary period of four months. Full maintenance and such allowance as the associated Hospital authorities
may designate are accorded, and a yearly vacation of three
weeks is granted at the convenience of the Superintendent of the
School of Nursing.
Instruction in the following Nursing subjects is given by
members of the medical staff of the associated Hospital and by
qualified nurse instructors: Introductory Ethics of Nursing;
Practical Nursing Procedure; Elementary Nutrition and
Cookery; Drugs and Solutions; Materia Medica; Surgical
Nursing; Medical Nursing (including charting); Gynecological
Nursing; Nursing of Communicable Diseases; Obstetrical Nursing; Diet in Disease; Pediatric Nursing and Infant Feeding;
Nursing in Diseases of the Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat; Nursing in
Tuberculosis; Urinalysis; Introduction to Anaesthesia; Introduction to Physiotherapy and X-Ray.
This schedule is open to change at any time, at the discretion of the associated Hospital School of Nursing.
The period of Hospital service includes actual nursing
experience in the following departments:
Medical. Operating Room.
Surgical. Eye, Ear, Nose and Throat.
Gynecological. Obstetrical.
Pediatric and Orthopaedic. Infectious.
Observation and Neurological. Tuberculosis.
Infants. Diet Kitchen.
The Social Service Department of the Hospital offers opportunity for a four weeks' service to a limited number of students.
Selection will be made by the Superintendent of Nurses from
the students desirous of receiving this course. 188
Faculty op Applied Science
Fifth Year (Academic and Professional)
The Fifth Year will be spent in either Nursing B or Nursing
C, at the option of the student. The selection between these
courses need not be made until registering with the University for
the Fifth Year.
Nursing B (Public Health Nursing)
A graduate course of one academic year, including work in
the University and appropriate field work under the supervision
of the various associated Public Health organizations. This
course leads to a Certificate in Public Health Nursing.
Nursing B (Public Health Nursing)
Subject
For Details
Total Hour*
Total Hours
See Page:
Lectures
Laboratory
245
21
245
21
245
11
245
3
245
11
245
*
246
11
246
5
246
15
246
4
246
4
246
18
247
34
6
247
2
247
16
247
18
247
13
248
6
248
3
248
11
248
16
248
34
248
18
248
21
248
16
248
10
To run c
mcurrently
189
with the
academic
work.
Preventable Diseases
■Epidemiology
Tuberculosis
■Venereal Diseases
Mental Hygiene
Bacteriology
Infant Welfare
Orthopedics
Public Health
Public Health Administration
Public Health Organizations
Vital Statistics
Principles and Practice of Public
Health Nursing
Rural Public Health Nursing
Urban Visiting Nursing Programme
Health Education
History of Nursing and Contemporary
Nursing Problems
School Hygiene
Social Case Work _
Hospital Social Service
Metabolism and Nutrition
Psychology for Nurses
Principles of Education Applied to
Teaching
Public Speaking and Parliamentary
Procedure
Sociology
Geography 10
Motor Mechanics
Field Work
•Hours to be arranged. Courses in Applied Science
189
Nursing C (Teaching and Supervision)
A graduate course of one academic year, including work in
the University, and opportunity for practice teaching and for
the observation of Training School administration and ward
supervision in associated Hospitals. This course leads to a
Certificate in Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing.
Nursing C
Subject
See Page:
For Detail*
Total Hours
Lectures
Total Hours
Laboratory
Preventable Diseases...
Mental Hygiene
Bacteriology
Infant Welfare
Orthopedics.
History of Nursing and Contemporary
Nursing Problems
Teaching in Schools of Nursing
Principles of Supervision in Schools
of Nursing
Metabolism and Nutrition
Psychology for Nurses
Principles of Education Applied to
Teaching...
Public Speaking and Parliamentary
Procedure
Sociology
Electives from Nursing B or from
related Science Courses
Field Work...
245
245
245
246
246
247
247
247
248
248
248
248
248
Below
21
11
11
5
18
34
16
11
16
34
18
21
•Hours to be arranged.
Field Work in Nursing B and C
Through the courtesy and co-operation of the following
agencies arrangements have been made for supervised field work,
or observation:
FOR NURSING B
Vancouver General Hospital.—The Social Service Department, Miss M. McLennan, Director. 190 Faculty of Applied Science
The Provincial Department of Health.—Dr. H. E. Young,
Provincial Health Officer.
The Victorian Order of Nurses.—Miss M. Duffield, District
Superintendent.
The Medical Department of the Vancouver Public Schools.—
Dr. H. White, Medical Director; Miss E. Breeze, Director, School
Hygiene.
The Vancouver Rotary Clinic for Diseases of the Chest.—
Dr. H. A. Rawlings, Director.
The Department of Child Hygiene, City of Vancouver.—
Dr. F. T. Underhill, City Health Officer; Miss L. Sanders,
Supervisor, Department of Child Hygiene.
The Government Venereal Disease Clinic.—Dr. J. Ewart
Campbell, Director; Miss E. V. Cameron, Nurse in charge.
The Provincial Mental Hospital, Essondale.—Dr. A. L.
Crease, Medical Superintendent.
FOR NURSING C
The Vancouver General Hospital.—Dr. F. C. Bell, Superintendent; Miss K. W. Ellis, Superintendent of Nurses.
The academic work and field work will run concurrently
throughout the two University terms, with the exception of the
last four weeks of the Second Term which, in Nursing B, will be
devoted entirely to field work under the supervision of the
Provincial Rural Public Health Nursing organizations and, in
Nursing C, to such Hospital Service as may be arranged by the
Associated Hospitals. Field work for some students may have
to be delayed until after the close of the University year.
During the period spent in the Hospital, all students will
be subject to the authority, and under the direction, of the officers
of the Associated Hospital School of Nursing.
Adequate opportunity for observation, as well as for
practice, is thus afforded in all of the more important fields
of Public Health Nursing and in the field of Teaching and Supervision in Schools of Nursing. Courses in Applied Science 191
Admission to Nursing B and C
The courses are open to students of the five-year course,
and also to nurses who have graduated from recognized Schools
of Nursing, who are eligible for registration in British Columbia
and who are personally fitted for their proposed work. For
Nursing C it is also required that applicants shall fulfil the
University Educational requirement of Junior Matriculation.
Applications for admission to the courses of Nursing B or C
should be sent to the Department of Nursing and Health not
later than July 15th of the current year. A certificate of good
health and physical condition, signed by a regular practising
physician, must be presented with the applications.
As a preparation for Nursing B, nurses without previous
Public Health Nursing service are advised to obtain at least one
month's experience in a visiting nursing agency, or other public
health or social agency approved by the Department. While not
obligatory, this month is most important, and various Field
Agencies—the Provincial Board of Health, the Vancouver
General Hospital Social Service Department and the Victorian
Order of Nurses, have each agreed to receive nurses for this
month in so far as it can be arranged. Inquiry should be made
at as early a date as possible to the Department of Nursing and
Health that arrangements may be made with the Field Agencies.
Nurses will be responsible for their own maintenance, and will
receive no remuneration during this period.
Nurses registering for Nursing C who have had no experience in family case-work, social service or visiting nursing, are
also advised to secure this month's experience with one of the
Public Health organizations if possible.
For the convenience of graduate nurses already engaged in
nursing, who wish to take Nursing B or C, but are unable to take
a year off, provision is made that either one may be taken as a
part-time course over a period of two or more years. Nurses
registering in this way must fulfil the same requirements as th*
regular-course students. 192 Faculty of Applied Science
DOUBLE COURSE FOR THE DEGREES OF B.A.
AND B.A.SC.
The requirements for the first and second years are as set
forth in the Calendar for the first and second years of Arte
(Pages 72-74) except as follows:
1. Physics 1 or 2, Mathematics 2 (c) (Calculus) and
Chemistry 1 must be taken. The passing grade for each
of these subjects is fifty per cent. (See also, admission
to Applied Science, Page 162).
2. Biology 1, Chemistry 2, Mathematics 2 (a) and 2 (b),
and Physics 3 or 5 or 6 may not be taken. These subjects are covered later in Applied Science.
3. A course in German is recommended (and, for those
intending to enter Geological or Civil Engineering,
French also).
The third, four, fifth and sixth years of the double course
correspond to the second, third, fourth and fifth years of
Applied Science. The degree of B.A. is conferred on completing
the fifth year of this course.
COURSES LEADING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A.Sc.
1. Candidates for the degree of Master of Applied Science
must hold a B.A.Sc. degree from this University, or its
equivalent.
2. A graduate of another university applying for permission
to enter as a graduate student is required to submit with his
application an official statement of his graduation together with
a certificate of the standing gained in the several subjects of
his course. The Faculty will determine the standing of such a
student in this University. The fee for examination of certificates is $2.00. Courses in Applied Science 193
3. Candidates with approved degrees and academic records
who proceed to the Master's degree shall be required:
(a.) To spend one year in resident graduate study; or
(b.) (At the discretion of the Faculty concerned) :
(i.) To do two or more years of private work
under the supervision of the University,
such work to be equivalent to one year of
graduate study; or
(ii.) To do one year of private work under
University supervision and one term of
resident graduate study, the total of such
work to be equivalent to one year of
resident graduate study.
4. One major and one minor shall be required and a thesis
must be prepared on some approved topic in the major subject.
(Two typewritten copies of each thesis shall be submitted. See
special circular of "Instructions for the Preparation of Masters'
Theses").
The choice of and relationship between major and minor
subjects, and the amount of work in each, or of tutorial work,
must be approved by each of the departments concerned, by the
Committee on graduate studies, and by the Dean.
In the case of students who have completed the Teacher
Training Course, First or Second Class standing in each of
(1) History and Principles of Education, and in (2) Educational Psychology, is accepted as equivalent to a Minor for an
M.A.Sc. degree, subject in each case to the consent of the Head
of the Department in which the student wishes to take his
Major.
6. Examinations, written or oral, or both, shall be required,
and a standing equivalent to at least 75 per cent, in the major
subjects and 65 per cent, in the minor.
7. Application for admission as a graduate student shall
be made to the Registrar by October 15th. For fees see Page 48. 194 Faculty op Applied Science
EXAMINATIONS AND ADVANCEMENT
1. Examinations are held in December and in April.
December examinations will be held in all subjects of the Second
and Third Years, and are obligatory for all students of these
years. December examinations in subjects of the Fourth and
Fifth Years, excepting those subjects that are completed before
Christmas, shall be optional with the Departments concerned.
Applications for special consideration on account of illness or
domestic affliction must be submitted to the Dean not later than
two days after the close of the examination period. In cases
where illness is the plea for absence from examinations, a medical certificate must be presented on the appropriate form which
may be obtained from the Dean's office.
2. Candidates in order to pass must obtain at least 50 per
cent, in each subject. The grades are as follows: First Class,
an average of 80 per cent, or over; Second Class, 65 to 80 per
cent.; Passed, 50 to 65 per cent. But in the First and Second
Years of the course in Nursing and Health the requirements for
passing are the same as those for the First and Second Years
in Arts and Science. (See Page 88.)
3. If a student's general standing in the final examinations
of any year is sufficiently high, the Faculty may grant him
supplemental examinations in the subject or subjects in which
he has failed. Notice will be sent to all students to whom such
examinations have been granted.
4. Supplemental examinations will be held on September
17th, 18th, 19th and 20th. Special examinations will not be
granted, except by special permission of the Faculty, and on
payment of a fee of $7.50 per paper, and then only during the
third week in October or the second week of January.
5. Applications for supplemental examinations, accompanied
by the necessary fees (see Schedule of Fees Page 48), must be
in the hands of the Registrar at last two weeks before the date set
for the examinations.
6. No student may enter a higher year with supplemental
examinations still outstanding in respect of more than 4 unite Examinations and Advancement 195
of the preceding year, or with any supplemental examination
outstanding in respect of the work of an earlier year unless
special permission to do so is granted by Faculty. Such permission will be granted only when Faculty is satisfied that the
failure to remove the outstanding supplemental examinations
had an adequate cause. Students in Nursing A must remove
all outstanding supplemental examinations before entering
their third year.
7. No student will be allowed to take any subject unless he
has previously passed, or secured exemption, in all pre-requisite
subjects. If any subject has another which is concurrent with it,
both must be taken in the same session. ^^
8. A student who is not allowed to proceed to a higher year
may not register as a partial student in respect of the subjects
of that higher year. But a student who is required to repeat
his year will be exempted from attending lectures and passing
examinations in subjects in which he has already made at least
Second Class standing. In this case he may, '' on application
in writing," be permitted by the Faculty to take, in addition
to the subjects of the year which he is repeating, certain subjects of the following year, subject to the prerequisite requirements and the exigencies of the Time Table.
9. A student who fails twice in the work of the same year
may, upon the recommendation of the Faculty, be required by
the Senate to withdraw from the University.
10. Any student whose academic record, as determined by
the tests and examinations of the first term of the Second or
Third Year, is found to be unsatisfactory, may, upon the
recommendation of the Faculty, be required by the Senate to
discontinue attendance at the University for the remainder of
the session. Such a student will not be readmitted to the
University as long as any supplemental examinations are
outstanding.
11. Term essays and examination papers will be refused a
passing mark if they are noticeably deficient in English. 196 Faculty of Applied Science
DEPARTMENTS IN APPLIED SCIENCE
N.B.—The following subjects may be modified during the
year as the Senate may deem advisable.
Department of Botany
Professor: A. H. Hutchinson.
Associate Professor: Frank Dickson.
Assistant Professor: John Davidson.
Honorary Lecturer: William Newton.
Assistant: Jean Davidson.
Assistant: R. W. Pillsbury.
Assistant: Margaret Keillor.
Biology
1. Introductory Biology.—The course is introductory to
more advanced work in Botany or Zoology; also to courses closely
related to Biological Science, such an Agriculture, Forestry,
Medicine.
The fundamental principles of Biology; the interrelationships of plants and animals; life processes; the cell and division
of labour; life-histories; relation to environment.
Text-book: Smallwood, Text-book of Biology, Lea & Febiger,
1924.
The course is prerequisite to all other courses in Biology.
One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per
week.
2. Principles of Genetics.—The fundamentals of Genetics
illustrated by the race-histories of certain plants and animals;
the physical basis of heredity; variations; mutations; acquired
characters; Mendel's law with suggested applications.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Text-book: Castle, Genetics and Eugenics, Harvard Press.
Two lectures and one laboratory period per week. First
Term.
3. General Physiology of animal and plant life processes.
Open to students of Third and Fourth Years having prerequisite
Biology, Chemistry and Physics; the Department should be
consulted. Botany 197
Text-book: Bayliss, Principles of General Physiology,
Longmans-Green.
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per
week. Second Term.
Botany
1. General Botany.—A course including a general survey of
the several fields of Botany and introductory to more specialized
courses in Botany.
Prerequisite: Biology 1.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany.
Vol. I, University of Chicago Press.
This course is prerequisite to all courses in Botany
except the Evening Course. Partial credit (2 units) toward
Botany may be obtained through the Evening Course. (See
Page 98.)
Two lectures and one period of two hours laboratory per
week.
2. Morphology.
General Morphology of plants. A comparative study of
plant structures. The relationships of plant groups. Comparative
life histories. Emphasis is placed upon the increasing complexity of plant structures, from the lower to the higher forma
involving a progressive differentiation accompanied by an inter
dependence of parte.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-book: Coulter, Barnes & Cowles, Text-book of Botany,
Vol. I, University of Chicago Press.
Two lectures and two periods of two hours laboratory per
week. First Term.
3. Plant Physiology.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-book: Palladin, Plant Physiology, English Edition
(Translation of 6th Russian Edition), 1918, P. Blakiston.
Two lectures and two periods of two hours laboratory per
week. First Term. 198 . Faculty op Applied Science
4. Histology.—A study of the structure and development
of plants; methods of killing, fixing, embedding, sectioning,
staining, mounting, drawing, reconstructing. Use of microscope,
camera lucida; photo-micrographic apparatus.
Text-book: W. C. Stevens, Plant Anatomy, P. Blakiston.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per
week. Second Term.
5. Systematic Botany.
5. (a) Economic Flora.—An introduction to the classification of plants through a study of selected families of economic
plants of British Columbia; useful for food, fodder, medicine
and industrial arte; harmful to crops and stock. Weeds, and
poisonous plants. Methods of control.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-books: Jepson, Economic Plants of California, Jepson.
University of California. Thomas and Sifton, Poisonous Plants
and Weed Seeds, University of Toronto Press.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week. First
term.
5. (b) Dendrology.—A study of the forest trees of Canada,
the common shrubs of British Columbia, the important trees of
the United States which are not native to Canada. Emphasis
on the species of economic importance. Identification, distribution, relative importance, construction of keys.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-books: Morton & Lewis, Native Trees of Canada,
Dominion Forestry Branch Ottawa. Sudworth, Forest Trees of
the Pacific Slope, Superintendent of Documents, Washington,
D. C.; Davidson and Abercrombie, Conifers, Junipers and Yew,
T. F. Unwin.
One lecture and one period of two or three hours laboratory
or field work per week. Botany 199
5. (c) Descriptive Taxonomy.—An advanced course dealing with the collection, preparation and classification of "flowering plants." Methods of field herbarium and laboratory work.
Plant description, the use of floras, preparation of keys, identification of species. Systems of classification. Nomenclature.
Prerequisites: Botany 1 and 5 (a).
Text-books: Hitchcock, Descriptive Systematic Botany,
Wiley & Sons, N.Y.; Henry, Flora of Southern British Columbia, Gage & Co., Toronto.
One lecture and four hours laboratory per week. Second
Term.
6. (a) General Plant Pathology. — Identification and life-
histories of parasites causing plant-diseases; means of combating
them.
Prerequisite: Botany 1.
Text-book: Heald, Manual of Plant Diseases.
One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per
week. Second Term.
6. (6) Forest Pathology.—Nature, identification and control of the more important tree-destroying fungi and other plant
parasites of forests.
Text-book: Rankin, Manual of Tree Diseases, Macmillan.
One lecture and one period of two hours laboratory per
week during one-half of one term.
7. (a) Forest Ecology and Geography.—The inter-relationg
of forests and their environment; the biological characteristics of
important forest trees; forest associations; types and regions;
physiography.
Reference books: Whitford and Craig, Forests of British
Columbia, Ottaiva; Zon and Sparhawk, Forests of the World,
McGraw-Hill; Hardy, The Geography of Plants, Oxford University Press.
One lecture per week during one term. Field trips and
laboratory work during the session amounting to thirty hours,
one period per week. 200 Faculty of Applied Science
Department of Chemistry
Professor: R. H. Clark.
Professor of Analytical Chemistry: E. H. Archibald.
Associate Professor: W. F. Seyer.
Associate Professor: M. J. Marshall.
Assistant Professor: J. Allen Harris.
Assistant Professor: William Ure.
Instructor: John Allardyce.
Assistant: H. R. Lyle Streight.
Assistant: A. Ernest Morell.
Assistant: E. C. Hallonquist.
Assistant: F. L. Munro.
1. General Chemistry.—This course is arranged to give a
full exposition of the general principles involved in modern
Chemistry and comprises a systematic study of the properties of
the more important metallic and non-metallic elements and their
compounds, and the application of Chemistry in technology.
Text-book: Kendall, General Chemistry, Century Co.
Three lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per
week. ^ J
2. Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis.—During the first six weeks of
the term an additional lecture may be substituted for a part
of the laboratory work.
Text-book: A. A. Noyes, Qualitative Analysis, Macmillan.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory per
week.
(b) Quantitative Analysis.—This course embraces the more
important methods of gravimetric and volumetric analysis.
Text-book: Cumming & Kay, Quantitative Analysis,
Gurney & Jackson.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
One lecture and one period of three hours laboratory per
week.
Course (6) must be preceded by Course (a). Chemistry 201
3. Organic Chemistry.—This introduction to the study of
the compounds of carbon will include the method of preparation
and a description of the more important groups of compounds
in both the fatty and the aromatic series.
Chemistry 3 will also be given to those students taking
Chemistry 2, or those who have had the equivalent of Chemistry 2.
Text-books: Holleman-Walker, Text-book of Organic Chemistry, Wiley; Gatterman, The Practical Methods of Organic
Chemistry, Macmillan.
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per
week.
4. Theoretical Chemistry.—An introductory course on the
development of modern theoretical chemistry, including a study
of gases, liquids, and solids, solutions, ionization, and electrical
conductivity, thermochemistry, chemical equilibrium, kinetics
of reactions, colloids. ^^
Books recommended: Millard, Physical Chemistry for Colleges, McGraw-Hill; Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles,
Macmillan; for Laboratory use: Findlay, Practical Physical
Chemistry, Longmans.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2. Mathematics 2.
Two lectures and three hours' laboratory per week. Second
Term. iy2 unite.
5. Advanced Qualitative and Quantitative Analysis.
(a) Qualitative Analysis. — The work of this course will
include the detection and separation of the less common metals,
particularly those that are important industrially, together with
the analysis of somewhat complex substances occurring in
nature.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per
week. First Term.
(6) Quantitative Analysis.—The determinations made will
include the more difficult estimations in the analysis of rocks,
as well as certain constituents of steel and alloys. The principles 202 Faculty of Applied Science
on which analytical chemistry is based will receive a more minute
consideration than was possible in the elementary course.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2.
One lecture and two periods of three hours laboratory per
week. Second Term.
6. Industrial Chemistry. — Those industries which are
dependent on the facte and. principles of Chemistry will be
considered in as much detail as time will permit. The lectures
will be supplemented by visits to manufacturing establishments
in the neighbourhood, and it is hoped that some lectures will be
given by specialists in their respective fields.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 2 and 3. a
Two lectures per week.
7. Physical Chemistry.—This course is a continuation of
Chemistry 4 and treats in more detail the kinetic theory of
gases, properties of liquids and solids, elementary thermodynamics and thermochemistry, properties of solutions, theoretical electrochemistry, chemical equilibrium, kinetics of reactions,
radioactivity. \
Books recommended: Getman, Outlines of Theoretical
Chemistry, Wiley; Noyes and Sherrill, Chemical Principles,
Macmillan; for Laboratory: Sherrill, Laboratory Experiments
on Physico-Chemical Principles, Macmillan; Findlay, Practical
Physical Chemistry, Longmans.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 2, 3 and 4.
Two lectures and three hours' laboratory per week.
3 units.
8. Electrochemistry.—
(a) As in Arts. (See Page 101.)
(b) Electric furnaces, electrolytic refining and deposition of metals will be studied in detail.
Text-book: Thompson, Theoretical and Applied Electrochemistry, Macmillan.
Two lecture and three hours' laboratory per week. Second
Term. iy2 units. Chemistry 203
9. Advanced Organic Chemistry. — As in Arte. (See
Page 101.)
11. Physical Organic Chemistry.—As in Arts. (See Page
102.)
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years)
12. Colloid Chemistry.—As in Arts. (See Page 102.)
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years)
16. Chemical Engineering. — Theory and design of fractionating columns, condensers, multiple effect evaporators;
chamber, tunnel, drum, rotary and spray driers. Theory and
practice of technical filtration; calculation of capacity of box
filters, filter presses, centrifugals, etc. Principles of counter
current extraction.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 3 and 4.
Text-book: Walker, Lewis & McAdams, Principles of
Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill.
Reference books: Liddell, Handbook of Chemical Engineering, McGraw-Hill. Robinson, Elements of Practical Distillation.
McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week fl
The following firms have kindly permitted the students in
Chemical Engineering to work one day a week in their plants
as part of their practical training:
British Columbia Electric Railway Co. (Gas Department).
Sherwin-Williams Co. of Canada, Limited.
Royal Crown Soaps, Limited.
Imperial Oil Company, Limited.
B. C. Refractories, Limited.
Triangle Chemical Company, Limited.
Westminster Paper Mills.
Canadian Carbonate, Limited.
17. Chemical Thermodynamics. — As in Arts. See Page
103.)
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years) 204 Faculty of Applied Science
18. Advanced Inorganic Chemistry. — As in Arts. (See
Page 103.)
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years)
Department of Civil Engineering
Professor: Wm. E. Duckering.
Associate Professor: E. G. Matheson.
Assistant Professor: F. A. Wilkin.
Assistant Professor: A. H. Finlay.
Assistant Professor: A. Lighthall.
Instructor: A. G. Stuart.
Instructor: J. C. Oliver.
1. Descriptive Geometry. — Geometrical drawing; orthographic, isometric and axometric projections.
Text-book: Armstrong, Descriptive Geometry, second edition,
Wiley.
One three-hour period per week.
Mr. Matheson, Mr. Finlay, Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Stuart, Mr.
Oliver.
2. Field Work 1.—Elementary surveying. Practical problems involving the use of the chain, telemeter, compass, transit
and level. Traverses, closed circuits, contour and detail surveys.
Levels for profiles, benches and contours.
Work commences immediately upon the close of spring
examinations, and consists of field work, eight hours per day for
twenty days, or equivalent.
Mr. Stuart, Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Oliver.
4. Graphical Statics. — Elementary theory of structures;
composition of forces; general methods involving the force and
equilibrium polygons; determination of resultants, reactions,
centres of gravity, bending moments; stress in framed
structures, cranes, towers, roof-trusses and bridge-trusses.
Algebraic check methods will be used throughout.
Text-book: Hudson and Squire, Elements of Graphic
Statics, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Physics 6 must either precede or accompany
Civil 4.
One two-hour period per week. Mr. Finlay, Mr. Lighthall. Civil Engineering 205
5. Mapping 1.—Draughting from notes obtained in Civil 2.
Maps of telemeter, compass and transit surveys. Contour and
topographical maps in convention or color.
Prerequisite: Civil 2.
One three-hour period per week. Mr. Stuart.
6. Surveying 1. — Chain and angular surveying; the construction, adjustment and use of the transit, level, compass,
stadia, minor field instruments, planimeter, and pantograph;
leveling; topography; contour surveying; stadia; railway curves;
vertical curves; transition curves.
Prerequisite: Civil 2, Math. 1.
Text-book: Breed and Hosmer, Elementary Surveying,
Vol. I, Wiley.
References: Allen, Curves and Earthwork, McGraw-Hill;
Sullivan, Spiral Tables, McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Stuart.
7. Field Work 2.—(a) Railway surveys, reconnaissance,
preliminary and location surveys, methods of taking topography,
cross-sectioning; estimating quantities; running in easement and
vertical curves, etc. The notes secured will be used in class work
for mapping and for estimating quantities and costs.
(b) Hydrographie surveys, topography of a section of
river-bed by sounding and fixing position by transits and
sextants; the three-point problem; stream-gauging by surface
and deep floats and by the current meter.
(c) Solar and stellar observations for latitude and azimuth;
adjustments of instruments; the use of plane table, sextant and
minor instruments.
Prerequisite: Civil 2.
Time, same as for Civil 2.
Mr. Matheson, Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Lighthall.
8. Foundations and Masonry.— (a) Borings; bearing power
of soils; pile and other foundations; cofferdams; caissons; open
dredging; pneumatic and freezing processes; retaining walls;
estimates of quantities and costs. 206 Faculty of Applied Science
Prerequisite: Civil 4; Civil 10 must either precede or be
taken concurrently.
Text-book: Jacoby and Davis, Foundations of Bridges and
Buildings, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture and one three-hour period per week. First Term.
Mr. Matheson.
(6) Theory of Earth Pressure; combined stresses, ellipse
of stress, principal and conjugate axes, as applied to the determination of earth pressures; Rankine's Coulomb's, Wey-
rauch's, Cain's and Rebhann's theories and solutions for earth
pressure; retaining walls; dams.
Prerequisite: Civil 4; Civil 8a must be taken with 8b during
the First Term.
References: Ketchum, Walls, Bins and Grain Elevators;
Howe, Retaining Walls for Earth; Cain, Earth Pressure, Walls
and Bins; Morley, Theory of Structures.
One lecture per week each term. Mr. Matheson.
9. Structural Design 1.—Problems in draughting, illustrating designs in structural engineering; estimates of quantities
and costs; preparation of plans.
Text-book: Conklin, Structural Draughting and Elementary
Design, Wiley; Carnegie, Pocket Companion, Carnegie Steel Co.
Prerequisite: First Term of Civil 10.
One lecture and one three-hour period. Second Term.
Mr. Matheson.
10. Strength of Materials.—A thorough introduction to the
fundamental principles dealing with the strength of materials;
stress, deformation, elasticity and resilience; the application of
the laws of derived curves to the construction of load, shear,
moment, inclination and deflection diagrams, fibre stress, deflection of simple, cantilever, and continuous beams under any
loading; riveted joints; torsion; columns; combined stresses;
longitudinal shear; reinforced concrete; special beams. CrviL Engineering 207
The laboratory period includes the testing of cement, concrete, timber and steel specimens to determine the strength and
elasticity of these materials.
About one-half of the laboratory time will be set aside for
the solution of problems in investigation and design
Text-book; Maurer and Withey, Strength of Materials,
Wiley.
Reference: Swain, Strength of Materials; Morley, Strength
of Materials.
Prerequisites: Physics 6, Civil 4 and 31.
Two lectures and one three-hour period per week.
Mr. Duckering, Mr. Lighthall.
Note:—The laboratory testing is performed in the Forest
Products Laboratories, under the supervision of Superintendent
Brown and Mr. Lighthall. ^^^
11. Transportation 1. Railways.—The inception of railway
projects; reconnaissance, preliminary and location; grade problems; grades, curvature and distance and their effects upon
operating costs and revenue; velocity and pusher grades;
adjustment, of grades for unbalanced traffic; construction; railway economics, traffic, revenue, branch lines.
Prequisite: Civil 6 and 7.
Text-book: Williams, Design of Railway Location, Wiley.
Reference: Allen, Railroads, Curves and Earthwork,
McGraw-Hill; Wellington, Economic Theory of the Location of
Railways, Wiley.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Wilkin.
12. Hydraulic Engineering 1.—(a) Hydrostatics; design of
standpipes, reservoirs and dams.
(b) Hydrodynamics; fundamental principles and their
application to problems on the discharge of orifices, notches and
weirs; flow in pipes and open channels; practical field and
laboratory measurements; examination of hydraulic developments. 208 Faculty op Applied Science
Prerequisite: Physics 6.
Text-book: Russell, Hydraulics, Third Edition, Holt.
One lecture and one three-hour period per week.
Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Lighthall.
13. Mapping 2. — Draughting from notes obtained in
Civil 7; railway location and hydrographie surveys; topographic
maps from photographic plates.
One three-hour period per week. Mr. Oliver.
14. Surveying 2.—A continuation of Civil 6. (a) Theory
and use of aneroid, sextant, plane-table and precise instruments; plane-table surveying; mine, hydrographie and photo-
topographic surveying; Dominion and Provincial surveys. First
Term.
(6) Field astronomy. Second Term.
Text-book: Breed and Hosmer, Surveying, Vol. II, Wiley.
References: Johnson and Smith, Theory and Practice of
Surveying, Wiley; Wilson, Topographic, Trigonometric and
Geodetic Surveying, Wiley; Green's Practical and Spherical
Astronomy, Ginn and Co; Manual of Surveys of Dominion
Lands; Instructions for B. C. Land Surveyors.
Prerequisite: Civil 6.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Lighthall.
15. Perspective Drawing and Map Projections.—(a) Mathematical perspective; perspective drawings of buildings and
structures. First Term.
(b) Map projections. Second Term.
Prerequisite: Civil 1.
Text-book: Crosskey, Elementary Perspective, Blackie &
Son; Armstrong, Descriptive Geometry, Second Edition, Wiley.
Son.
One two-hour period per week. Mr. Lighthall.
16. Field Work 3.—Problems in geodetic and precise surveying ; determination of latitude, azimuth and time by solar and
stellar observations; baseline measurements; precise levelling.
Prerequisite: Civil 7.
Time, same as for Civil 2. Mr. Lighthall. Civil Engineering 209
17. Structural Design 2. — Selection of types of bridges;
determination of loadings; stresses; choice of cross-sectional
forms and areas; design of combination wood and steel trusses,
steel trusses; design of connections; masonry structures, dams
and retaining walls; complete drawings.
Text-book: Kuntz, Design of Steel Bridges, McGraw-Hill.
Reference: Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure, Modern Framed
Structures, Vol. Ill, Wiley; Kirkham, Structural Engineering,
McGraw-Hill; Carnegie, Pocket Companion.
Prerequisites: Civil 8, 9 and 10.
One lecture and two three-hour periods per week.
Mr. Matheson.
18. Engineering Economics.—(a) A general treatment of:
sinking funds; first cost; cost analysis; salvage and scrap values;
yearly cost of service; collecting data; estimating; economic
selection, reports.
Text-book: Fish, Engineering Economics, 2nd Ed., McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Economics 1.
Two lectures per week. First Term. Mr. Wilkin.
(b) Principles of financing; forms of business enterprises;
stocks; bonds; operating and fixed charges; business finance;
capital and interpretation of financial statements.
References: Fish, Engineering Economics, Second Edition.
Anger, Digest of Canadian Mercantile Law. Lough, Business
Finance.
Two lectures per week. Second Term. Mr. Wilkin.
19. Engineering Law.—The engineer's status; fees; salary;
as a witness; responsibility; engineering contracts; tenders;
specifications; plans; extras and alterations; time; payments and
certificates; penalty, bonus or liquidated damages; maintenance
and defects; subcontractors; agents; arbitration and awards;
specification and contract writing.
Text-book: Kirby, Elements of Specification Writing, Wiley
& Sons. 210 Faculty of Applied Science
References: Anger, Digest of Canadian Mercantile Law of
Canada, W. H. Anger; Ball, Law Affecting Engineers, Constable
and Co.
One lecture per week. Mr. Matheson.
20. Surveying 3.—Geodesy; the determination of azimuth,
longitude, latitude, time, the figure of the earth; measurement of
baselines; triangulation systems; adjustments and reductions
of observations; precise levelling.
References: Hosmer,Geodesy, Wiley; Cary, Geodetic Surveying, Wiley; Gillespie, Higher Surveying, D. Appleton and Co.
Prerequisite: Civil 14.
One lecture per week. Mr. Lighthall.
21. Hydraulic Engineering 2. — Waterpower engineering;
rainfall, runoff, stream flow; investigation of power problems;
selection of hydraulic machines; hydrographs; auxiliary power;
mass curves, load factors and characteristics; impulse and
reaction wheels; methods of control and operation of various
forms of machines; transmission of hydraulic power.
Text-books: Mead, Water-power Engineering, MrGraw-Hill.
References: Gibson, Hydroelectric Engineering, Volume I,
Blackie; Mead, Hydrology, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisites: Civil 12 must either precede or be taken concurrently.
One lecture per week, and fifteen hours in laboratory.
Second Term. Mr. Wilkin.
22. Municipal Engineering.—(a) Sewerage and Sewage
Disposal. General methods and economic consideration; quantity
and run-off; design of sewers, manholes, flushtanks, etc.; construction methods, materials and costs; estimate, design, maintenance and managemment.
Sewage Disposal: physical, chemical, biological and economical aspects of sewage treatment; dilution; screening, sedimentation, filtration; disinfection; maintenance and management costs.
First Term. Civil Engineering 211
References: Metcalf and Eddy, Sewerage and Sewage Disposal, McGraw-Hill; Fuller and McClintock, Sewage Problems,
McGraw-Hill.
(6) Water Supply, Rainfall; evaporation; run-off; quantity, quality and pressure required; pumping machinery;
storage; aqueducts, pipe lines and distribution systems; purification systems; valves, hydrants and fire service; materials,
estimates and designs; construction methods and costs. Second
Term.
References: Turneaure, Public Water Supply, 3rd Edition,
Wiley; Flinn, Westbrook, Bogart, Waterworks Handbook,
McGraw-Hill.
(c) Town Planning; covering the economical and artistic
development of a city, city management. Street cleaning and
disposal of waste; composition and quantity of city wastes;
collection, dumping and disposal; land treatment; incineration
and reduction; costs and returns. Second Term.
Reference: Lewis, City Planning, Wiley.
Prerequisite: Civil 12.
Two lectures and one two-hour period per week. Mr. Stuart.
23. Transportation 2. (a) Railways.—Organization and
rules of maintenance-of-way; roadway; ballast; ties; lumber
preservation; rails and appurtenances; turnouts, tracks, accessories ; structures and their design; stresses in track; track tools;
track work; work-train service; maintenance-of-way records and
accounts; expenditures; betterments; improvements of old lines,
yards and terminals; maximum capacity of single track.
Prerequisite: Civil 11.
Two lectures per week, First Term. Mr. Oliver.
(6) Highways.—Highway economics, surveys and locations;
grades; cross-sections; paving materials; construction methods;
designs and estimates.
Streets and pavements; materials, design, construction,
maintenance and repairs. 212 Faculty op Applied Science
Text-book: Agg, Construction of Roads and Pavements,
McGraw-Hill.
Reference: Harger and Bonney, Highway Engineer's Handbook.
Prerequisite: Civil 11.
Two lectures per week, Second Term. Mr. Oliver.
24. Mechanics of Materials. — A continuation of Civil 10,
Strength of Materials; the application of the Principle of Least
Work to the determination of statically indeterminate forces in
beams and rigid frames; stress and deflection of unsymmetrical
sections and beams with variable moment of inertia; analysis
and design of reinforced concrete beams, slabs, columns, and
reinforced concrete arches.
Text-book: Hool and Kinne, Concrete Engineer's Handbook, McGraw-Hill.
References: Ketchum, Steel Mill Buildings; Hool, Reinforced Concrete, Vol. Ill; Urquhart and O'Rourke, Design
of Concrete Structures, McGraw-Hill
Prerequisite: Civil 10.
Two lectures and one three-hour period per week.
Mr. Duckering.
25. Theory of Structures.—The analysis of statically determinate framed structures under dead and live loads; distortion
of framed structures; the use of influence lines for analysis of
stresses and deflections; hinged and hingeless arches; secondary
stresses and redundant members.
Text-book: Kuntz, Design of Steel Bridges, McGraw-Hill.
References: Johnson, Bryan and Turneaure, Modern
Framed Structures, Vols. I and II, Wiley; Hool and Kinne,
Framed Structures, McGraw-Hill; Morley, Theory of Structures,
Longmans Green and Co.
Prerequisite: Civil 10.
One lecture and two three-hour periods per week.
Mr. Finlay. Civil Engineering 213
26. Class Excursions.—Members of the Fifth Year class
in Civil Engineering, under the supervision of an instructor,
will visit such factories, industrial developments, public works,
docks, shipyards, and important examples of engineering construction as are calculated to assist the student best to grasp the
application and scope of the studies pursued and to broaden
his vision of the engineering field. Written reports of trips are
required.
Note:—In periods where no trips are taken, tests of
hydraulic machines will be made in Hydraulic Laboratory. (See
Civil 29.)
27. Civil Engineering Thesis.—Original research on selected
topics; analyses of engineering projects; experimental or theoretical investigations. Topics may be selected from divisions of
the Civil Engineering Course: Goedetics, Railways, Hydraulics,
Municipal, Highways, Economic and Business Engineering,
Structures. Copy of thesis in regular form and binder must be
filed with the department. 1^
28. Seminar. — Written and oral discussion of articles
appearing in the current Transactions and Proceedings of the
various engineering societies, also reviews of important papers
in engineering periodicals; reports on local engineering projects
visited in Civil 26; written outlines must be prepared for all
oral reports; training in technical writing and public speaking.
Required of all Fourth and Fifth Year students in Civil
Engineering.
Reference: Rickard, Technical Writing, McGraw-Hill.
One hour per week.
29. Hydraulic Engineering 3. — Theory, investigation and
design of hydraulic motors and machinery. Turbines, Pelton
and impulse wheels, centrifugal pumps, hydro-electric installations, plant design and operation.
Laboratory work, testing hydraulic machines, arranged for
periods when no trips are taken. (See Civil 26.)
Prerequisite: Civil 12. 214 Faculty of Applied Science
Text-book: Dougherty, Hydraulic Turbines, Third Edition,
McGraw-Hill.
Reference: Gibson, Hydro-electric Engineering; Volume I,
Gibson, Hydraulics and Its Application, Van Nostrand; Mead,
Water Power Engineering, Second Edition, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture per week. Mr. Wilkin.
30. Engineering Problems 1. — Training in methods of
attacking, analyzing and solving engineering problems. Coaching in proper methods of work and study, including drill in
systematic arrangement and workmanship in calculations. The
content is based upon the application of mathematics to problems in physics and engineering.
Prerequisite: First Year Arts, or Senior Matriculation.
Text-books: Duckering, Notes and Problems, Second
Edition, McGraw-Hill; Swain, How to Study, McGraw-Hill.
Two two-hour periods per week.
Mr. Wilkin, Mr. Finlay, Mr. Stuart, Mr. Oliver.
31. Engineering Problems 2.—A continuation of Engineering Problems 1, involving a thorough drill in problems in the
principal divisions of Mathematics given in the Second and
Third Years of Applied Science, drawn from the field of mechanics, surveying, draughting, and engineering.
Prerequisite: Civil 30, Math. 1, 2, 3 and 4.
Text-book: Duckering, Notes and Problems, Second Edition.
McGraw-Hill.
One three-hour period per week.
Mr. Duckering, Mr. Stuart, Mr. Lighthall, Mr. Wilkin.
50. Elementary problems in rural engineering, dealing with
drainage, water supply, sewerage and sewage disposal, ventilation, simple structures and surveying. Adapted to the needs of
students in Dairying.
One lecture per week. Mr. Stuart. Forestry 215
Department of Economics
Professor: Theodore H. Boggs.
Associate Professor: H. F. Angus.
Associate Professor:
Assistant: Peter F. Palmer.
1. Principles of Economics. — An introductory study of
general economic theory, including a survey of the principles
of value, prices, money and banking, international trade, tariffs,
monopoly, taxation, labour and wages, socialism, the control of
railways and trusts, etc.
Text-books: Fairchild, Furniss, Buck, Elementary Economics, Macmillan. The Canada Year Book, 1927.
Two lectures per week. m
Department of Forestry
Professor: H. R. Christie.
Assistant Professor: F. Malcolm Knapp.
Honorary Lecturer: R. M. Brown.
1. General Forestry.—A general survey of the subject.
Text-book: Fernow, Economics of Forestry, Toronto University Press.
References: Whitford and Craig, Forests of British
Columbia, Commission of Conservation, Ottawa. Pinchot, Primer
of Forestry, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C.
Moon and Brown, Elements of Forestry, Wiley, second edition.
Allen, Practical Forestry in the Pacific Northwest, Western
Forestry and Conservation Association, Portland. Schlich, Forest
Policy in the British Empire, fourth edition, Bradbury Agnew.
Zon and Sparhawk, Forest Resources of the World, McGraw-
Hill. Various government publications.
One lecture per week.
2. Forest Mensuration.—Measurement of felled timber, of
standing timber, and of growth of trees and forests. Includes
scaling, timber estimating, and preparation of tables of volume,
growth and yield. 216 Faculty of Applied Science
Text-book: Chapman, Forest Mensuration, Wiley, second
edition. Winkenwerder and Clark, Problems in Forest Mensuration, second edition, Wiley.
Reference books: Graves, Woodsman's Handbook, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C. Graves, Forest Mensuration, Wiley. Carey, Manual for Northern Woodsmen, third
edition, Harvard Press.
One lecture and one period of four hours' field or laboratory
work per week.
3. Forest Protection.—The fire problem, legislation, organizations, prevention and control.
Text-book: Western Fire Fighters' Manual, Western Forestry and Conservation Association, Portland.
Reference books: Millar, Methods of Communication
Adapted to Forest Protection, Dominion Forestry Branch,
Ottawa. U. S. Forest Service, Trail Building in the National
Forests, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D.C.
One lecture per week. Second Term.
4. Forest Finance.—Forestry from the financial standpoint,
including studies of compound interest, valuation, rotation,
insurance and taxation.
Text-book: Roth, Forest Valuation, University of Michigan,
Second Edition.
Reference books: Chapman, Forest Finance, Wiley. Woodward, Valuation of American Timber Lands, Wiley.
Two periods of one hour each, lectures and problems, per
week. Second Term.
5. Timber Physics and Wood Technology.—The structure of
wood; the identification of different woods and their qualities
and uses; wood seasoning; wood preservation; emphasis on the
Canadian woods of commercial importance.
Text-books: Record, Economic Woods of the United States,
Wiley, second edition. Record, Mechanical Properties of Wood,
Wiley. Forestry 217
Reference books: Koehler, The Properties and Uses of
Wood, McGraw-Hill. Koehler and Thelen, Kiln Drying of Lumber, McGraw-Hill. Snow, Wood and Other Organic Structural
Materials, McGraw-Hill. Roth, Timber, U. S. Forest Service,
Bui. 10, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C.
Two lectures and one period of three hours laboratory per
week.
6. Forest Organization. — The principles and methods of
organizing forest areas for business management. Normal forest,
increment, rotation, felling budget, working plans.
Text-book: Roth, Forest Regulation, Roth, University of
Michigan.
Reference books: Recknagel and Bentley, Forest Management, Wiley. Recknagel, Forest Working Plans, Wiley, second
edition. Schlich, Forest Management, Bradbury Agnew. Woolsey, American Forest Regulation, Woolsey, New Haven.
One lecture per week. I
7. History of Forestry and Forest Administration. — The
development of forestry in different parts of the world; forest
resources and industries, policy, legislation and education.
Reference books: Fernow, History of Forestry, University
of Toronto Press, second edition. Schlich, Forest Policy in
the British Empire, Bradbury Agnew. Boerker, Our National
Forests, MacMillan. Ise, The United States Forest Policy, Yale
University Press. Zon and Sparhawk, Forest Resources of the
World, McGraw-Hill. Various government publications.
One lecture per week.
8. Silviculture. — Principles and methods of caring for
forests and growing timber crops.
Text-books: Hawley, Practice of Silviculture, Wiley.
Tourney, Planting and Seeding in the Practice of Forestry,
Wiley.
Reference books: Graves, Principles of Handling Woodlands, Wiley. Woolsey, Studies in French Forestry, Wiley. 218 Faculty op Applied Science
Schlich, Silviculture, Bradbury Agnew. Various government
publications.
Two lectures per week during the year, and one period of
three hours field or laboratory work during the second term.
9. General Lumbering.—A general study of the principles
and practice of logging and milling in the chief timber regions
of North America.
Text-book: Bryant, Logging, Wiley, second edition.
Reference books: Gibbons, Logging in the Douglas Fir
Region, U. S. D. A. Bui. 711, Superintendent of Documents,
Washington, D. C. Berry, Lumbering in the Sugar and Yellow
Pine Region of California, U. S. D. A. Bui. 440, Superintendent
of Documents, Washington, D. C.
Two lectures per week, First Term.
One lecture per week, Second Term.
10. Logging.—An intensive study of logging systems and
operations in the forests of western North America.
Text-book: Gibbons, Logging in the Douglas Fir Region,
U. S. D. A. Bui. 711, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D. C.
Reference books: Various articles in the Timberman,
B. C. Lumberman and other trade journals.
One lecture per week throughout the year; one period of
four hours laboratory or field work per week, alternating with
Forestry 11 and 12.
11. Milling.—A study of the sawmilling and allied woodworking industries of western North America.
Text-book: Bryant, Lumber, Wiley.
Reference books: Oakleaf, Lumber Manufacture in the
Douglas Fir Region, Commercial Journal Co. Brown, American
Lumber Industry, Wiley. Berry, Lumbering in the Sugar and
Yellow Pine Region of California, U. S. D. A. Bui. 440, Superintendent of Documents, Washington, D, C Seeley, Small Sawmills, U. S. D. A. Bui. 718, Superintendent of Documents,
Washington, D. C. Forest Products Laboratories op Canada 219
Two lectures per week; one period of four hours laboratory
or field work per week, alternating with Forestry 10, First
Term.
12. Forest Products.—A study of other forest industries,
including paper and pulp, naval stores, and wood distillation.
Text-book: Brown, Forest Products, Their Manufacture and
Use, Wiley.
Reference books: Joint Authorship, The Manufacture of
Pulp and Paper, Vol. 3 to 5, McGraw-Hill. Hawley, Wood
Distillation, Chemical Catalogue Co.
Two lectures per week; one period of four hours laboratory
or field work per week, alternating with Forestry 1.0. Second
Term.
Vancouver Laboratory
Forest Products Laboratories of Canada
R M Brown, B.Sc.F. (Toronto), Superintendent.
R S. Perry, B.Sc. (McGill), Assistant Engineer.
J. H. Jenkins, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Timber Products Supervisor.
J. B. Alexander, B.Sc. (New Brunswick), D.L.S., A.L.S., Timber Tests
Supervisor.
H. W. Eades, B.Sc.F. (Washington), Assistant Timber Pathologist.
F. W. Guernsey, B.A.Sc. (Brit. Col.), Assistant in Timber Products.
J. T. Lee, Timber Tester.
D. S. Wright, Timber Tester.
The Forest Service of the Federal Department of the
Interior maintains two Forest Products Laboratories, one at
Ottawa, and the other at Vancouver, in association with the
University of British Columbia. The latter was established in
1918 in order to more adequately deal with forest products
research problems of the western portion of Canada. It was
equipped at first only for timber testing, as British Columbia
timbers are of outstanding importance for structural purposes.
The scope of the work of the laboratory has gradually extended
in accordance with the requirements of the timber industry and
now includes lumber seasoning investigations, timber decay 220 Faculty of Applied Science
research, etc. A most important phase of the work of the
laboratory is its technical service to the timber industries in
the dissemination of information on a variety of subjects, such
as wood preservation, utilization of wood waste, pulp and paper,
wood distillation, etc. Research in wood preservation is, at
present, confined to the Ottawa Laboratory. A new co-operative
laboratory has been established at McGill University through an
arrangement with the Canadian Pulp & Paper Association, McGill University and the Forest Products Laboratories of Canada,
which will deal with all questions relating to pulp and paper
research.
An increasingly valuable amount of material has been
collected from the research work of other laboratories and
catalogued for reference.
A mutually beneficial scheme of co-operation exists between
the Laboratory and the University, whereby students of the
University in Engineering and Forestry have access to the
laboratory to watch the work being carried on and to use the
apparatus at times in testing strength of materials. The staff
of the Laboratory also has the benefit of the University library
and the advice and assistance of University specialists in related
work.
Department of Geology and Geography
Professor: R. W. Brock.
Professor of Physical and Structural Geology: S. J. Schofield.
Professor of Palaeontology and Stratigraphy: M. Y. Williams.
Associate Professor of Mineralogy and Petrology: T. C. Phemister.
Geology
1. General Geology.—This course serves as an introduction
to the science of Geology. The following subjects are treated in
the lectures and laboratory:
(a) Physical Geology, including weathering, work of the
wind, ground water, streams, glaciers, the ocean and its work,
the structures of the earth, earthquakes, volcanoes and igneous Geology 221
intrusions, metamorphism, mountains and plateaus, and ore-
deposits.
Two lectures per week, First Term. Mr. Schofield.
(b) Laboratory Exercises in Physical Geology, including
the study and identification of the most common minerals and
rocks, the interpretation of topographical and geological maps,
and the study of structures by the use of models.
Two hours laboratory per week. First Term. Mr. Schofield.
(c) Historical Geology, including the earth before the Cambrian, the Palaeozoic, the Mesozoic, the Cenozoic and Quarter-
nary eras.
Two lectures per week, Second Term. Mr. Williams.
(d) Laboratory Exercises in Historical Geology, consisting
of the general study of fossils, their characteristics and associations, their evolution and migration as illustrated by their
occurrence in the strata. The principles of Palaeogeography
will be taken up and illustrated by the study of the palaeogeography of North America.
Two hours laboratory per week, Second Term. Mr.
Williams.
Field Work will replace laboratory occasionally, and will
take the form of excursions to localities, in the immediate neighborhood of Vancouver, which illustrate the subject matter of the
lectures.
Prerequisite: Matriculation Chemistry or Physics, or Chemistry 1 or Physics 1 or 2 taken either before or concurrently.
Text-book: Pirsson and Schuchert, Introductory Geology,
Wiley.
Reference books: Geikie, Text-book of Geology. Merrill,
Rocks, Rock-Weathering and Soils. Coleman and Parks, Elementary Geology. Shimer, Introduction to the Study of Fossils.
Davis, Geographical Essays. Hugh Miller's works.
Students will be required to make a passing mark in each
of the above subdivisions. 3 unite.
2. (a) General Mineralogy.—A brief survey of the field of
mineralogy. 222 Faculty op Applied Science
Lectures take the form of a concise treatment of (1) Crystallography, (2) Physical Mineralogy, and (3) Descriptive
Mineralogy of 40 of the more common mineral species, with
special reference to Canadian occurrences.
Laboratory Work consists of the study of the common
crystal forms and of 40 prescribed minerals, accompanied by a
brief outline of the principles and methods of Determinative
Mineralogy and Blowpipe Analysis.
Text-books: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by
Ford, Wiley.
Prerequisite: Chemistry 1.
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per
week. First Term. Mr. Phemister. f
2. (b) Descriptive and Determinative Mineralogy. — This
course supplements 2 (a) and consists of a more complete survey
of Crystallography, Physical and Chemical Mineralogy, with a
critical study of about 50 of the less common minerals, special
emphasis being laid on their crystallography, origin, association
and alteration.
Text-book: Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford,
Wiley. At
Prerequisite: Geology 2 (a).
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per
week. Second Term. Mr. Phemister.
3. Historical Geology.—Continental evolution and development of life, with special reference to North America.
Text-book: Schuchert, Historical Geology, 2nd Ed., Wiley.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures per week, First Term. Mr. Williams.
4. Structural and Physiographical Geology.—The following
subjects are treated in the lectures: Fractures, faults, flowage,
structures common to both fracture and flow, mountains, major
units of structures, forces of deformation, the origin and development of land forms with -special reference to the physiography
of British Columbia. Geology 223
Text-book: Leith, Structural Geology, Holt.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures per week. Second Term. Mr. Schofield.
5. (a) History of Geology.—A brief history of the study
of the earth and the development of the geological sciences.
Mr. Brock.
(6) Geology of Canada.—The salient features of the geology
and economic minerals of Canada. Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield,
Mr. Brock.
(c) Regional Geology.—The main geological features of the
continents and oceanic segments of the earth's crust, and their
influences upon life. Mr. Brock.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Three lectures and one laboratory period of one hour per
week.
6. Palaeontology.—A study of invertebrate and vertebrate
fossils, their classification, identification and distribution both
geological and geographical.
Reference books: Grabau and Shimer, North American
Index Fossils. Zittel-Eastman, Text-book of Palaeontology.
Prerequisite: Geology 1.
Two lectures and one laboratory period of two hours per
week. Mr. Williams.
7. Petrology.—This course consists of systematic studies of
(i) optical mineralogy, and (ii) petrography, with an introduction to petrogenesis.
The laboratory work deals with the determination of rocks,
first under the microscope, and then in hand specimens.
Text-books: Pirsson, Rocks and Rock Minerals, Wiley.
Johannsen, Essentials for the Microscopical Determination of
Rock-forming Minerals and Rocks, University of Chicago Press.
Dana, Text-book of Mineralogy, revised by Ford, Wiley.
Reference works: Johannsen, Manual of Petrographic
Methods. Rosenbusch, Microscopical Physiography of the Rock- 224 Faculty of Applied Science
making Minerals, translated by Iddings. Rosenbusch, Elemente
der Gesteinslehre. Harker, Petrology for Students. Gruben-
mann, Die Kristallinen Schiefer.
Prerequisites: Geology 1 and 2.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods of two hours per
week. Mr. Phemister. 4 units.
8. Economic Geology.—A study of the occurrence, genesis,
and structure of the principal metallic and non-metallic mineral
deposits with type illustrations; and a description of the ore-
deposits of the British Empire, special stress being placed on
those in Canada.
Text-book: Emmons, General Economic Geology, McGraw-
Hill.
Reference books: Lindgren, Mineral Deposits, 2nd ed.; Ries,
Economic Geology.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 7 must precede or accompany this course.
Four hours per week.
Mr. Brock, Mr. Williams, Mr. Schofield, Mr. Phemister.
9. Mineralography.—Principally a laboratory course dealing
with the study and recognition of the opaque minerals by means
of the reflecting microscope.
The work consists of practice in the cutting, grinding and
polishing of ore specimens, accompanied by training in micro-
chemical methods of mineral determination.
During the second term each student is assigned a suite of
ores from some mining district for a critical examination and
report.
Text-book: Davy and Farnham, Microscopic Examination
of the Ore Minerals, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Geology 7 and 8 must precede or accompany
this course.
One laboratory period of two hours per week. Mr.Phemister.
10. Field Geology. — The methods taught are the fundamental ones used by professional geologists and by the officers
of the Geological Survey of Canada. The course is essentially Mathematics 225
practical, and is designed to teach methods of observing, recording and correlating geological facts in the field. The students
construct geological maps of selected areas in the vicinity of
Vancouver which require the use of the various methods and
instruments employed in field geology.
Reference books: Lahee, Field Geology. Hayes, Handbook
for Field Geologists. Spurr, Geology Applied to Mining.
Prerequisite: Geology 1. Geology 4, if not already taken,
must be taken concurrently.
One period of three hours per week. Mr. Schofield.
14. Crystallography.—This course consists of a systematic
study of the morphology of crystals, with an introduction to
mathematical crystallography.
The practical work deals with the measurement of crystals,
and, in the case of students in chemistry, a certain number of
the crystals measured will be grown in the laboratory.
Students are advised to consult with the instructor before
registering for this course.
Text-book: Tutton, Crystallography and Practical Crystal
Measurement, Macmillan.
Two lectures and six hours laboratory per week.
Mr. Phemister.^ 5 unite.
Department of Mathematics
Professor: Daniel Buchanan.
Professor: F. S. Nowlan.
Associate Professor: G. E. Robinson.
Associate Professor: E. E. Jordan.
Associate Professor: L. Richardson.
Assistant Professor: B. S. Hartley.
Assistant: Harold D. Smith.
1. Plane Trigonometry.—An elementary course, including
the solution of triangles and the use of logarithms, inverse and
hyperbolic functions.
Text-books: Playne and Fawdry, Practical Trigonometry,
Copp, Clark. Six-Place Tables, McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week. Second Term. 226 Faculty of Applied Science
2. Solid Geometry.—A study of the three-faced corner, the
various polyhedra and solid figures, and the theorems of Pappus.
Text-book: Foster, Geometry, Practical and Theoretical,
(Vol. Ill Solid), Bell.
Two lectures per week. First Term,
3. Algebra.—A review of simple series, permutations, combinations and the binomial theorem, and a study of exponential
and other series, undetermined coefficients, partial and continued
fractions, graphical algebra.
Two lectures per week.
Text-book: Wilson and Warren, Intermediate Algebra
(Larger Edition), Oxford.
4. Calculus.—An introductory study of the differential
and integral calculus will be made, and some of the simpler
applications considered.
Text-book: Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus, Ginn.
Two lectures per week.
6. Calculus.—Differential and integral calculus with variom
applications.
Text-book: Woods and Bailey, Elementary Calculus, Ginn.
Three lectures per week.
7. Analytical Geometry.—A study of the conies and other
curves occurring in engineering practice, and elementary work
in three dimensions.
Text-book: Fawdry, Co-ordinate Geometry, Bell.
Two lectures per week.
8. Applied Calculus. — The applications of calculus to
various problems in engineering.
Three lectures per week.
(Given in 1930-31 and alternate years.)
9. Differential Equations.—A study of ordinary and partial
differential equations and their applications.
Three lectures per week.
(Given in 1929-30 and alternate years.) Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 227
Department of Mechanical and Electrical Engineering
Professor: Herbert Vickers.
Associate Professor of Mechanical Engineering: F. W. Vernon.
Assistant Professor of Mechanical Engineering: H. F. G. Letson.
Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering: Leonard B. Stacey.
Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering: E. G. Cullwick.
Lecturer in Mechanical Engineering: G. Sinclair Smith.
Instructor in Mechanical Engineering: John F. Bell.
Assistant in Drawing: H. P. Archibald.
Mechanical Engineering
1. Mechanical Drawing.—Practice in freehand lettering in
accordance with common practice. Geometrical Drawing, to give
facility in the use of drawing instruments. Freehand sketching
of machine parts and structures from which drawings are made
to scale. Drawing to scale of simple machine parte. Making of
assembly drawings from detail drawings, and detail drawings
from assembly drawings. Tracing and blueprinting.
Two three-hour periods per week.
2. (a) Shop Work.—This work is intended to supplement
the manual training given in the high schools, and also to give
the student some knowledge of the more common machine shop
methods and processes as employed commercially. The object is
to provide some basis for the intelligent design of machines and
structural parts.
Lectures.—Physical properties of the materials used in
machine construction. Modern methods of handling and finishing wood. Forging and hammering of metals. Annealing and
tempering. Making of patterns and cores. Cupola practice.
Soldering and brazing, tinning, electroplating. Drilling
and tapping, turning and boring, calipering and fitting, milling
and milling cutters, reaming and reamers, screw cutting. Grinding and abrasive wheels. Lapping. Punching and shearing.
Drop forging and die-casting. Metal spinning. Torch and
electric welding. Cold sawing and torch cutting. Tool-making
and dressing. Use of jigs. Machine shop standards, including
wire and sheet metal gauges, threads, etc. 228 Faculty of Applied Science
Text-book: Colvin & Stanley, American Machinists' Handbook, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture per week.
Practice in Metal-working.—Bench work, including marking
off, chipping, filing, scraping, tapping, and fitting; lathe work,
including turning and boring, screw-cutting and finishing; lathe
adjustments; shaping; milling; gear-cutting; tool-dressing.
One two-hour period per week.
2. (6) Machine Shop Practice.—A continuation of Mechanical Engineering 2.
Four hours laboratory per week First Term, and three
hours Second Term.
3. Kinematics of Machines.—Velocity, and Acceleration
diagrams of mechanisms. Instantaneous centre of Rotation.
Slider Crank and Quadric-crank chain; quick-return mechanisms; inversion; straight-line motions; epi-cyclic trains; valve-
gears and miscellaneous mechanisms.
Text-book: McKay, Theory of Machines, Longmans Green
& Co.
One two-hour lecture period per week.
4. Dynamics of Machines.—Diagrams of crank effort, piston
velocity and acceleration; flywheel; balancing, rotating and
reciprocating masses; secondary balancing; governors; brakes
and dynamometers; belt-drives; dynamics of the gyroscope;
friction and friction-clutches; impulsive forces in mechanisms.
Text-book: Low, Applied Mechanics, Longmans Green
& Co.
Two lectures per week.
5. Machine Design.—A study of the theory of the properties of materials as applied to the design and construction
of machines.
Reference books: Case, Strength of Materials, Arnold; Kimball and Bar, Elements of Machine Design, Wiley; Spooner,
Machine Design Construction and Drawing, Longmans Green.
Two lectures per week. Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 229
5 (a). Problem Course in Materials and Design.—Examples
and problems illustrating the lectures of M.E. 5 and including
the solution under supervision of actual design problems.
Text-book: L. S. Marks, Mechanical Engineers' Handbook,
McGraw-Hill.
Reference book: As in M. E. 5.
One three-hour period per week.
6. Elementary Thermodynamics.—(a) Fuels and combustion. General principles underlying the construction and operation of steam boilers. Elementary theory of the steam engine.
Measurement of power. Performance of various types of steam
engines. Elementary theory of internal combustion engines.
Design and operation of isolated power plants to give the best
economic results, Theory of air compressors, transmission and
use of compressed air. Elementary theory and practical operation of producer gas plants.
Text-books: Inchley's Heat Engines, Longmans Green; or
Allen & Bursfey, Heat Engines, McGraw-Hill.
Reference books: Ewing, Thermodynamics, Cambridge
Press. Callendar, Steam Power, Longmans Green. Simmons,
Compressed Air, McGraw-Hill. Marks and Davis, Steam Tables
and Diagrams, Longmans Green. Gebhardt, Steam Power
Plant Engineering, Wiley. Kent, Mechanical Engineer's Pocket
Book, Wiley. Fernald & Orrok, Engineering of Power Plants,
McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week.
(b) Laboratory.—Testing of boilers, steam engines and
internal combustion engines. Analysis and calorimetry of fuels.
One three-hour laboratory period per week.
7. Heat Engines.—A more precise study of the thermodynamic theory, construction and performance of steam boilers,
air compressors, reciprocating steam engines, steam turbines
and internal combustion engines.
Text-book: Low, Heat Engines, Longmans Green. 230 Faculty of Applied Science
Reference books: As under M. E. 6.
Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory period per
week.
8. Steam Turbines.—A more advanced course in the
thermodynamic theory, design and performance of steam turbines both marine and stationary.
Reference books: Goudie, Steam Turbines, Longmans
Green; Stodola, Steam and Gas Turbines, McGraw-Hill; Moyer,
Steam Turbines, Wiley.
One lecture per week.
9. Internal Combustion Engines.—A more advanced course
in the thermodynamic theory, design and performance of petrol,
gas and oil engines.
Reference books: Wimperis, Internal Combustion Engines,
Constable; Bird, Oil Engines.
One lecture per week.
10. Refrigeration.—A course in the thermodynamic theory,
design and performance of refrigerating machines as used for
commercial and domestic purposes.
Reference books: Ewing, Mechanical Production of Gold,
Cambridge; Moyer and Fittz, Refrigeration, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture per week.
"8, 9, 10. Laboratory.—The work carried out embodies the
operation and testing of the laboratory machines, illustrating
the theory covered in the lectures. Weekly written reports are
required on the teste carried out.
One five-hour period per week.
11. Heating, Ventilation, and Refrigeration. — Design of
steam, hot water, and hot air systems of heating. Heaters for
steam and water systems. Use of exhaust, steam for heating.
Central heating plants. Loss of heat from buildings. Refrigerating systems.
Reference book: Harding & Willard, Mechanical Equipment
of Buildings (Vols. I and II), Wiley.
One lecture per week. Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 231
12. Design of Power Plants.—A study of the function, construction, and performance of the various machines and appliances which enter into the design of industrial plants. Special
attention is given to the economic results to be expected from
various combinations.
Reference books: Harding & Willard, Mechanical Equipment of Buildings (Vols. I and II), Wiley. Fernald & Orrok,
Engineering of Power Plants, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture per week, and one three-hour laboratory period
per week.
13. Physical Treatment of Metals.—A study of the various
metals used in commercial work, with special reference to the
treatment applied to get the physical properties and qualities
required for specific purposes.
Reference books: Colvin and Juthe, The Working of Steel,
McGraw-Hill; Bullen, Steel and Its Heat Treatment, Wiley;
Dalby, Strength and Structure of Steel and Other Metals,
Arnold.
One lecture and one two-hour laboratory per week.
14. Mechanical Design.—Design of shafts and high-speed
bearings; critical speeds of shafts; machine frames; strength
of armature cores and discs; torsional oscillations; transmission
towers and supports; catenary suspensions; guy ropes; revolving field magnets; turbo-rotors, etc.
Text-book: None advised.
Three lectures and one three-hour drawing office period
per week.
15. Prime Movers.—Theory and design of all types of
hydro-electric machinery from the mechanical standpoint.
Reference book: Gibson, Hydro-electric Engineering, Vol. 1,
Blackie.
Two lectures per week.
16. Machine Design.—The design of machine and structural parts, including parts of engines of all types; design of 232 Faculty of Applied Science
wheel teeth, belt, rope, and chain gearing, flywheels, cams,
clutches, couplings, machine frames, etc.
Text-book: Spooner, Machine Design, Longmans.
Three lectures and one five-hour drawing office period per
week.
17. Mechanics of Materials.—A more complete study of the
properties of materials and more advanced problems in design.
Reference books: As in M. E. 5.
Two lectures per week.
18. Aeronautics.—General theory of flight; aerofoils, lift,
drag, distribution of pressure, aspect ratio, effect of variation
of chamber; steam lines, airscrews, performance curves; general
principles of design and methods of construction; theory of
stability.
Text-book: Warner, Aeronautics, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture per week.
19. Problems in Mechanical and Electrical Engineering.—
The solution under supervision of problems arising from the
lecture courses.
One two-hour period per week.
Electrical Engineering
1. Theory and Operation of Electrical Machines.—A practical course for students not specializing in Electrical or
Mechanical Engineering, designed to introduce to the student
the principal factors in electrical machinery. Enough theory
is given to explain fully the characteristics of the apparatus
studied.
Introductory: Magnetic and electrical circuits, magnetic
and electric measurements, electro-magnetic induction, EMF
equation, motor law.
Direct Current Machines: The generator; simplex armature windings; EMF equation. Armature reaction; commutation. Methods of excitation, load characteristics. Conditions
for self-excitation. The motor—types, speed equation, arma- Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 233
» _ —
ture reaction, commutation, load characteristics, speed control,
applications. Efficiency, rating, parallel operation of generators.
Alternating Current: Generation; wave form; vector representation; maximum, effective and average values. Resistance,
inductance and capacitance in AC circuits—vector, impedance
and admittance—solution of simple net works. Resonance.
Polyphase circuits, power and its measurement. Polyphase
loads.
Alternating Current Machines—Alternator: Emf. equation;
armature winding: magneto-motive forces and fluxes; armature
reaction; leakage reactance; regulation; efficiency; parellel operation of alternators. Synchronous Motor: Principle; vector
diagram; output; power factor; synchronizing; hunting. Trans-
Motor: Principle; vector diagram; output; power factor; synchronizing; hunting; parallel operation of alternators. Transformer: Constant potential: vector diagrams; leakage reactance;
constant current; losses; efficiency; connections; phase transformation; auto and booster transformers. Induction Motor:
Revolving field; slip; characteristics; circle diagram; variable
speed; wound rotor induction motor; choice of type1 starting.
Rotary Converters: Description of operation.
Text-book: Gray, Principles and Practice of Electrical
Engineering, McGraw-Hill.
Prerequisite: Physics 5.
Two lectures and one three-hour laboratory period per
week.
2. Elementary D.C. Technology.—Elementary electro-magnetic theory. Theory and use of direct current generators and
motors. Direct current transmission. Secondary batteries.
Illumination, etc.
Text-books: Langsdorf, Principles of Direct Current
Machines, McGraw-Hill; MacCall, Electrical Engineering Continuous Currents, University Tutorial Press, Ltd.; Smith,
Testing Dynamos and Motors, Scientific Publishing Co.; Mae-
lean, Electrical Laboratory Course for Junior Students, Blackie 234 Faculty of Applied Science
—— —— ■ .- •
and Sons; Bennett and Crothers, Electro-Dynamics, McGraw-
Hill.
For Fourth Year Electrical and Meehanical Students only.
Prerequisite: Physics 3.
First Term: Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory
period per week.
Second Term: One lecture per week.
3. Elementary Alternating Current Technology. — A
thorough treatment of alternating current theory and calculations, with an introduction to the principles of the chief alternating current machines.
Text-books: Lawrence, Principles of Alternating Currents,
McGraw-Hill; MacCall, Electrical Engineering Alternating
Currents, University Tutorial Press, Ltd.; Smith, Practical
Alternating Currents, Scientific Publishing Co.
For Fourth Year Electrical and Mechanical Students only.
Prerequisites: Physics 3.
Second Term: Two lectures and one three-hour laboratory
period per week. ^^AW I
4. Direct Current Machine Design.—This course deals with
the design of armatures, armature windings, the magnetic field
system; shunt and compound windings, and with the complete
design of direct-current dynamos and motors.
Text-book: A. C. Clayton, Direct Current Machine Design,
Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons, Ltd.
Two lectures per week, second term only of fourth year.
Three hours laboratory.
5. Electrical and Mechanical Measurements and Instruments.—A study of the units and quantities of magnetism and
electricity, developing therefrom a detailed treatment of
measurements and measuring instruments of all kinds, in theory
and practice.
Brief Summary: Absolute instruments, secondary instruments ; measurements of current, resistance, potential difference,
and power; measurement of inductance and capacity; watt-hour
meters, recording instruments, phase, power-factor, and fre- Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 235
quency measurements; instrument transformers; determination
of wave form; calibration of instruments, etc.
Text-books: Laws, Electrical Measurements, McGraw-Hill;
Drysdale and Jolly, Electrical Measuring Instruments, London,
E. Benn, Ltd.
For Fourth Year Electrical Students only.
Prerequisite: Physics 5.
Two lectures per week.
6. Problems in Direct Current and Alternating Current
Technology.
Two hours per week.
7. Design of Electrical Machinery.—In this course, the design of slow and high-speed alternators, transformers and induction motors, and rotary converters will be covered. In each
case the design of a machine of each type, together with the
underlying principles will be taught.
Text-books: Gray, Design of Electrical Machinery, McGraw-
Hill; Slichter, Design of Electrical Machinery, Wiley & Sons.
Vickers, The Induction Motor, Sir Isaac Pitman & Sons.
Two lectures per week each term.
Three hours laboratory period.
8. Electric Traction.—In this course will be considered the
various DC and AC systems; speed-time curves, energy consumption curves; train resistance; characteristics of railway
motors; control and control systems; regenerative braking;
equipment and rolling stock; overhead construction and rail
construction, feeder systems and their design. Substation
equipment. Corrosion and its prevention.
Text-book: A. T. Dover, Electric Traction, Sir Isaac Pitman
& Sons.
Reference book: Wilson & Lydall, Electric Traction, Longmans Green & Co.
Two lectures per week each term.
9. Transmission and Distribution of Electrical Energy.—
In this course will be considered the following: Inductance and 236 Faculty of Applied Science
capacity calculations for short and long lines, voltage drops on
short and long lines; charging currents of long lines; voltage
rises on AC systems; automatic protective switch gear; high-
tension cables and their design; lightning arresters; design of
feeders and distributors; Kelvin's law; economics of hydroelectric development; high-tension insulators; Corona, its laws
and losses; voltage and power-factor control of transmission
lines.
Text-books: Loew, Electric Power Transmission, McGraw-
Hill; Still, Overhead Power Transmission, MeGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week each term.
10. Electrical Problem Course.—In this course problems
in electro-technology and transmission and traction will be
covered.
Two hours per week each term. (1 unit)
11. Radio-Telegraphy and Telephony.—In this course will
be considered: Generation of oscillations by spark, arc, high-
frequency alternators, and thermionic vacuum tubes. Open and
closed circuit oscillators. Resonance; coupled circuits and their
characteristics; forced and free vibrations; waves on coils and
wires; propagation of electro-magnetic waves; methods of reception; direction finding; the use of the valve as generator,
amplifier and detector.
Wireless Telephony microphones; transmitting circuits,
receiving circuits, tuning.
Text-books: Morecroft, Principles of Radio Communication, Wiley & Sons; L. B. Turner, Outlines of Wireless, Cambridge Press.
12. Electrical Machinery. Theory of the Transformer. Core
and Shell types. Vector diagrams. Magnetizing current, Regulation, Current Rush on suddenly switching on. Systems of
Connection. Methods of Cooling. Testing.
The Alternator. Salient and non-salient pole types. Alternator windings. EMF equation. Breadth factor, Form Factor,
Coil-span Factor. Method of obtaining pure sine wave form.
Regulation. Calculation of Regulation. Synchronous Impedance. Mechanical and Electrical Engineering 237
Short Circuit Currents. Method of Calculating excitation on
loads of various power factors. Synchronizing of alternators.
Synchroscopes. Parallel Operation of Alternators.
The Synchronous Motor. Single and Polyphase Types.
Vector diagram. Variation of power factor with excitation.
Calculation of excitation necessary for power factor improvement. Damping windings. Hunting and its cure. Methods of
Starting.
The Induction Motor. Windings. Production of Rotating
field, Circle diagram. Slip, torque and other characteristics.
Squirrel Cage and Slip Ring Types. Effect of rotor resistance.
Torque slip curves. Starting methods of Squirrel cage machines. Calculation of steps of starting resistances for wound
rotor machines. Crawling of Induction motors. Leakage fluxes
in Induction motors. Pole changing. Cascade Connection and
its characteristics. Speed Control by rotor resistance, by change
of frequency, by use of AC commutating motors. Hunt Cascade
motor.
Efficiency Tests. Stroboscopic method of slip measurement.
Single Phase Induction Motor Theory.
The Rotary Converter. EMF and current relations. Heating of Rotaries. Methods of Changing voltage ratios. Starting
and Synchronizing.
The Three Phase Commutator Motor. Shunt and Series
Types. Vector diagrams and characteristics.
Text-books: McCall, Alternating Currents, University
Tutorial Press. Lawrence, Alternating Currents, McGraw-Hill.
Steinmetz, Theory and Calculation of Electric Apparatus,
McGraw-Hill. H. Vickers, The Induction Motor, Sir Isaac
Pitman & Sons.
Three lectures per week.
One laboratory period of six hours.
13. Transient Phenomena and Oscillations.—In this course
will be considered the transient phenomena which occur in
switching electric circuits, long transmission lines; standing
and travelling waves; the penetration of current and flux into 238 Faculty of Applied Science
magnetic materials at high frequency; the effective resistance,
inductance and capacity of high frequency circuits; abnormal
voltage rises in AC circuits; transients in radio circuits; waves
and impulses, etc.
Text-book: Steinmetz, Transient Phenomena, McGraw-Hill.
One lecture per week.
14. A general course in electrical engineering for Mechanical Students.
Text-book: Lawrence, Principles of Alternating Current
Machines, McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week.
One laboratory period of six hours.
Department of Mining and Metallurgy
Professor of Mining: J. M. Turnbull.
Professor of Metallurgy: H. N. Thomson.
Associate Professor of Mining: Geo. A. Gillies.
Assistant in Metallurgy: W. B. Bishop.
Mining
1. Metal Mining.—An introductory course in metal mining,
covering the following subjects:
Ores and economic minerals; economic basis of mining;
ordinary prospecting; mineral belts; conditions in British
Columbia; preliminary development of mines; timbering and
framing; tunnelling; shaft sinking; transportation and haulage;
drainage; ventilation.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Turnbull.
2. Coal and Placer Mining.—A general course in coal and
placer mining, covering the following subjects:
(a) Classification of coals; prospecting; mine development;
mining methods; ventilation; transportation and haulage; drainage ; tipples; coal mines acts and laws.
(6) Gravel deposits; nature and origin of paystreaks; prospecting; examination and testing of deposits; ordinary mining Mining and Metallurgy 239
methods; hydraulic and dredging methods; plant and equipment ; placer mines acts and laws.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Turnbull.
3. Metal Mining. — An advanced course in metal mining,
covering the following subjects:
Scientific prospecting; development work in mines; blasting
and explosives; examination of mines and prospects; methods of
ore sampling; mine valuation; accounting and costs, administration; welfare and safety work; mining laws and contracts;
economics; ethics.
Prerequisite: Mining 1.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Turnbull.
4. Mining Machinery.—A special course covering the structural and mechanical features of Mining Engineering, as follows:
Mine structures; mining plant and machinery; core and
churn drills; tramways, etc.
Prerequisites: Mining 1; Mechanical Engineering 3, 6;
Civil Engineering 3 and 10.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Gillies.
5. Mine Surveying.—A practical course covering the work
of the surveyor and staff in metal mines:
Methods and practice in mine surveying; geological work
underground; maps, plans and models; notes and records.
Prerequisites: Civil Engineering 2 and 6.
One lecture per week. First Term. Mr. Turnbull.
6. Mining Design.—A laboratory draughting course covering the special requirements of Mining students in regard to
design of the layout and details of mining plant, structures, and
mine survey plans.
One three-hour period per week. Mr. Gillies.
7. Mining Methods.—A special course covering the mining
of large ore bodies by special mining methods.
Prerequisite: Mining 1.
Concurrent Courses: Mining 2, 3 and 4.
One lecture per week. Second Term. Mr. Turnbull. 240 Faculty of Applied Science
Metallurgy
1. General Metallurgy.—This course covers the fundamental
principles underlying metallurgical operations in general, and
is introductory to subsequent more specialized study.
The lectures follow in general the subject as taken up in
Principles of Metallurgy, by Chas. H. Fulton, including the
following main subjects:
Physical mixtures and thermal analysis. Physical properties
of metals. Alloys. Measurement of high temperatures. Typical
metallurgical operations. Roasting and fusing. Electrometallurgy. Slags. Matte. Bullion. Refractory materials. Fuels.
Combustion. Furnaces.
Text-book: Fulton, Principles of Metallurgy, McGraw-Hill.
Reference books: Hofman, General Metallurgy, McGraw-
Hill. Current Mining and Metallurgical Journals. Trade
Catalogues.
Prerequisites: Chemistry 1 and Physics 1 and 2.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Thomson.
2. Smelting and Leaching.—A general course covering principles and practice of Pyrometallurgy and Hydrometallurgy as
applied to gold, silver, copper, iron, lead and zinc.
Prerequisite: Metallurgy 1.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Thomson.
3. Metallurgical Calculations.—A special course covering
Thermochemistry; Metallurgical Calculations; Furnace Design
and Efficiency; Special Processes.
A large portion of the time will be given to the study of
heat balances of typical smelting operations.
Reference book: Richards, Metallurgical Calculations.
Prerequisites: Metallurgy 1, Chemistry 1.
Two hours per week. Mr. Thomson.
4. Metallurgical Analysis.-—Advanced course in Metallurgical Analysis of Ores and Furnace Products, Pyrometry and
Refractories. Mining and Metallurgy 241
Special attention will be given to analytical methods used
by smelting plants in purchase of ores and control of furnace
operations.
Prerequisites: Metallurgy 1, Metallurgy 6.
Nine hours laboratory per week. Mr. Thompson.
5. Fire Assaying.—Quantitative determination of gold,
silver, and other metals by fire-assay methods, with underlying
principles.
Text-book: Bugbee, Fire Assaying, Wiley.
One lecture and one five-hour laboratory period per week.
First Term. Mr. Thompson. Mr. Bishop.
6. Wet Assaying.—An introductory course in metallurgical
analysis of ores and concentrates.
Most of the time will be given to the technical determination
of zinc, copper and lead.
One three-hour laboratory period per week. Mr. Thomson.
Mr. Bishop.
Ore Dressing
I. Ore Dressing.—A general course covering the concentration of ores by mechanical means.
Most of the time is spent in considering fundamental
principles, typical machines, and their general operations and
relations in modern milling practice, emphasizing the economic
and practical aspects.
Students are taught the commercial and technical characteristics of true concentrating ores, the general principles on which
the size, character, site, and other features of a mill are designed.
The general lay-out of crushing, handling, and separating machinery. The laws of crushing and of various classifying and
separating actions, and the design, operation, and comparative
efficiency .of typical machines, such as crushers, rolls, stamps,
ball and tube mills, jigs, tables, screens, classifiers, and slime-
handling devices.
Attention is paid to pneumatic, magnetic, electrostatic, flotation, and other special processes, including coal-washing. 242 Faculty of Applied Science
Text-books: F. Taggart, A Manual of Flotation Processes,
Wiley.
Reference Books: S. J. Truscott, Text-book of Ore Dressing.
Richards and Locke, Text-book of Ore Dressing.
Two lectures per week. Mr. Gillies.
2. Ore Dressing Laboratory.—-A variety of crushing, sizing,
classifying and separating operations are carried out by the
students and studied quantitatively on appropriate machines,
singly and in combination. Special attention is paid to flotation
processes, several types of machines being used.
Ores from British Columbia mines are usually chosen, so
that the work of the students is along practical lines in comparison with actual work in operating plants.
Prerequisite: Ore Dressing 1.
Nine hours laboratory per week. Mr. Gillies.
Note:—AU students in Mining and Metallurgy are advised to provide
themselves with a copy of Peele's Mining Engineer's Handbook (Wiley),
which is used for reference in many of the courses in which no special textbook is required.
Department of Physics
Professor: T. C. Hebb.
Associate Professor: A. E. Hennings.
Associate Professor: J. G. Davidson.
Assistant Professor: G. M. Shrum.
Assistant: H. W. Fowler.
Assistant: C. G. Patten.
Assistant: H. D. Smith.
Assistant: R. D. James.
The instruction includes lectures on the general principles
of Physics, accompanied by courses of practical work in the
laboratory.
1. Introduction to Physics.—See Physics 1, Arts and
Science, Page 152.
2. Elementary Physics.—See Physics 2, Arts and Science,
Page 153. Physics 243
3. Mechanics.—An elementary treatment of the subject of
statics, dynamics, and hydrostatics, with particular emphasis
on the working of problems. The course is given in the first
half of the Second Year of Applied Science.
Text-books: Loney, Mechanics and Hydrostatics, Cambridge University Press; Millikan, Mechanics Molecular Physics
and Heat, Ginn.
Prerequisite: Physics 1 or 2.
Three lectures and one three-hour laboratory period per
week.
4. Heat.—This course is begun when Physics 3 is finished,
and the six hours devoted to it are divided in the same manner.
The course is based on the supposition that the student is
already familiar with the elementary principles of heat.
Text-books: Edser, Heat for Advanced Students, Macmillan ; Mechanics, Molecular Physics and Heat, Ginn.
5. Electricity and Magnetism.—A quantitative study of
fundamental principles of electricity and magnetism, with special reference to the fact that the student is to be an engineer.
The course includes a short treatment of the elements of
alternating currents.
Text-books: Millikan and Mills, Electricity, Sound and
Light (first part), Ginn; Smith, Electrical Measurements, McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures and one three-hour laboratory period per week.
6. Mechanics—The subject-matter consists of an extension
of the statics and dynamics of Mechanics 1, but with the use
of the differential and integral calculus.
Prerequisite: Physics 3.
Text-book: Poorman, Applied Mechanics, McGraw-Hill.
Two lectures per week.
7. Light.—A short lecture course on light for engineering
students. A study of optical instruments, light sources and 244 Faculty of Applied Science
filters, spectroscopy, photometry, energy measurements, refracto-
meters, interference, diffraction and polarized light.
Text-books: Houstoun, Treatise on Light, Longmans.
One lecture per week.
12. Ions, Electrons, and Ionizing Radiations.—See Physics
12, as in Arts and Science, Page 155.
Department of Nursing and Health
Professor: Hibbert Winslow Hill.
Assistant Professor: Mabel F. Gray.
Part-time Lecturers:
Miss Elizabeth Gertrude Breeze, R.N., Cert. P.H.N. (University of
California).
Miss Margaret Duffleld, Cert.P.H.N. (University of Toronto).
Miss Laura Holland, Cert. School of Social Work (Simmons).
John Ewart Campbell, B.A., M.D., C.M. (McGill).
Ralph Elswood Coleman, M.B. (Toronto).
William A. Dobson, M.D. (Jefferson Medical College).
Mrs. Isabelle M. Gibb, R.N.
Miss Laura B. Timmins, R.N., Cert.P.H.N. (British Columbia).
Miss Ruby Adeline Kerr.
Frank Cornwall McTavish, M.B. (Toronto), L.S.A. (London),
M.R.C.S. (England), L.R.C.P. (London).
Robert Lester Pallen, D.M.D. (North Pacific College of
Dentistry).
Alfred Howard Spohn, M.B. (Toronto).
Frederic Theodore Underhill, L.R.C.P. & S., L.M., and F.R.C.S.
(Edinburgh), D.P.H. (Edinburgh and Glasgow), F.R.S.I.
(London), F.R.I.P.H.
Charles Harvey Vrooman, M.D., C.M. (Manitoba).
Harold White, M.D. (McGill), L.M.C.C.
Henry Esson Young, B.A. (Queen's), M.D., CM., (McGill),
LL.D. (Toronto), LL.D. (McGill), LL.D. (British Columbia), L.M.C.C.
Subjects of Nursing A
(Five-year Undergraduate Course)
1. Introduction to Nursing.—A series of lectures dealing
with the nature of hospital service and discipline, designed to Nursing and Health 245
prepare students for entrance to Schools of Nursing. No formal
credit is given for this course, but attendance is compulsory.
One hour per week, First Year. Miss Gray.
2. History of Nursing.—A series of lectures dealing with
the origin and history of nursing.
One hour a week, Second Year. Miss Gray.
3. Anatomy and Physiology.—A study of the structure and
function of the normal human body as the -basis for the study of
all pathological conditions, as well as for the study of hygiene.
Two hours a week, Second Year. Miss Gray.
Nursing B (Public Health Nursing)
Preventive Medicine in the Public Health Nursing Programme
1. Preventable Diseases. — Brief sketches of the more
important of the preventable diseases; immunology; vaccine
therapy.
One hour a week. Both Terms. Dr. Hill.
2. Epidemiology.—Principles and practice in the control ol
disease.
One hour a week. Both Terms. Dr. Hill.
3. Tuberculosis.—A study of tuberculosis, its prevention
and cure.
Eleven lectures. Dr. Vrooman.
4. Venereal Diseases.—The care and control of venereal
diseases.
Three lectures. Dr. Campbell.
5. Mental Hygiene.—An introduction, with clinical demonstrations, to the study of mental illness, its cure and prevention.
Eleven lectures. Dr. Dobson.
6. Bacteriology.—A short laboratory course to familiarize
students with the practical application of laboratory technique
in Public Health measures.
Hours to be arranged. Mrs. Stewart. 246 Faculty of Applied Science
Child Welfare
7. Infant Welfare.—A series of lectures and clinics dealing
with pre-natal care, and the normal development of the infant;
also dealing with the disorders of infancy, their prevention and
cure.
Eleven hours. Dr. Spohn.
8. Orthopedics.—A series of lectures dealing with the problem of children handicapped by deformities, with emphasis
upon the importance of early recognition of deformities and
their prevention and cure.
Five hours. Dr. McTavish.
Public Health, Hygiene and Sanitation
Public Health, Hygiene and Sanitation.
9. Public Health.—A series of lectures covering the fields
of general hygiene and sanitation.
One hour a week. Fifteen lectures. Dr. Hill.
10. Public Health Administration.—A study of the official
relation of the Public Health Nurse to the Departments of
Health.
Four lectures. Dr. Underhill, Dr. Young.
11. Public Health Organizations.—A series of single lectures dealing with special aspects of their work.
(a) Diagnostic Clinics for Tuberculosis. Dr. Lamb.
(b) The Hospital's Relation to the Community Health Programme. Dr. Bell.
(c) The Rotary Clinic. Dr. Rawlings.
(d) The Workmen's Compensation Act. Dr. Bast in.
12. Vital Statistics.—The general principles governing the
collection and arrangement of statistical facte, and their application in Public Health Nursing.
One hour a week. Eighteen lectures. Dr. Hill. Nursing and Health 247
Nursing
13. Principles and Practice of Public Health Nursing.—
A study of the principles and practice of public health nursing.
One hour a week. Both Terms. Miss Gray.
Text-book: Gardner, Public Health Nursing, Macmillan.
14. Rural Public Health Nursing.—A study of the principles and practice of public health nursing in rural communities.
Six hours. Mrs Gibb.
15. Urban Visiting Nursing Programme.
Two lectures. Miss Duffield.
16. Health Education.—A consideration of the material to
be presented in the teaching of personal hygiene and home nursing, and the method of presentation.
Two hours a week. Second Term. Miss Gray.
17. History of Nursing and Contemporary Nursing Problems.—A study of the origin and history of nursing, followed
by the consideration of recent developments in the nursing field
Two lectures a week. First Term. Miss Gray.
18. Teaching in Schools of Nursing.—A study of the Curriculum; the selection of subjects, and content of each, and
methods of presentation.
One lecture a week. Both Terms. Miss Gray.
19. Principles of Supervision in Schools of Nursing.-—A
study of the organization of the School of Nursing, its relation
to the various departments of the Hospital; and the problems
of training and record keeping.
One lecture a week. Both Terms. Miss Gray.
20. School Hygiene.—A series of twelve lectures given by
members of the staff of the Medical Department of the Vancouver School Board, dealing with the specific problems of this
division of Public Health. 248 Faculty op Applied Science
One hour a week. First Term. Miss Breeze, Miss Kerr,
Dr. Pallen, Dr. White.
21. Social Case Work.—And its relationship to Public
Health Nursing.
Six lectures. Miss Holland.
22. Hospital Social Service.—A presentation of the principles underlying Medical Social Service.
Three lectures. Miss Timmins.
23. Metabolism and Nutrition.
Eleven lectures. Dr. Coleman.
24. Psychology for Nurses.
Two hours a week. Second Term. Dr. Wyman Pilcher.
25. Principles of Education Applied to Teaching.
Two hours a week. Both Terms. Dr. Weir.
26. Public Speaking and Parliamentary Procedure.—Principles and practice, fitting students for giving addresses and
conducting meetings.
One hour a week. Eighteen hours. Dr. Hill.
27. Sociology.—The nature of Sociology as a study; environment; influence of technology and other conditions on social
development, etc.; social pathology.
One hour a week. Both Terms.
Text-book: Beach, Introduction to Sociology, Houghton-
Mifflin.
28. Geography 10.
One hour a week. Both Terms. Mr. Brock, Mr. Schofield.
29. Motor Mechanics.
Practical instruction in the structure and operation of automobiles, including practice driving.
One hour a week. One Term. Mr. Bell. Zoology 249
Department of Zoology
Professor: C. McLean Fraser.
Assistant Professor: G. J. Spencer.
Assistant: Verna Z. Lucas.
Note:—Biology 1 is prerequisite to all courses in Zoology.
1. General Morphology.—General morphology of animals.
Comparative anatomy. The relationships of animal groups.
Comparative life-histories.
Text-books.- T. J. Parker and W. A. Haswell, Manual of
Zoology, Macmillan (American Edition, 1916).
This course is prerequisite to other courses in Zoology.
Two lectures and two hours laboratory per week.
7. Economic Entomology (in part).—The portion of the
course in Economic Entomology that deals with forest insects.
One lecture and two hours' laboratory work per week for
half of Second Term. /■^ At THE
FACULTY
OF
AGRICULTURE 252
Faculty of Agriculture
TIME TABLE
FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE-
FIRST
Monday
Room
Tuesday
Room
Wednesday
Room
9-10
Agronomy 1
AglOO
English 1 b
A 100
AglOO
Agronomy 1
AglOO
Poultry 1
10-11
Animal
Husbandry 1
AglOO
11-12
Biology 1
Zoology 1
AplOO
AplOl
French 1
A 104
A 204
Biology 1
Zoology 1
AplOO
AplOl
12-1
1-2
Chemistry 1 a ....
English 2 b
S800
A 100
Agronomy 1
Agl03
S
Chemistry 1 a
English 2 a
S100
A100
2-3
Agronomy 1
Agl03
S
Botany 1 Lab....
Ap
3-4
Chemistry 1
Lab. 1
S
S
Agronomy 1
Chemistry 2 Lab b
Agl03
S
jJotany 1 Lab....
Ap
Bacteriology 1 ....
4-5
Chemistry 1
Lab. 1 _
Bacteriology 1 ....
S
S
Chemistry 2 Lab b
S
5-6
Chemistry 1
Lab. 1
s
s
Chemistry 2 Lab b
S
Bacteriology 1 ....
SECOND
Monday
Room
Tuesday
Room
Wednesday
Room
Agronomy 2
AglOO
English 1 b
A 100
AglOO
Agronomy 2
AglOO
9-10
10-11
Horticulture 1
AglOO
Animal
Husbandry 4
AglOO
Animal
Husbandry 4
AglOO
Biology 1
Zoology 1
AplOO
AplOl
French 1
A 104
A 204
Biology 1
Zoology 1
AplOO
AplOl
11-12
Botany 1
12-1
1-2
Chemistry 1 a ....
English 2 b
S800
A 100
Agl03
Chemistry 1 a ...
English 2 a
S300
A 100
2-3
Dairying 1 Lab..
Agl08
Agronomy 2
Agl03
Botany 1 Lab...
Ap
3-4
Chemistry 1 Lab. 1
Dairying 1 Lab..
S
Agl08
Chemistry 2 Lab.b
Agl03
S
Botany 1 Lab...
Ap
4-5
Chemistry 1 Lab. 1
Dairying 1 Lab..
S
Agl08
Chemistry 2 Lab.b
S
5-6
Chemistry 1 Lab. 1
S
Chemistry 2 Lab.b
S
KEY TO BUILDINGS: A, Arts; Ag, Agriculture; Time Tables
253
-1929-30
FIRST AND SECOND YEARS.
TERM
Thubsday
Room
Friday
Room
Saturday
Room
English lb
A 100
Poultry 1
AglOO
English la
Poultry 1 .
A100
Agl02
9-10
Animal
Husbandry 1 ...
Chemistry 2
Agll4
S300
Poultry 1
Agl02
10-11
French 1 ... -
A 104
A 204
Animal
Husbandry 1 .....
Agll4
French 1 .
Poultry 1
A104
Agl02
Botany 1 .......
11-12
12-1
Zoology 1 Lab
Ap
Chemistry 1 a
English 2 a
S300
A100
1-2
English 1 a
Zoology 1 Lab
A 100
Ap
Bacteriology 1
S
2-3
Animal
Husbandry 1 .
Chemistry 2 Lab. \
Agll4
S
Bacteriology 1 ...
S .
3-4
Animal
Husbandry 1 .
Chemistry 2 Lab. \
Agll4
S
Biology 1 Lab. 6...
Ap
4-5
Chemistry 2 Lab. b
S
Biology 1 Lab. 6...
Ap
5-6
TERM
Thursday
Room
Friday
Room
Saturday
Room
English 1 b
A 100
AglOO
English 1 a
A 100
9-10
Animal
Husbandry 4 .
Chemistry 2
AglOO
S300
10-11
French 1
A 104
A 204
Horticulture 1 ..
AglOO
French 1
A 104
Botany 1
11-12
12-1
Zoology 1 Lab., ..
Ap
English 2 a
S300
A100
1-2
English 1 a
A 100
Ap
Horticulture 1 ....
Agl04
Zoology 1 Lab
2-3
Chemistry 2 Lab.b
S
Horticulture 1 ....
Agl04
3-4
Chemistry 2 Lab.b
s
Biology 1 Lab
Horticulture 1 ....
Ap
Agl04
4-5
Chemistry 2 Lab.b
s
Biology 1 Lab....,
Ap
5-6
Ap, Applied Science; S, Science. /■^ At FACULTY OF AGRICULTURE
INFORMATION FOR STUDENTS IN
AGRICULTURE
The degrees offered in this faculty are:
Bachelor of Science in Agriculture (B.S.A.) and Master of
Science in Agriculture (M.S.A.).
Courses of Study
Five distinct lines of study are offered, as follows:
(1.) A Four-year Course leading to the Degree of Bachelor
of Science in Agriculture (B.S.A.).
(2.) A One-year Occupational Course in which the basic
work is in Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Dairying,
Horticulture, and Poultry Husbandry, leading to a
Diploma in Agriculture.
(3.) A series of Short Courses at the University, in Agronomy, Animal Husbandry, Dairying, Horticulture and
Poultry Husbandry.
(4.) Extension Courses at different points in the Province.
(5.) Graduate work in Agriculture, leading to the degree,
M.S.A.
Course Leading to the Degree of B.S.A.
Students in Agriculture are required to have Junior
Matriculation or its equivalent before entering upon this course
(see "Matriculation Requirements"). The degree of B.S.A. is
granted only after the successful completion of four years of
lecture and laboratory work The course is planned for students
who wish to obtain a practical and scientific knowledge of
Agriculture, either as a basis for demonstration and teaching,
or as an aid to success in farm management.
The Occupational Course
The Occupational Course is planned for those students
whose academic qualifications are not high, but whose practica- Library Home /
- Search Collections /
- Open Collections /
- Browse Collections /
- UBC Publications /
- The University of British Columbia Calendar
Open Collections
UBC Publications
Featured Collection
UBC Publications
The University of British Columbia Calendar Aug 30, 1929
jpg
Page Metadata
Item Metadata
| Title | The University of British Columbia Calendar |
| Publisher | Vancouver : [University of British Columbia] |
| Date Issued | 1929 |
| Subject |
University of British Columbia |
| Geographic Location | Vancouver (B.C.) |
| Genre |
Periodicals |
| Type |
Text |
| FileFormat | application/pdf |
| Language | English |
| Notes | Titles in chronological order: Annual Calendar of the McGill University College of British Columbia (1909 - 1914) ; Calendar of the University of British Columbia (1915 - 1919) ; Calendar University of British Columbia (1920 - 1922) ; The University of British Columbia Calendar (1923 - 1964) ; UBC Calendar (1963 - 1968) ; The University of British Columbia 69/70 Fifty-Fifth Session ; The University of British Columbia 70/71 Fifty-Sixth Session ; The University of British Columbia Fifty-Seventh Session Calendar 1971/72 ; The University of British Columbia Fifty-Eighth Session Calendar 1972/73 ; The University of British Columbia Fifty-Ninth Session Calendar 1973-4 ; The University of British Columbia Vancouver, Canada Sixtieth Session Calendar 1974/5 ; The University of British Columbia Vancouver/Canada Sixty-First Session Calendar 1975-76 ; 1976-1977 The University of British Columbia Sixty-Second Session Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1977/78 Sixty-Third Session Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 64th Session 1978/1979 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 65th Session 1979/1980 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 66th Session 1980-1981 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 66th Session 1981-82 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 68th Session 1982-83 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 69th Session 1983-84 Calendar ; UBC 1984/85 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 71st Session 1985-86 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 72nd Session 1986-87 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 73rd Session 1987-88 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 74th Session 1988-89 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 75th Session 1989-90 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 76th Session 1990-91 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 77th Session 1991-92 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 78th Session 1992-93 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 79th Session 1993-94 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1994/95 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1995/96 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1997/98 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1998/99 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 1999/2000 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia 2000/2001 Calendar ; 2001/2002 Calendar ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2003/04 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2004/2005 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2005/2006 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2006/07 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2007/08 ; The University of British Columbia Calendar 2008/09. |
| Identifier | LE3 .B8 LE3_B8_1929-30 |
| Collection |
University Publications |
| Source | Original Format: University of British Columbia. Archives |
| Date Available | 2016-06-22 |
| Provider | Vancouver : University of British Columbia Library |
| Rights | Images provided for research and reference use only. Permission to publish, copy, or otherwise use these images must be obtained from The University of British Columbia Enrolment Services: direct inquiries to www.students.ubc.ca/calendar |
| CatalogueRecord | http://resolve.library.ubc.ca/cgi-bin/catsearch?bid=1209095 |
| DOI | 10.14288/1.0169859 |
| AggregatedSourceRepository | CONTENTdm |
Download
- Media
- calendars-1.0169859.pdf
- Metadata
- JSON: calendars-1.0169859.json
- JSON-LD: calendars-1.0169859-ld.json
- RDF/XML (Pretty): calendars-1.0169859-rdf.xml
- RDF/JSON: calendars-1.0169859-rdf.json
- Turtle: calendars-1.0169859-turtle.txt
- N-Triples: calendars-1.0169859-rdf-ntriples.txt
- Original Record: calendars-1.0169859-source.json
- Full Text
- calendars-1.0169859-fulltext.txt
- Citation
- calendars-1.0169859.ris